Home

WordPerfect Office 2002 User Guide

1. 416 groupware CorelCENTRAL Address Book 404 P CorelCENTRAL Calendar 404 PalmPilot enabling CorelCENTRAL conduits 426 pasting L memotext 2 2 k 422 linked fields Creating ew 418 419 to applications 419 Q to email addresses 419 quitting tofiles 2 2 2 2 ee o 419 CorelCENTRAL eee 408 430 Index CoreLCENTRAL 10 CorelCENTRAL Memos S saving card file templates scheduling events on specific days and weeks weekly scheduling tasks on specific days and weeks single weekly selecting dates in a calendar starting CorelCENTRAL Memos status bar CorelCENTRAL displaying in CorelCENTRAL hiding in CorelCENTRAL T tasks assigning to events CorelCENTRAL Calendar scheduling in a calendar templates card file b CorelCENTRAL Card File title bar CorelCENTRAL toolbar CorelCENTRAL displaying in CorelCENTRAL hiding in CorelCENTRAL 421 416 413 413 412 412 412 411 421 408 408 408 414 412 411 415 415 408 408 408 408 Index Corel CENTRAL 10 431
2. 307 Creating data charts o 8005 Sizing and moving data charts an oe e is ces sks e 806 Adding legends to data charts E Adding titles to data charts 307 Labeling data charts we 307 Working with datasheets q 309 Manipulating datasheets 809 Adding and copying data in datasheets 309 274 Table of contents Corel Presentations 10 Working with datasheet cells Working with rows and columns in datasheets Using formulas and number fills in datasheets Working with organization charts Creating and saving organization charts Adding and editing text in organization charts Adding and replacing positions in organization charts Viewing organization charts Changing organization chart branch structures and orientation Printing in Corel Presentations Printing slide shows and drawings Internet ANd electronic publishing Publishing slides and drawings as HTML documents Publishing to Portable Document Format PDF Sending slide shows to other applications 311 311 312 21 315 316 316 317 318 221 727 325 326 326 Table of contents Corel Presentations 10 277 Welcome fo Corel Presentations 10 Corel Presentations lets you create high quality slide shows and drawings that can include text data charts organization charts and graphic objects You can use Corel Presentations to produce professional looking
3. 0 amp or To create a Table structure using The Table Expert 1 Click File New gt Table 2 Click Table expert 3 Follow the steps of the Expert Saving Tables After you create the table structure and define its properties you need to save and name the table To save a table 1 Click Create 2 Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the table 3 Type a table name in the File name box 4 Click Save Setting validity checks Validity checks ensure that the values entered into your database tables meet certain criteria You can set minimum and maximum numeric values to ensure that entered data falls within a certain range You can set a default value to appear in a field automatically which saves data entry time in cases where the same value is used for the majority of records You can identify a picture template to ensure that entered data always follows the same format You can also indicate whether a value must be entered in a field before the record is complete To ser a minimum value for a field 1 Press TAB to move the cursor to the Min column 2 Type the value you want to set as the minimum value To ser a maximum value for a field 1 Press TAB to move the cursor to the Max column 2 Type the value you want to set as the maximum value To set a default value for a field 1 Press TAB to move the cursor to the default field 2 Type the value that you want to use as the default To ser a
4. a 118 Merging documents y E y 121 Creating data for a merge oe fies Weve ee AA a S 121 Working with form documents for a merge 123 Associating merge files ee 125 Performing a merge we 126 Sorting viewing and finding data in data files a 128 Selecting specific data for merges 2 2 2 128 Publishing Web documents A 131 Publishing to HTML 131 Publishing to PDF we 132 Building XML documents o 133 Table of contents WordPerfect 10 33 Welcome to WordPerfect 10 WordPerfect 10 is a powerful word processing application that helps you produce newsletters articles reports proposals books and other documents WordPerfect lets you add graphics tables and charts to documents You can publish to paper electronic media and the World Wide Web WordPerfect allows you to format structure and edit documents at any time and gives you complete control over their design In this section you ll learn about e what s new in WordPerfect 10 e what s different in WordPerfect 10 What s new in WordPerfect 10 WordPerfect 10 has new and enhanced features that let you create professional looking documents The following table shows the new features and what they do Feature What it does Align and distribute tool Auto suggest filename Document review margin markers Enhanced HTML publishing with Cascading Style Sheet CSS support
5. on the left and right ends of the ruler Margin settings affect the current page and subsequent pages until you change them Left and right margins are used to set the length of the lines in a document You can set margins before you enter text or you can apply margins to the text you select WordPerfect lets you set page margins by using margin guidelines exact measurements or the ruler You can set the top bottom left and right margins in a document You can set margins for the entire document or for a few paragraphs FORMATTING PAGES 45 To ser The page margins by using The margin guidelines 1 Click View gt Guidelines 2 Enable the Margins check box 3 Point to one of the following guidelines e left vertical dotted guideline e right vertical dotted guideline upper horizontal dotted guideline lower horizontal dotted guideline The pointer changes to a double sided arrow 4 Drag the guideline to the position you want To ser The page MARGINS by USING EXACT MEASUREMENTS 1 Click a page 2 Click Format gt Margins 3 Click the Page setup tab 4 Inthe Margins area type values in any of the following boxes e Left lets you specify where the left margin starts Right lets you specify where the right margin starts e Top lets you specify where the top margin starts Bottom lets you specify where the bottom margin starts 5 Click one of the following Equal lets you set all four margin settings equ
6. FORMATTING TEXT iN TEXT Objects You can move individual characters or blocks of text and you can delete them By justifying text you can position it left right or center in relation to the sides of a text box You can also indent lines or paragraphs of text 274 Corel Presentations 10 You can adjust the spacing between lines of text To MOVE TEXT 1 Double click a text object 2 Select the text 3 Drag the selected text to a new position inside the selected text object To delete TExT 1 Double click a text object 2 Select the text 3 Click Edit gt Delete To justify Text 1 Click a text box 2 Click Format gt Justification and click one of the following e Left aligns text to the left Right aligns text to the right e Center aligns text to the center To indent TEXT 1 Double click a text box 2 Click at the beginning of a line of text 3 Click Format gt Paragraph and click one of the following e Indent indents the left margin of the paragraph by one tab stop Hanging indent indents all but the first line of the paragraph by one tab stop Double indent indents the paragraph equally from both sides To set line spacing 1 Click a text box 2 Click Format gt Line Spacing 3 Type a number in the Spacing box From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Changing text with Corel RealTime Preview Corel RealTime Preview changing text
7. 7 You can move the insertion point within a cell by using the arrow keys To clear values in A RANGE Of cells without clearing formulas 1 Select a range of cells Click Edit Cut Click Edit Paste special Disable the Number cells check box Click Paste uk WN To find and replace data 1 Click Edit Find and replace Type the text or value to find in the Find box Type the replacement text or value in the Replace box Type the cells to search in the Cell s box uk WN In the Look in area enable one of the following options Editing and formatting a spreadsheet 193 e Formula finds data in a formula e Value finds data in a value e Condition compares cells in the spreadsheet with any conditions specified in the Find box 6 Click one of the following buttons Find next Previous 7 Click Replace You can also Search down columns before searching across Enable the Columns first check box rows Find an exact match Enable the Match whole check box Match the capitalization of the text in the Find box Enable the Case sensitive check box Xi Quattro Pro makes replacements from the cursor position to the end of a document so you must position the cursor at the beginning of a document before you search You can replace all occurrences of the search item with the replacement text or value by clicking Replace all R Gq When using conditional searches type a question mark
8. For more information about In the online Help Index type Exporting tables to spreadsheets Sorting data in tables Navigating named tables table components or floating cells Locking table cells Displaying table gridlines Adding diagonal lines to table cells Creating table styles Changing text alignment in tables Applying and customizing numeric formats Naming tables Using operators Using WordPerfect table functions tables exporting tables sorting data tables navigating table cells locking table gridlines displaying table cells adding diagonal lines table styles tables aligning text numeric formats tables naming operators table functions Using tables and charts Applying borders and fills Applying borders and fills lets you emphasize information make it easier to read and add visual appeal to a document The following image shows 1 a graphic 2 a graphic to which a border was applied 3 a graphic to which a border and a fill were applied and 4 a graphic to which a border fill and drop shadow were applied KK In this section you ll learn about e adding borders e editing borders e removing borders applying fills Adding borders You can add a border around a graphics box paragraph column or page To add a border TO a graphics box 1 Right click a graphics box and click Border fill 2 Choose a border pattern from the Available border styles list
9. INSERTING iMpoRTING ANd combining files Quattro Pro lets you insert a file into a notebook This lets you specify a location for the inserted data You can also import both delimited and fixed width text files When you import text you can specify how the text should be arranged on the spreadsheet Arranging data into columns and rows is called parsing For example you can parse a column of long labels into two or more columns of data When you open a text file that includes tabs indicating new segments of data Quattro Pro starts a new column each time it encounters a tab in the text Every sheet in the inserted or imported file that contains data is placed on a new sheet in the active notebook If only one sheet is inserted the sheet is given the name of the inserted file If multiple sheets are inserted the new sheets are named in the default letter sequence You can save notebooks as tab or comma delimited text files You can also import unformatted text You can combine files by adding subtracting multiplying or dividing the cells of two notebooks Adding data is useful for combining files for a cumulative total For example you could compile Managing files and data 221 year to date figures from monthly notebooks to create a cumulative notebook showing year to date expense totals To insert a file into a Notebook 1 Close the file you want to insert 2 Click Insert gt Insert file 3 Choose a filename If you
10. O N Click File Open Report Choose the drive and folder where the report is stored Double click a report Click View Design report Click the Graphic tool aa Click and drag over the spot on the report where you want to add the graphic Make the frame roughly the same size as the graphic Click Edit Paste from Choose the drive and folder where the graphic file is stored Double click a graphic file Moving or deleting objects Each item on your report is treated as a separate object These objects can be moved and deleted To move AN object ON A REPORT nau WN Click File Open Report Choose the drive and folder where the report is stored Double click a report Click View Design report Click the object Drag the object to a new position on the report Working with reports 317 To delete an object ON A REPORT Click File Open Report Choose the drive and folder where the report is stored Double click a report Click View Design report Click the object Press DELETE DU FWN Changing the color of objects Color adds visual interest to a report and can serve to highlight certain information To change the color of an object Click File Open Report Choose the drive and folder where the report is stored Double click a report Click View gt Design report Click an object to select it Right click the object and click Properties Click the G
11. e Create creates a new form document Xi The association is stored in the form document Merging documents 125 To associate a form document with a data SOURCE 1 Open a form document that has no association with a data source 2 Click Go to data on the Merge toolbar 3 Click one of the following Select associates a data file e Create creates and names a new data file or form file e Address book associates an address book ODBC associates a ODBC data source Xi For information about associating an ODBC data source see To associate a form document with an ODBC data source in the online Help PerfoRMING A MERGE When you perform a merge you combine a form document and a data source to create a new series of documents WordPerfect provides a variety of output options for the new documents For example you can save it to disk print it or add it to the active document The following image shows 1 a data source document 2 a form document and 3 merged documents You can create envelopes as you merge a form document such as a letter or you can create merged envelopes on their own An envelope is created for each record selected in the data source For more information about working with envelopes see Creating envelopes in the online Help You can also send each merged document as email 126 WordPerfect 10 To perform A MERGE 1 2 3 4 5 Click Tools Merge Click Form
12. tables time different features comments HTML merging 68 87 85 121 121 123 98 103 112 125 121 121 121 128 121 121 128 128 128 125 121 123 123 41 42 41 41 56 56 42 91 87 105 105 105 105 105 42 36 35 36 136 Index WordPerfect 10 navigating 36 publishing to PDF 36 E rulers 36 editing selecting text 36 automatic 85 tables 36 borders 116 two page viewing 35 date 41 disabling documents 85 Corel RealTime Preview 61 drop caps 62 Grammar As You Go 86 endnotes 74 Prompt As You Go 86 fills 118 Spell As You Go 86 footers 54 discontinuing footnotes 74 footers 55 headers 54 headers 55 time 41 page numbers 83 email distributing Mergingto we 126 127 objects 96 embedding document components graphics 91 understanding 39 enabling document layout Grammar As You Go 86 choosing 48 49 Prompt As You Go 86 document windows QuickCorrect 87 viewing footers 54 Spell As You Go 86 viewing headers 54 endnotes documents changing location 75 closing 43 changing number formats 75 creating 40 changing numbering methods 76 editing 85 changing spaces between 75 formatting 45 changing to footnotes 74 opening 40 41 continuing on other pages 75 printing 42 converting to footnotes 74 saving 42 creating 73 saving changes 42 editing 74 saving for the first time 42 formatting 74 saving to new locations 42 restarting numbers at 1 76 s
13. 1123 3221 Analyzinq dara 217 1034 1101 And you can express the results of the equations in this 4 by 1 constant matrix the first variable is at the top of the list the second is next and so on 10 20 15 6 You can use matrix multiplication and inversion to find the value of each variable in the second matrix that satisfies the constraints in the first matrix Matrix multiplication is helpful when you need to multiply the elements of one matrix by the elements of a second and sum their products For example matrix multiplication can calculate the cost of several types of building materials across development phases or it can compute job costs involving different labor categories Matrix inversion is the first step in solving sets of linear equations When you multiply a matrix by its inverse the resultant matrix is an identity matrix all 1s and Os with only a single diagonal of 1s You cannot invert a matrix that is mathematically singular A matrix is singular when its determinant equals zero You cannot invert a matrix with mathematical redundancies or inconsistencies You can invert square matrices only A square matrix is one with the same number of rows and columns To multiply two matrices 1 Click Tools Numeric tools Multiply matrices 2 Click the Range picker he in the Matrix 1 box and select the first matrix to multiply 3 Click the Range picker in the Matrix 2 box and select the second matrix
14. 297 to files 322 painting viewing print status 321 complete area of bitmapped images 298 printing support 259 specific areas of bitmapped images 297 publishing PDF drawings eae 325 publishing 326 drawings as HTML documents 325 publishing slide shows 326 drawings to the Web 325 support 259 slide shows as HTML documents 325 PerfectExpert 259 slide shows to PDF 326 pickup color tool 298 slides ad tee Ze 325 pie charts 305 slides as HTML documents 325 playing slides to the Web 325 portable slide shows 290 to PDF 326 slide shows de 289 to the Web 325 slide shows automatically 289 slide shows manually 289 slide shows using QuickPlay 290 Q polylines QuickPlay ae the shape oe using to play slide shows 290 rawing transforming into circles 291 portable R creating slide shows 265 Portable Document Format PDF 326 eget charts 303 portable slide shows panes 299 creating 265 range of data playing 290 importing to datasheets from spreadsheets 310 positions range of slides adding coworkers to organization charts 317 printing 322 adding managers to organization charts 317 ranges let adding staff and subordinate to organization charts 317 highlighting datasheet cells de displaying subordinate 318 pelas hiding subordinate Koes 318 changing font ua replacing managers with subordinates 317 removing predefined projects slides 203 opening new slide shows 262 tt 21 previewing replacing print jobs 321 color
15. 4 Type the number of the CD track in the Track box 5 Disable the From beginning check box 6 Inthe Start location area type a value in any of the following boxes e Minutes e Seconds e Frames Disable the To end check box on In the End location area type a value in any of the following boxes e Minutes Seconds e Frames Working with movies in slide shows You can add movies to slide shows in a variety of formats including Animated GIF Gif Moving Pictures Experts Group Mpeg Audio Video Interleaved Avi and QuickTime Mov and Qt 302 Corel Presentations 10 The following image shows that you can add movie files to slide shows vel lliure r Aal cabri vH ule P hial WER 1 im Prier To add a movie file ro a slide show 1 Click Insert Movie 2 Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored Ifyou want to save the movie within the slide show enable the Save movie within slide show document check box 3 Choose a file type from the File type list box Type a filename in the Filename box 5 Click Insert Liz To insert Mov and Mpeg movie files into Corel Presentations slide shows you must O7 install the required MCI driver Inserting a movie file into a slide show greatly increases the file size of the slide show From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Recording sound files Turning off sound files Changing movie file
16. 9 Click Insert symbol SETTING TEXT ATTRIbuTES You can customize the text in a slide show or drawing by setting text attributes You can change the font by using a variety of font types sizes and colors For example you can use Arial font in 12 point size and in red You can also apply a style such as bold italic or underlined As well you can apply an outline to text To change the Font of text 1 Double click a text object Select the text Click Format gt Font Click the Font tab Choose a font from the Face list uk WN You can also Change the appearance of text In the Appearance area enable the Bold Italic or Underline check box Change the font size Choose a font size from the Size list box Change the font size relative to the current size Click the Relative size picker and click a size Change the font color Open the Color picker and click a color Restore the text appearance Right click the selected text and click Normal Os You can view a list of available attributes for each font by clicking the plus sign to NY theleft of the font To outline Text Double click a text object Select the text Click Format gt Font Click the Outline tab Open the Color picker and click a color Open the Style picker and click an outline style N DU aun Open the Width picker and click a line width If you want to specify the line width type a value in the box below the Width picker
17. From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Using font mapping Using character maps for non Roman languages Creating subscript text Creating superscript text Using hidden text Reversing the color of text Reversing the color of the background Importing objects Inserting characters and symbols Editing quotation marks Correcting the spacing between words and sentences Changing the spacing between letters and words Changing the spacing between lines and paragraphs Advancing text to a different position Using baseline placement for typesetting Setting hyphenation prompts and notifications Inserting and changing hyphens by using codes font mapping character maps subscript text superscript text hidden text reversing text color reversing background color objects importing characters quotation marks editing correcting spacing between words and sentences changing the space between letters spacing changing between lines advancing text to different positions baseline placement typesetting hyphenating setting notifications hyphenating using codes 72 WordPerfect 10 Working with footnotes and ENCNOTES Footnotes and endnotes allow you to provide more information about a topic discussed in a document In this section you ll learn about creating footnotes and endnotes editing footnotes and endnotes converting footnotes to endnotes or endno
18. Index Corel Presentations 10 adding formulas 312 printing 321 deleting from datasheets 312 text attributes 274 inserting in datasheets 311 working with in datasheets 311 complete area D painting bitmapped images 298 data configuring adding and copying in datasheets 309 printer settings 321 exporting from datasheets a a 310 contrast effect 299 importing to datasheets from spreadsheets 310 copies data chart legends rotating objects 284 adding be 306 copying displaying 306 data in datasheets 309 displaying inside data chart 306 unique colors in bitmapped images 298 data chart subtitles Corel Application Recovery Manager 257 adding 307 Corel ARM 257 data chart titles Corel Connector 257 adding 307 Corel Corporation 257 data charts Corel Internet Publisher adding labels 307 publishing slides and drawings 325 adding legends 306 Corel Presentations adding subtitles 307 printing 321 adding titles 307 Corel Presentations 10 creating 305 welcome 257 displaying legends 306 what s different 259 labeling 307 what s new 257 moving 306 coworker positions shrinking 306 adding to organization charts 317 sizing y 306 creating sizing proportionally 306 alignment guides 268 stretching 306 backgrounds 270 working with datasheets 309 bitmapped images 295 data series bulleted lists iy a LIT creating 305 drawings 265 266 datasheet cells layouts opinas ot 270 highlighting ranges 311 new levels for existing
19. More Help on v To enable the PerfectExpert From a WordPerfect Office 2002 application click Help gt PerfectExpert We want your feedback If you have comments or suggestions about WordPerfect Office 2002 documentation you can email them to wpodocs corel ca or mail them to the address below Unfortunately we may not be able to respond to your messages individually WordPerfect Office 2002 Documentation Manager Corel Corporation 1600 Carling Avenue Ottawa Ontario Canada K1Z 8R7 All comments or suggestions communicated to Corel shall be deemed non confidential and Corel shall be free to reproduce use disclose publish and transmit such information in any matter whatsoever without limitation Welcome to WordPerfect Office 2002 23 Orther sources for learning WordPerfect Office 2002 Other sources for learning about using WordPerfect Office 2002 applications inlcude the following World Wide Web Corel s site on the World Wide Web provides resources to help answer your questions about WordPerfect Office 2002 For information about these resources see Technical support on the World Wide Web on page 25 Corel eStore If you want to learn about getting more out of WordPerfect Office 2002 visit Corel eStore on the World Wide Web at www corel com estore This online shopping forum provides a listing of books tutorials and training videos Corel Training Partners Corel Training Partners provide co
20. SAY holding down SHIFT and clicking the tab of the last spreadsheet to include in the group You can create a new spreadsheet group by changing the entries in the First sheet and Last sheet boxes To enable or disable Group mode e Click View Group mode When group mode is enabled a blue line displays below the spreadsheet tabs in the group To copy data to spreadsheets in A GROUP 1 Click View Group mode to disable group mode 2 Select the source data to copy 3 Click Edit Copy 4 Click View gt Group mode to enable group mode 5 Select the destination cell in any spreadsheet in the group 6 Click Edit gt Paste To delete a spreadsheet Group 1 Click Insert Name gt Name group of sheets 2 Choose a group from the Defined groups box 3 Click Delete Moving selected cells by dragging Quattro Pro lets you visually choose exactly where to move selected cells by dragging the cells You can move cells anywhere on the active spreadsheet to another spreadsheet or to another notebook A colored outline of the cell selection moves with a four way arrow as a guide to help you locate an area to which to move cells You can modify the delay time of the arrow that displays when you drag a selection of cells To move cells by dragging 1 Select a cell or cells 2 Point to an edge of the cells until a four way arrow displays 3 Drag the cells to the destination area op You can use the colored outline as a guide when you mo
21. rl ai oF FRAMKFURTERHICD FreePran 21 Bik M GOLDMINE GoudyOt BT HORHDOND To change the Font 1 Click in the document 2 Click Format gt Font 3 Click the Font tab lee AgeD JPITTER Kids Todas LITHOGRAPH Schneider Blk BT SH TCON ET Oro 4 Choose a font from the Face list You can also Change the font style Change the font size Change the relative font size Change the font color In the Appearance area enable any of the check boxes Choose a font size from the Size list box Click Relative size and click a font size Open the Color picker and click a color You can also change the font color by clicking the Font color button a on the Na ES Y property bar and clicking a color You can also change the underline font style by opening the Underline picker on the property bar and clicking an underline To change the Font using Corel RealTime Preview 1 Click in a document 2 Open the Font face list box on the property bar and point to a font Changes to the font display in the font face preview window 3 Choose a font from the Font face list box 60 WordPerfect 10 gt lt You can change the font size using Corel RealTime Preview by opening the Font size S W list box on the property bar viewing the font sizes in the font size preview window and choosing a font size To disable Corel RealTime Preview 1 Click Tools gt Settings 2 Click the Display icon 3 Click
22. 188 189 188 188 187 188 188 189 187 totals grand trademark symbol transposing columns columns and rows rows TrueType font typeover mode typing over data U underlining text undoing actions disabling enable level number of unjoining cells unlocking protected cells unprotecting cells data updating CrossTab report data V values changing to labels clearing entering seed totaling values in columns totaling vertical alignment vertical side bars vertically rotating view changing Draft View formulas new views of notebook notebook Page Breaks View Page View 188 182 197 198 197 198 203 192 192 203 194 195 194 195 195 203 192 191 192 191 236 182 183 192 193 184 185 186 187 187 187 206 207 203 208 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 248 Index Quattro Pro 10 Selecting lt gt ao he at a a AZ pes ey ds oe i esc a ew Org ia ZOOM es er A A OAS View Menu gO 151 viewing calculations ia a 189 COMMEN S e 2 A a e AS Margins oc he ewe om Ch Be ee ZN page breaks 2 2 we 209 spreadsheet groups 196 W Web links linking to notebooks 229 width adjusting column 201 changing column 99 changing default 2 2 a 198 columnis s 2 4 eo geo RAG we Ge ce 199 increasing column 198
23. Once you have created a spreadsheet you can enter data and perform calculations For example you can enter a list of items and the cost of each item and then calculate the total cost of all items In this section you ll learn about e creating and opening notebooks e entering labels and special characters e entering values e filling cells and spreadsheet tabs automatically e creating simple equations performing running calculations Creating and opening notebooks When you start a new spreadsheet in Quattro Pro you must first create a notebook You can create a notebook from a list of project templates or from the default template Project templates prompt you for data and then format and calculate it automatically When you create a notebook from the default template you must format the data yourself and perform your own calculations A Quattro Pro spreadsheet consists of 1 000 000 rows and 18 000 columns Each notebook contains 18 000 spreadsheets If a project does not require such a large range you can change the size of the notebook Limiting the size of a notebook makes the scroll bars more useful and protects you from writing data out of range You can also open a notebook or customize the start options to automatically open a specific notebook every time you start Quattro Pro To create A Notebook e Click File New Creating A spreadsheet 181 To create a Notebook using a project template Click File New from
24. Scanning images mode toggle modifying shapes editing points modifying lines fills changing in images converting images to black and white rotating changing center images rotating using exact measurements objects linking objects embedding images scanning Using Graphics 99 Using tables and charts WordPerfect 10 lets you create tables and charts Tables let you organize data in rows and columns of cells Tables can contain text or graphics and can be formatted You can use tables to present lists schedules financial data comparisons and summaries Charts can enhance the presentation of data in a document You can use data charts to display comparisons trends and statistics or you can use organization charts to display an organization s structure In this section you ll learn about e creating tables e selecting and moving table components e setting and inserting rows and columns in tables e joining and splitting table cells e deleting tables and table components e rotating table cell contents and skewing cells e adjusting table column widths e creating table header rows and adjusting table rows e applying fills lines and color to tables e applying borders to tables e entering formulas in tables e calculating formulas in tables e creating charts Creating tables A table consists of rows which run horizontally and columns which run vertically Rows and columns intersect to create
25. Stars lets you create various types of stars e Callout lets you create callouts which can be used to enclose text e Action lets you create shapes used to denote action Click a shape on the palette Click OK Point to where you want to create the shape nu kW Drag to draw the shape ee Enabling the lines option also allows you to create polylines For more information about creating polylines see To create a polyline in the online Help DI You can insert precise horizontal vertical and diagonal lines by holding down CTRL SW while you draw a line You can create a square by holding down SHIFT while you draw a rectangle 90 WordPerfect 10 To save a qraphic 1 Select a graphic 2 Click File Save as 3 In the Save dialog box click Selected image 4 Click OK 5 In the Save image as dialog box choose the drive and folder where you want to save the graphic a Type a filename in the Filename box N Choose a file type from the File type list box If you want to save fonts with a graphic enable the Embed fonts check box 8 Click Save To delete a Graphic 1 Select a graphic 2 Press DELETE To hide or display qraphics e Click View gt Graphics A check mark next to the Graphics command indicates that graphics are displayed aia By default graphics are visible in the Document window INSERTING GRAphics You can insert clipart images into a WordPerfect document You can use the clipa
26. Undo changes to a field Click Edit Undo field changes Delete a field Click a field Click Cards Delete field To create A COMMENT Field Click a card file tab Click a field Click Cards New comment field Type a field name uk WN Click the initial field contents and type text You can also View a comment field Click the Plus sign next to a global or local field Delete a comment field Click a comment field Click Cards gt Delete comment field Creating linked fields You can create linked fields which use hypertext to link to card files memos files applications folders Web sites and email addresses When you create a linked field a comment field is created that contains the location of the card file memo file application folder Web site or email address The following table lists and describes the links that you can create Link a field to If you want to A memo Start CorelCENTRAL Memos Another card file Open another card file A file or application Open a file start an application or both A folder on your computer Open a folder in Windows Explorer An email address Send an email by using the email application on your computer A Web site Go to a Web site by using the Internet browser on your computer 418 Corel CENTRAL 10 To link a field to a card file 1 Click a field Click Tools Link to Card file Click a card file tab Choose a group from the Groups lis
27. You can also add a formula to columns by enabling the Column option To fill cells with numbers automatically 1 Select two or more datasheet cells 2 Click Data gt Fill 3 In the Direction area enable one of the following options e Rows 312 Corel Presentations 10 e Columns 4 Inthe Type area enable one of the following options Linear e Growth e Date and choose a date time interval from the list box beside it 5 In the Values area type a value for the series in the Start box In the Step box type a value to indicate the rate of increase for the series izo When you enter two digit years dd mm yy in a datasheet 00 to 50 corresponds to 7 the years 2000 to 2050 and 51 to 99 corresponds to the years 1951 to 1999 For example the two digit year 26 corresponds to the year 2026 The two digit year 61 corresponds to the year 1961 Dates entered in a datasheet are stored as numbers For example if you typed 1 1 1900 the number 1 would represent that date in the datasheet Ds You can specify negative values if you want a descending series oS From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Formatting datasheet cells datasheet cells formatting Working with data ranges datasheets working with data ranges Working with datasheets 313 T Working with ORGANIZATION CHARTS Organization charts can be used to show an organization s structure or the relationships of
28. an online report to Corel that documents the nature of the problem and the events that led to it The Corel ARM wizard opens automatically at program failure and then offers three courses of action e save the document and close the application exit the application without saving the document e continue working Welcome to Corel Presentations 10 277 With the last option there is no guarantee that you can recover any work in your document after the last time you saved or that you can keep the program open After you have made your selection you can report the details of the problem to Corel with an attached program log Your report will be a vital part of Corel s product improvement efforts Animation with sound You can now attach a sound file to an animation used in a slide show to include sound with the animation Macromedia Flash support You can now publish a slide show as a Macromedia Flash swf file by using the Corel Internet Publisher MP3 WMA support Corel Presentations now supports MP3 sound files in slide shows Footer in slide layout layer You can create a slide footer in a slide show in which you can include such information as page numbers dates and times and customized text You can only access this feature in the layout layer of a slide show Animated GIF support Corel Presentations now supports animated GIF gif files Keyboard shortcuts The following keyboard shortcuts have been add
29. and click Edit quick alarm 2 Choose an alarm and click Delete To change a Quick alarm to an Advanced alarm 1 Right click the CorelCENTRAL Alarms icon on the DAD and click Edit quick alarm 2 Choose an alarm and click Edit 3 Click Advanced 424 Corel CENTRAL 10 HorSyncinq 2com PalmPilot and Corel CENTRAL To perform a HotSync between PalmPilot and Corel CENTRAL the 3Com PalmPilot Desktop software must be installed before CorelCENTRAL By default PalmPilot conduits are installed when you install Corel CENTRAL but the PalmPilot software must be detected to enable the conduits A conduit exists for every Corel CENTRAL application that you can HotSync with PalmPilot You can enable the necessary CorelCENTRAL PalmPilot conduits to HotSync PalmPilot and CorelCENTRAL applications If you disable the conduits PalmPilot will HotSync with the PalmPilot Desktop When you HotSync CorelCENTRAL and PalmPilot information stored in PalmPilot is added to corresponding fields in the correct CorelCENTRAL application and information stored in CorelCENTRAL is added to PalmPilot fields in the same way CorelCENTRAL does not support PalmPilot archiving capabilities When a record is deleted in the PalmPilot the record is deleted in CorelCENTRAL without an archive when you HotSync PalmPilot supports only alarms associated with events CorelCENTRAL will not HotSync notes larger than 4 KB The following table lists corresponding CorelCENTRA
30. applying 280 Corel Presentations 10 Working with Titles and subtitles In Corel Presentations when slides with layouts are inserted into a slide show they are automatically created with placeholders for titles and subtitles For more information about slide show layouts see Applying backgrounds and layouts to slides on page 270 In this section you ll learn about e formatting the appearance of titles and subtitles e changing the line spacing in titles and subtitles Formatting the appearance of titles and subtitles You can format the appearance of a title or subtitle by changing such attributes as the font the font size and the color You can also change the font outline of a title or subtitle To format the appearance of a title or subtitle 1 Click a title or subtitle 2 Click Format and click one of the following e Title properties Subtitle properties Click the Fonts tab Choose a font from the Font face list box Type a value in the Size box nu FW In the Appearance area enable any of the following check boxes Bold e Underline e Italic 7 Inthe Color area open the Foreground picker and click a color Open the Background picker and click a color NT The background color is visible only if a font fill style other than the default is selected For information about changing the font fill see To change the font fill of a title or subtitle in the online Help Working with ti
31. color 205 CrossTab reports 235 pattern 205 dates 209 find and replace 193 editing 193 finding 192 footers 210 page breaks 209 fractions 185 Fit As You Go 200 headers 210 fixed width text imported text 223 parsing 224 numbers 209 flipping text 203 predesigned 202 floating replacing content and vn 193 charts 231 text 202 203 folders times 209 default 179 formulas notebooks 178 clearing values only 192 font 204 displaying 173 font face 203 204 joined cells 203 font size 203 204 forward slashes fonts as division signs 187 appearance 203 fractions changing 204 entering 185 footer codes 210 formats ee be 208 footers frequency distribution tables 214 adjusting height 211 functions creating 210 preset 188 editing 211 QuickFunctions 188 formatting 210 linking cells 211 footnotes G adding to charts 232 GoTo forecasting 233 using 164 format list 202 grand total lines 206 Format menu 152 grand totals 188 formats graphics applying predefined 201 locking 192 applying predesigned 202 protecting 191 192 autoformat 201 group mode clearing 192 enabling 196 copying 201 pasting in 196 Index Quattro Pro 10 241 group name grouped spreadsheets deleting grouping spreadsheets H hard page breaks removing setting header codes headers adjusting height creating editing formatting inserting linking cells headings locked titles height
32. double click Workspaces Application and click General 3 Type a value in the Undo Redo level 0 to 200 box MMe In all situations except where program speed and available memory are absolutely lt crucial the level for undoing and redoing actions should be set to a minimum of one Editing Grouped data When a notebook contains similar text or formats in several spreadsheets you can create spreadsheet groups to edit multiple contiguous spreadsheets at once A change to one spreadsheet in a group affects all spreadsheets in the group For example you can simultaneously change the properties of the same cell in spreadsheets A B C if you group these spreadsheets together A spreadsheet can belong to only one group The group mode for spreadsheets can be enabled or disabled When you enable group mode a blue line displays below the spreadsheet tabs to identify the spreadsheet group By disabling the group mode you can perform tasks that use 2 D references Quattro Pro lets you copy data to spreadsheets in a group You can delete a spreadsheet group Editing and formatting a spreadsheet 195 To create a spreadsheet Group 1 Click Insert Name gt Name group of sheets 2 Enter a group name in the Group name box 3 Type the name of the first spreadsheet in the First sheet box 4 Type the name of the last spreadsheet in the Last sheet box lt You can also create a spreadsheet group by selecting any cell in the first sheet
33. includes complete descriptions of all new and enhanced spreadsheet features Welcome To Quattro Pro 10 149 Multiple Undo Redo Quattro Pro now allows you to reverse multiple past actions and if desired reinstate the actions As many as 200 past actions can be reversed with the multiple undo command QuickFit New QuickFit menu options Column QuickFit Row QuickFit Column Row QuickFit allow you to optimize the structure of your spreadsheet AutoScroll AutoScroll is now featured as a standalone tool in Quattro Pro independent of the IntelliMouse Users can quickly navigate in any direction and at varying speeds through open notebooks Menu Command Icons Quattro Pro menus now feature icons beside many of the menu items allowing for quicker command recognition Close All Save All New items in the File menu allow you to quickly close or save all open Quattro Pro notebooks with a single command Enhanced Settings and Customization Features A new dialog box includes all Quattro Pro settings and customization features allowing you to completely control the look and feel of the application from one location What s different in Quattro Pro 10 Some Quattro Pro commands have been moved to new menus in this version As well some terms have been replaced with more understandable terms Keep in mind that menus change depending on the active window For example when you insert a chart the menus change to reflect the
34. passwords e Insert 8 delete records can be added edited and deleted The table cannot be deleted or restructured e Data entry records can be added or edited but not deleted The table cannot be deleted or restructured e Update only non key fields can be edited e Read Only the user can only view data 7 Click the access cell to the right of the selected field name and choose one of the following levels of field access from the list box e Full there are no restrictions e Read Only the user can only view data e None the user has no rights to this field and Paradox does not display the values in this field In the case of linked tables you must add the password to the child table before the parent table Passwords are case sensitive Establishing referential integrity Referential integrity is very important when creating multiple relationships between tables Referential integrity ensures that the values in a table are valid It requires a field or group of fields in one table the child table to refer to the key of another table the parent table to determine valid values To establish referential inteqrity Open a child table Click Format gt Restructure table Click the Referential integrity tab Click Add Type a name in the Link names list Choose the parent table from the Parent table list box N DU FBWN Choose the parent key from the Parent s key list If the parent table has a composite key a
35. pressing END then the DOWN ARROW and RIGHT all ARROW keys moves the cursor to the last cell of the block Keep pressing this combination to move to the last cell in the spreadsheet Adding deleting moving ANd copying spreadsheets You can insert or delete single or multiple spreadsheets to or from your notebook You can move sheets within a notebook or between notebooks to reorder them using the mouse to drag the spreadsheet tab to another location In the same way you can also copy spreadsheets within a notebook To insert a spreadsheet 1 Click the tab of the spreadsheet you want to follow the new spreadsheet 2 Click Insert Insert sheet To insert multiple spreadsheets 1 Click Insert Insert cells 2 Enable the Sheets option in the Dimension area 3 Enable the Entire option in the Span area 4 Type a 3 D selection in the Cells field For example to insert three sheets before spreadsheet B enter B A3 D A3 it does not matter which cell you reference To delete a spreadsheet 1 Click a spreadsheet tab 2 Click Edit gt Delete cells 3 Enable the Sheets option 4 Enable the Entire option Ds You can also delete a spreadsheet by right clicking a spreadsheet tab and clicking S Delete sheet To delete multiple spreadsheets 1 Click the first spreadsheet tab 2 Hold down SHIFT while you click the last spreadsheet tab to delete A black line appears under the tabs 3 Click Edit Delete cells 4 Enable the Shee
36. rather than type the entire cell address Quattro Pro lets you use the Range picker he to easily select cells SpeedSelect lets you quickly select an entire block of cells As well you can use the SpeedSelect buttons to quickly move to each corner of the block You can select entire rows columns and spreadsheets You can also select multiple spreadsheets You can lock specific rows and columns of a spreadsheet so that their titles remain on the screen as you scroll A blue line divides the locked area and the notebook data Locked titles do not affect printing To set the selector ro move when you press ENTER 1 Click Tools gt Settings Click General Disable the Compatibility keys check box Enable the Move cell selector enter key check box From the list box choose Down Up Left or Right depending on the direction you want the selector to move when you press ENTER uk WN To select noncontiguous cells 1 Select the first group of cells 2 Hold down CTRL and select additional cells xe If you want to type references to noncontiguous selections in a formula separate each selection with a comma as shown in this example A2 A5 B7 D5 E12 To select a 3 D block of cells 1 Select the cells on the first spreadsheet 2 Hold down SHIFT and click the tab for the last spreadsheet in the series A black line appears under the tabs the same cells are now selected on all the sheets where the black line appears SAS The cell
37. 26 Table of contents Inrroducrion 3 ma E Welcome To WordPerfect Office 2002 Welcome to WordPerfect Office 2002 from Corel Corporation WordPerfect Office 2002 is an award winning integrated set of business productivity applications for at work and at home With WordPerfect Office 2002 you can create annual reports calculate your home budget produce mailing lists from databases design brochures and menus deliver business presentations and more What s the purpose of this user quide WordPerfect Office 2002 User Guide explains the features of WordPerfect Office 2002 applications and provides step by step instructions for performing the most common tasks that users perform with our applications Because a single book cannot be an exhaustive reference for every application in WordPerfect Office 2002 this user guide is designed to be a companion to the WordPerfect Office 2002 online Help system WordPerfect Office 2002 User Guide is designed to get new and experienced business application users up and running with WordPerfect Office 2002 quickly If you re new to business applications you can use this user guide as a foundation to your learning If you re familiar with business applications but new to WordPerfect Office 2002 applications you can use this guide to learn about the tools available to you and how to use them If you are an experienced WordPerfect Office 2002 application user you can use this user guide as a memo
38. 3 Drag to select an area of the bitmapped image 296 Corel Presentations 10 To size the frame around a bitmapped image To Do the following Size the frame around a bitmapped image Double click the bitmapped image and drag the side or corner handles to resize the frame Size the frame around a rotated or skewed Click Tools Convert to bitmap Click OK bitmapped image Double click the bitmapped image and drag the side or corner handles to resize the frame NT Increasing the size of the frame around a bitmapped image does not alter the bitmapped image itself however moving any part of the bitmapped image outside of the resized frame will delete that part when you close the Bitmap Editor window and return to the drawing window To zoom a birmapped image 1 Double click a bitmapped image 2 Click View Zoom NT A check mark beside the Zoom menu command indicates that the bitmapped image is zoomed Creating original artwork You can create original artwork for slides and drawings You can also enhance bitmapped images that you have inserted into a slide show or drawing from an external source You can air brush a bitmapped image which sprays a selected fill color in a bitmap area You can also paint a specific or of a bitmapped image or fill the complete area of a bitmapped image As well you can copy and apply a unique color in a bitmapped image and you can selectively replace a color in a bitmapped image You can al
39. 5 Enable any of the check boxes in the Paste area to specify what to copy If you want the copied cells to be updated when the source cells are link the copied cells to the source cells by clicking Link in the Paste special dialog box To transpose columns TO ROWS 1 Select the column of cells to transpose 2 Click Tools Numeric tools Transpose 3 Inthe To field specify the top left cell where you want to copy the transposed data SAA If you transpose cells containing formulas cell references do not adjust properly If you specify a cell within the source cells the data will not display properly Ds You can transpose rows to columns by selecting cells in a row instead of a column Sy Resizinq rows and columns Quattro Pro lets you change the row height in a spreadsheet You can also change the width of a column Quattro Pro uses a default column width for all columns in a spreadsheet This default width of an active spreadsheet is wide enough to display nine characters in the default font You can change the default width of an active spreadsheet Values that are wider than the cell display either in scientific notation or as a row of asterisks depending on the numeric format and width of the cell You can automatically increase the column width as you type so that number values are always visible 198 Quattro Pro 10 Columns whose widths you explicitly adjust are not controlled by the default width of the active sp
40. 5 Type a name for the first field 6 Press TAB and choose a field type Based on the field type you selected a field size may be automatically assigned by Paradox To delete a Field 1 Click Tools gt Utilities Restructure Choose the drive and folder where the table is stored Click the number of the field you want to delete 2 3 Double click a table 4 5 Press CTRL DELETE Resizinq table rows and columns You can change the row height or the column width in your tables If your table has many fields you can narrow the columns so that they all display in the table window If your fields have long names or contain long strings of data you can widen the columns so that they display fully The following image illustrates the different sections of a table 1 horizontal grid line Working with tables and records 361 field heading 3 vertical grid line To change the row size of a table 1 Click File Open gt Table Choose the drive and folder where the table is stored 2 3 Double click a table 4 Point to a horizontal grid line 5 When the pointer changes to a double headed arrow drag the cursor to resize the row To change the column size of a table 1 Click File Open Table Choose the drive and folder where the table is stored 2 3 Double click a table 4 Point to a vertical grid line 5 When the pointer changes to a double headed arrow drag the cursor to resize the column Q
41. 92 table columns shapes adjusting widths 107 creating 90 deleting 105 drawing 90 inserting 104 editing 93 setting number 104 modifying 93 table components 142 Index WordPerfect 10 copying 103 formatting 59 cutting 103 highlighting 62 deleting 105 hyphenating 70 pasting 103 importing 49 using QuickSelect 103 indenting 64 65 table formulas justifying 65 66 calculating 110 keeping lines together 67 table rows keeping on same page 67 creating headers 107 108 keeping paragraphs together 67 deleting 105 keeping together 66 67 inserting 104 merging sideways 123 setting number 104 text boxes tables creating 123 adding values 111 rotating text 123 adjusting column widths 107 text formats applying borders 109 copying 61 applying color 108 time applying fills 108 deleting 42 applying lines 108 editing 41 calculating formulas lt 110 inserting 41 creating 101 102 inserting in footers 56 creating charts ee AZ inserting in headers 56 creating header rows 107 108 typesetting creating in graphics boxes 102 adjusting leading 69 default settings 109 spacing between lines 69 deleting 105 spacing between paragraphs 69 entering formulas 109 110 entering functions 109 floating cells 102 U inserting columns 104 ungrouping inserting rows 104 graphics 95 joining 105 joining cells 104 moving components 102 V QuickCreate button 102 QuickSum E 111 valies adding in a table 11
42. Applying borders and fills 115 To add a border TO A paragraph 1 Click in a paragraph 2 Click Format gt Paragraph gt Border fill 3 Choose a border pattern from the Available border styles list To apply the border only to the selected paragraph enable the Apply border to current paragraph only check box No If you disable the Apply border to current paragraph only check box the border lt surrounds the current paragraph and all subsequent paragraphs in the document To add a border TO a column 1 Clickin a column 2 Click Format Columns 3 Click Border fill 4 Choose a border pattern from the Available border styles list To apply the border only to the selected column enable the Apply border to current column group only check box NT If you disable the Apply border to current column group only check box the border surrounds the current column and all subsequent columns in the document To add a border TO A PAGE 1 Click a page 2 Click Format gt Page gt Border fill 3 From the Border type list box choose one of the following Line lets you choose a border from the preset line borders Fancy lets you choose a border from the default Fancy borders folder 4 Choose a border pattern from the Available border styles list To apply the border only to the current page click the Apply border to current page only check box Li If you disable the Apply border to current page only check box the border will
43. Applying special effects to text special effects applying to text Correcting text text correcting Working with text 277 Working with bulleted lists You can create bulleted lists in Corel Presentations to effectively communicate sequential ideas within drawings and slide shows In this section you ll learn about e creating bulleted lists e modifying bulleted list text attributes formatting bulleted lists e changing line spacing in bulleted lists e animating bulleted lists Creating bulleted lists Keep the following points in mind when you create any type of bulleted list e Express a single idea on each line e Avoid using more than six items in a list Use nouns and action verbs to start sentences You can create bulleted lists in slide shows and drawings and levels can be created within these bulleted lists As well you can move a bulleted list item up a level To create A bulleted list 1 Click Insert gt Bulleted list 2 Click in the slide show or drawing window 3 Type text on the bulleted line 4 Press ENTER If you want to create a new level within the list press TAB 5 Click outside the bulleted list to return to the slide show or drawing window To create a New level for an existing bulleted list item 1 Double click a bulleted list 2 Click at the beginning of a list item 3 Press TAB Working with bulleted lists 277 To move an existing bulleted list item up one level 1 Double click a bu
44. Choose a list series from the Series name list box 4 Choose an element from the Series elements list 5 Enable the Tabs option in the Fill as area QS You can also open the QuickFill dialog box by clicking the QuickFill HE E button on the notebook toolbar Creating simple Equations You can perform simple mathematical operations such as 1 1 directly in a cell Quattro Pro interprets these equations as formulas and indicates cells with formulas by adding a blue triangle to the bottom left corner of the cell Quattro Pro also totals values for you To do simple math in cells 1 Type the numbers and math operators in a cell For example type 4500 450 2 Press ENTER a Do not include commas in numbers To roral values in a column 1 Click in the first blank cell below and one column to the left of the cells to be totaled 2 Type total 3 Press ENTER Xi This feature is not case sensitive and is language dependent OSs You can also total values in a row by clicking the first blank cell to the right and one row above the cells to be totaled and typing total Press ENTER To have Quattro Pro identify the forward slash as a division siqn 1 Click Tools gt Settings 2 Inthe list of categories double click Workspaces Application and click General 3 Enable the Mathematical formula entry check box Creating A spreadsheet 187 Performing RUNNING calculations Quattro Pro lets you perform calculations quickly by using
45. Choose a time from the Start list box Choose a duration from the Duration list box Click Repeat In the Repeat event dialog box click the Weeks tab Type a value in the Event repeats every box If you want to schedule the event for specific days enable any of the check boxes in the On day s area schedule an event for a specific day and week in a calendar Click Calendar New event Click the Events tab Type a subject in the Subject box Ifyou want to specify a location type text in the Room box Using Corel CENTRAL calendar 417 Click Repeat Vo XQ U A Choose a month from the Month list box Choose a week from the Week list box In the Repeat event dialog box click the Weeks of year tab Click the Mini calendar button in the From box and click a date Click the Mini calendar button in the To box and click a date If you want to schedule the event for specific days enable any of the check boxes in the On day s area To assign A Task TO AN EVENT 1 Right click an event and click Edit event Click the Tasks tab Click the Mini calendar button in the Date box and click a date 2 3 Type a name for the task in the Subject box 4 5 Click the Mini calendar button in the Due date box and click a due date If you want to include comments about the task type text in the Notes box From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Creating linked tasks and even
46. Creating a data model on page 364 The following image illustrates tables that are joined under a common field cards Carers Sane Area Cf Sus Pres Jp Paw CN p a rr i E aL Esskemd Dvds As Sucka Selling Pre Crp Taal on oo 3 r m r aL oid Tiai AR TOR C Fie Fa C E m C To create a multi table uery Click File New gt Query Choose the drive and folder where the table is stored Hold down CTRL and select the tables you want to query Click Open Click Query Join table Click the common field in each of the tables Enable the check boxes for each of the fields you want to include in the Answer table ON AU FWN Click Query gt Run query A For more information on including query fields see Using Query By Example on page 377 Working with oueries 379 To create a multi table query based on a data model 1 Click File New gt Query In the Files of type list box choose Data models 2 3 Double click a data model 4 Enable the check boxes for each of the fields you want to include in the Answer table 5 Click Query gt Run query A a For more information on including query fields see Using Query By Example on page 377 Creating advanced QBE oueries You can use special operators in your queries to perform calculations on fields For a complete description of Paradox query operators see Query operators on page 380 For a complete description of advanc
47. CrossTab Data tools Combine files Workgroup Review notebook Select color moved to Help menu Help menu changes All the menu options listed below are found in the Help menu Quattro Pro 9 Quattro Pro 10 Ask the PerfectExpert new Corel Web site moved from Tools menu moved from Tools menu removed Corel Connector Corel on the Web gt Corel Web site Corel on the Web gt Web queries online Corel on the Web gt Macros online From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Corel Corporation Using Quattro Pro documentation Corel Help Welcome To Quattro Pro 10 193 GETTING STARTEC Before beginning your project you should familiarize yourself with the concepts and desktop components that will help you create spreadsheet based documents Quattro Pro features many tools which provide you with quick access seamless mobility and powerful efficiency You can also customize your workspace and tailor your toolbars to present a familiar working environment each time you launch your application In this section you ll learn about components of a notebook e working with Quattro Pro Experts e working with toolbars e working with the application bar e navigating in spreadsheets and notebooks e selecting cells rows and columns e adding and deleting cells rows and columns e adding deleting moving and copying spreadsheets e n
48. File Close NW If you are using Page view you can also edit the text of the footnote or endnote by SO clicking in the text For more information about Page view see Switching views in the online Help You can also close a footnote or endnote and return to the document by clicking the ma Jo g Close button 3 If you delete a footnote or endnote number you can restore it by clicking the Note number button E on the property bar Converting Footnotes TO EN NOTES OR ENCNOTES TO FOOTNOTES Included with WordPerfect are macros that let you convert footnotes to endnotes and endnotes to footnotes The macros are typically installed to the default macros folder To convert Footnotes TO EN NOTES OR endnotes TO FOOTNOTES 1 Click Tools Macro gt Play 2 Choose the drive and folder where one of the following files is stored e footend wcm plays the footnote conversion macro e endfoot wcm plays the endnote conversion macro 3 Click Play Ds You can also change footnotes to endnotes or endnotes to footnotes by clicking the Convert end to foot button al or the Convert foot to end button z on the Shipping macros toolbar For information about customizing toolbars see Customizing toolbars in the online Help Formatting Footnotes and ENdNOTES You can change the format of footnotes and endnotes the location of footnotes on a page and the amount of space between footnotes or endnotes and text As well y
49. International Standard Book Number ISBN as the unique key The author table may also contain a unique key such as author number but must contain a linking field to tie the information back to the book table By including only one additional field the author ID in the book table you can easily establish a link The following image illustrates how you would separate your information into different tables Hiro E arar y Lan Trim GBH 0 1 7 10 55 4 Dinpeaty peiska VA Duren verim P Curl Pren Crisi or rer dasari ymiai TET ARC iomh baie Faai iiia Radio Fp Pei or Ret or i ages fe 1 book data splits into fields 2 fields are grouped into sets ME km i A p Faj A pida A ae La i ca pay jan Leal 4 ie pel ded i E L mia a A dalia tae pairt Tat om 1 4 ramin 5 B _ A A juin FL i cas el barda ja tea i om el cone ny Ta 1 m i yii gt dl i m p BF Lot ca ober op Ti a y 4 i pe A cl ber dores we gi ae 4 Tr we A vedere nt ee A ed iat ym rendor aden igei T a A pai Am 3 sets become tables linked under key fields shaded Establish relationships Once you have an idea of how your data will be grouped you need to establish how your tables will work together to share information ensuring referential integrity as you build your database One of your tables takes on the role as the parent table The other tables are child detail tables See Establishing referential integrity
50. OAA surround the current page and all subsequent pages in the document After you put a fancy border on a page you can type text on the page as you usually would However the border doesn t change page margins If you don t want to type over the border you may need to move the page margins within the border DS To browse for fancy borders located in other folders click Change folders and e in the Filename box type the filename of the folder to open Editing borders You can edit the border style for a graphics box paragraph column or page You can also change the roundness of a graphics box border or a page text border 116 WordPerfect 10 To edir the border of a qraphics box 1 Right click a graphic and click Border fill 2 Choose a border pattern from the Available border styles list 3 Open the Color picker and click a color 4 Open the Line style picker and click a line style To edit the border of a paragraph Click in a paragraph Click Format gt Paragraph gt Border fill Choose a border pattern from the Available border styles list Open the Color picker and click a color uk U N e Open the Line style picker and click a line style To edit the border of a column Click in a column Click Format gt Columns Click Border fill In the Column Border fill dialog box choose a border pattern from the Available border styles list PWN Open the Color picker and click a color 6 Open the Lin
51. Release Notes may contain installation tips that were not available at press time 3 Click the Next button 4 Read the WordPerfect Office 2002 license agreement and click the Accept button If you don t accept the licesnse agreement the Setup application terminates Type your full name and company name if it exists and click the Next button 6 Type your WordPerfect Office 2002 serial number and click the Next button The serial number is on the WordPerfect Office 2002 registration card 7 Enable one of the following options e Typical Setup installs the most commonly used applications utilities and files and is the recommended installation type for most users Use this option if you re not sure which WordPerfect Office 2002 components you want to install You can add and remove components afterwards e Compact Setup conserves hard drive space by installing the minimum number of applications utilities and files needed to operate WordPerfect Office 2002 Enable this option if you have little free disk space and require only the minimum components This installation is often used for laptop computers e Custom Setup lets you choose which WordPerfect Office 2002 components to install This option gives you the most control over the installation process Choose this option if you need to install specialized components that are not included in the Typical or Compact installation setups 8 Enable the CD ROM Based check box if you w
52. Right click where you want to insert the column or row and click Insert 2 Enable one of the following options e Columns lets you specify the number of columns you want to insert e Rows lets you specify the number of rows you want to insert 3 Enable one of the following options e Before inserts new columns or rows before the row in which the cursor is positioned After inserts new columns or rows after the row in which the cursor is positioned DI If you insert a column enable the Keep column widths the same check box to ey prevent the existing columns from changing width when the new column is added You can also insert a row by clicking the Insert row button EE on the property bar Joining and splitting table cells You can join or split tables and table cells Except for individually formatted cells the second table acquires the formatting of the first table When you join selected cells the formatting of the top left cell is used for all the joined cells You can also split any table horizontally into two tables When you split table cells each selected cell divides in two The new cells have the same format as the original cell To join table cells 1 Select the cells you want to join 2 Click Table gt Join gt Cell 104 WordPerfect 10 OS You can also join table cells by clicking Table gt Join QuickJoin and selecting the S NW cells you want to join To join two tables 1 Click View gt Reveal Code
53. Service support through the following avenues World Wide Web You can access general customer service and product information at http www corel com support on the Internet 26 Introduction Mail fax email You can send specific customer service questions to Corel Customer Service representatives by mail fax and email Corel Corporation Corel Customer Service 1600 Carling Avenue Ottawa Ontario Canada K1Z 8R7 Fax 1 613 761 9176 Email custserv corel ca Telephone You can telephone Corel Customer Service centers with your questions In North America you can reach Corel Customer Service by calling the 1 800 772 6735 toll free line The hours of operation are 9 00 A M to 7 30 PM eastern time ET Monday through Friday and 9 00 A M to 5 00 P M on Saturdays Corel customers residing outside North America can contact Corel Customer Service representatives in Dublin Ireland by calling the 353 1 213 3912 toll line or they can call a local authorized Corel Customer Service Partner Corel support and services 27 Welcome to WordPerfect Office 2002 29 Section INrrROducTiON Welcome to WordPerfect Office 2002 29 WordPerfect 10 Table of contents WordPerfect 10 Welcome to WordPerfect 10 77 What s new in WordPerfect 10 35 What s different in WordPerfect 10 36 Working with documents 79 Understanding the components of a document 39 Creating documents 40 Opening document
54. This version of Quattro Pro supports OLE 2 0 as a container client and server Quattro Pro also acts as a client and server for OLE 1 0 and DDE Several Quattro Pro macros can help application developers initiate and conduct DDE exchanges or conversations Application developers can use Quattro Pro macro commands and other features to create and control OLE objects in other applications that support OLE automation as a client In Quattro Pro you can link to an object in another application For example you can create a link to a graphic in CorelDRAW a bitmapped image in PHOTO PAINT a memo in WordPerfect or a slide in Corel Presentations When you link a file the information resides in the source file and a linked copy of the source file exists in the notebook When information changes in the source application it is automatically updated in the notebook You may want to link to a file for a large object such as a bitmapped image especially when it is used several places in a notebook to keep the notebook file size at a minimum Linking large objects makes the file size smaller because the object is stored in the source file not in the file You can embed objects When you embed an object a copy of the object is inserted into the notebook The copy remains separate from the original object Objects in Quattro Pro can also be copied into other applications To link an object Select the cell where you want to link an object Clic
55. To overwrite data 1 Click a cell 2 Press INSERT The Typeover button on the application bar appears pressed when the typeover mode is on PS You can return to inserting into existing data by pressing INSERT S To replace The entire CONTENT of A cell 1 Click a cell 2 Type a new entry 3 Press ENTER 192 Quarrro Pro 10 To edit the content and formatting of a cell 1 Click a cell 2 Click Edit gt Clear and click one of the following e Cells lets you erase the content and the formatting of a cell e Values lets you erase the content but not the formatting of a cell Format lets you erase the formatting but not the content of a cell y Mon Se Clicking Edit Clear Format does not affect column width or row height Unnecessary cell formatting can add significantly to the size of a notebook file clearing cell formatting reduces the size of the file DS You can also erase the content of a cell but not the formatting by selecting the cell SN and clicking DELETE To modify part of a cell s content 1 Double click a cell 2 Click where you want to edit 3 Edit the cell content 4 Press ENTER You can also Delete part of the cell content before the cursor Click after the content to delete and press BACKSPACE Delete part of the cell content after the cursor Click before the content to delete and press DELETE Return the cell content to its original state Press ESC before you press ENTER
56. V line From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Changing colors in the notebook palette color palette notebook Creating custom formats formatting custom Creating a bar format numbers formatting as bars Working with styles predefined styles 212 Quarrro Pro 10 Analyzing data After you have entered edited and formatted data you can perform many powerful functions to summarize data answer specific questions and solve problems In this section you ll learn about using statistical analysis tools e creating frequency distribution tables e performing regression analysis performing matrix operations e creating scenarios Using statistical analysis tools Quattro Pro lets you perform a number of advanced statistical numerical and financial analysis tasks You can access any of the following statistical analysis tools to guide you through the steps you must perform Advanced regression Amortization schedule ANOVA one way ANOVA two way with Replication ANOVA two way without Replication Correlation Covariance Descriptive statistics Exponential smoothing Fourier F Test Histogram Mortgage refinancing Moving average Random number Analyzing data 213 Rank and percentile Sampling t Test Z Test To use an analysis tool 1 Click Tools gt Numeric tools gt Analysis tools 2 Follow the steps in the Analysis Expert A Before you use an analysis tool
57. XML tags Welcome To Quattro Pro 10 171 Quattro Pro 9 External data Database Desktop External data Import database file File Quattro Pro 10 removed External data Import database Insert file Format MENU CHANGES All the menu options listed below are found in the File menu Quattro Pro 9 Quattro Pro 10 Selection Sheet Notebook QuickFit QuickFit QuickFit Styles Selection properties Sheet properties Notebook properties QuickFit Column QuickFit QuickFit Row QuickFit QuickFit Column row QuickFit Define styles Tools menu changes All the menu options listed below are found in the Tools menu Quattro Pro 9 Quattro Pro 10 Macro Fit Macros online Outline Group Outline gt Ungroup Outline Expand group Outline gt Collapse group Outline gt Show outline Outline Options Numeric tools Analysis Numeric tools gt What If Numeric tools Multiply Macro gt Edit macro Moved to Help menu Outline Group outline Outline gt Ungroup outline Outline Expand outline Outline Collapse outline Outline gt Show hide outline Outline gt Outline options Numeric tools Analysis tools Numeric tools What If tables Numeric tools Multiply matrices 172 Quarrro Pro 10 Quattro Pro 9 Data tools gt Cross tabs new Workgroup Review notebook Color Internet Web queries online Quattro Pro 10 Data tools
58. a local copy of the file you do not have to be continuously connected to the Internet to work with the file To open a Quicken Interchange Format oif File 1 Click File Open 2 Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored 3 Choose Quicken Interchange Format qif from the File type list box 4 Double click the filename Li When you open a qif file in Quattro Pro each spreadsheet row contains a single ee transaction record with the date check number payee cleared status and amount columns In addition the assigned categories are broken down into columns You can sum the category amounts for each column create custom reports and charts or use the transaction data within Quattro Pro as actual data When opening split transactions multiple categories assigned to a single transaction Quattro Pro places the correct amount in each category column If a split transaction is composed of only a single category but has multiple descriptions the category column contains a formula that includes all of the individual amounts Ds When you save the opened qif file you must save it as a Quattro Pro file You can Y save it in a different file format but some formatting may be lost To save a database file 1 Click File Save as 2 Choose one of the following from the File type list box e dBase e Paradox 3 Type the filename in the Filename box 4 Click Save 5 Choose a field from the Fields list and make any chang
59. a search engine or portal e browse the various Corel Web sites including http www corel com and http www officecommunity com or any other Internet or Intranet site e post questions and find answers from newsgroups including the Corel newsgroups monitored by Corel staff and C_Tech volunteers e access technical support online including through the Corel Knowledge Base at http kb corel com Pocket Oxford Dictionary The Oxford English Dictionary has been the authoritative dictionary of the English language for more than a century The Pocket Oxford Dictionary provides the meaning history and pronunciation of more than 30 000 words It has been integrated into the existing writing tools in WordPerfect Office 2002 giving you the ability to look up word definitions and phonetic spellings You can also upgrade to a larger version of the dictionary and purchase other services offered by Oxford University Press Other WordPerfect Office 2002 applications and utilities In addition to the major applications already discussed in this chapter WordPerfect Office 2002 includes several other applications and utilities This section describes some of these applications and utilities Not all editions of WordPerfect Office 2002 include the following items Adobe Acrobat Reader Adobe Acrobat Reader is included with WordPerfect Office 2002 This application lets you view navigate and print PDF Portable Document Format files across multip
60. a specific cell To accommodate long entries Quattro Pro lets you increase the column width to one character wider than the longest entry in a selection You can also increase the row height to fit the tallest entry in a selection You can adjust the row height and column width at the same time To increase The column width ro fir the longest entry 1 Select a column 2 Click the Column QuickFit E button on the toolbar PS You can also double click the column letter to increase column width You can also increase the column width to fit the longest entry in a selection of cells by selecting a partial column 200 Quarrro Pro 10 To increase The row height ro fir the tallest entry 1 Select a row 2 Click the Row QuickFit button on the toolbar PS You can also double click the row letter to increase row height gt You can also increase the row height to fit the tallest entry in a selection of cells by selecting a partial row To adjust the column width and row height simultaneously 1 Select a cell 2 Click the Column row QuickFit button on the toolbar Hidinq rows and columns Quattro Pro lets you hide rows or columns from view on the screen Hidden rows and columns do not print Although they are hidden from view they are still used in calculations Columns move left to fill in the space left by the hidden column and rows move up however row numbers and column letters do not change For example if you hide column B th
61. and displaying charts and for building custom dialog boxes Project templates Project templates let you create a new notebook based on a pre designed project Many of the Quattro Pro project templates provide a basic format and structure for common spreadsheets and data entry forms You can also create your own project templates Values A value is a number date formula or the result of a formula Quattro Pro automatically determines whether data is a value or a label As you type your data in a cell the READY indicator on the application bar changes to LABEL or VALUE depending on the type of data you enter Labels Labels contain alphanumeric data such as titles phone numbers or addresses Quattro Pro interprets and formats labels differently than it does values Values are calculable labels are not Formulas Formulas are mathematical equations Formulas usually refer to numbers in other cells in order to calculate a value such as the difference between the values in two cells or the total of values in a column You can use mathematical functions and numbers in formulas Spreadsheet functions Spreadsheet functions are built in formulas that automate many of the calculations you perform in a spreadsheet For example AMAINT is a spreadsheet function that calculates the accumulated interest paid on a loan after a specified number of payments All spreadsheet functions are preceded by an sign 176 Quarrro Pro 10 Macr
62. area enable one of the following options Include speaker notes from the slide show Make a place for me to type notes e Print lines for audience notes 5 Click Finish A If you do not have WordPerfect installed on your computer you cannot send a slide show to it From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Specifying graphic formats for HTML documents graphic formats specifying for HTML documents Specifying text formatting options in PDF PDF specifying text formatting options Compressing bitmapped images in PDF PDF compressing bitmapped images Formatting document information in PDF PDF formatting document information Applying color model formatting in PDF PDF applying color model formatting Including embedded files in PDF files PDF files including embedded files Internet and electronic publishing 327 Index Corel Presentations 10 applying chs files 316 backgrounds to slides 270 mid files 301 bold to text 274 mov files 303 colors to objects 284 mpeg files 303 custom colors to objects 285 wav files 301 effects to objects 285 wpg files 295 italics to text 274 layouts to slides 270 masters to slides 269 A outlines to objects 284 accessibility 257 sound to bulleted animations 280 action shapes sounds to object animations 286 drawing 292 special effects to bitmapped images 299 adding time delays to slides 289 coworker positions to organization charts 317 transition
63. before selecting the columns To change the active spreadsheet default column width Click Format gt Sheet properties Click the Default width tab Type a value in the Column width box PWN In the Unit area enable one of the following options e Characters e Inches e Centimeters Editing and formatting a spreadsheet 199 gt lt You can also change the default column width by right clicking a spreadsheet tab and S V clicking Sheet properties To increase The column width while typing values Click Tools Settings 2 Inthe list of categories double click Workspaces Application and click General 3 Enable the Fit As You Go check box To restore the active cell default column width Select a cell in each column whose width you want to restore to default Click Format gt Selection properties Click the Row column tab PWN Enable the Reset width option QS Click the Property 41 E button to access the Row column tab You can select noncontiguous columns by pressing CTRL before selecting the columns To restore the active cell default row height Select a cell in each row whose height you want to restore to default Click Format gt Selection properties Click the Row column tab PWN Enable the Reset height option PS Click the Property i E button to access the Row column tab You can select noncontiguous rows by pressing CTRL before selecting the rows Resizing rows and columns To fir
64. before the search condition e g gt 300 Undoing Actions Quattro Pro lets you undo most actions in reverse order of performance For example if you create a cell entry and then you want to remove it undoing the entry restores any previous content in the cell You can undo one action at a time You can also undo multiple actions simultaneously You can reinstate a change by redoing an action You can also reinstate multiple actions simultaneously Quattro Pro lets you set the levels for undoing and redoing actions To undo ONE ACTION e Click Edit Undo Ne Some actions cannot be reversed The Undo menu command appears grayed immediately after you perform one of these actions To undo multiple actions 1 Click Edit and click the Undo flyout 2 Click an action from the list 194 Quattro Pro 10 No When you click an action from the list all actions performed after that action will be undone DS You can also undo multiple actions by clicking the Undo flyout on the notebook toolbar To redo AN ACTION e Click Edit gt Redo To redo multiple actions 1 Click Edit and click the Redo flyout 2 Click an action from the list NT When you click an action from the list all actions performed after that action will be l redone S You can also redo multiple actions by clicking the Redo flyout on the notebook toolbar To ser the undo and redo level 1 Click Tools Settings 2 Inthe list of categories
65. box 7 Click Insert and close DS You can also open the Symbols dialog box by pressing CTRL W Sy 78 WordPerfect 10 To apply a bullet formar TO Existing TEXT 1 Select the text to which you want to apply the bullet format 2 Click Insert gt Outline bullets amp numbering 3 Click the Bullets tab 4 Choose a bullet style from the Description list box You can also add a bullet to existing text by clicking at the beginning of a line and ANS e Y clicking the Bullets button E on the toolbar To type body text between list items press ENTER twice and press UP ARROW to type on the line that begins without a bullet Numbering lists and outlines You can create a numbered list or a numbered outline in a document or you can use QuickNumbers to create lists and outlines as you type The following image shows examples of preset number formats You can number existing text You can also force a number by renumbering an existing numbered list or numbered outline To create a numbered list or numbered outline 1 Click in a document 2 Click Insert gt Outline bullets amp numbering 3 Click the Numbers tab 4 Choose a number style from the Description list box 5 Click OK 6 Type the text and press ENTER Perform this step for each entry in the list 7 Press BACKSPACE to discontinue the list Using lists and outlines 79 To create a Numbered list by using QuickNumbers 1 Type a number followed
66. bulleted list items 277 selecting all 311 new levels within bulleted lists o 277 working with 311 organization charts 315 316 datasheet columns original artwork 297 deleting 312 portable slide shows 265 inserting 311 slide show backgrounds 271 datasheet rows slide show layouts 270 deleting 312 slide show outlines 263 inserting 311 slide shows and drawings 261 datasheets text objects 273 adding formulas to columns 312 current pages adding formulas to rows 312 printing 322 deleting columns 312 current slides deleting rows 312 printing 322 displaying 309 curves editing data 310 drawing 292 entering data 310 custom colors exporting spreadsheet data 310 applying to objects 285 filling cells with numbers automatically 312 customizing hiding 309 Index Corel Presentations 10 331 highlighting ranges of cells importing spreadsheet data inserting columns inserting rows manipulating moving moving to cells selecting all cells sizing using formulas using number fills viewing working with cells working with rows and columns deleting rows and columns from datasheets slide show layouts slides text displaying alignment guides datasheets gridlines rulers 3 subordinate positions documents publishing to HTML publishing to the Web drawing action shapes arrow shapes basic shapes callout shapes curves flowchart shapes freehand shapes lines polylines shapes shapes from center star shapes dr
67. button and click Run Type D SETUP32 EXE ADMIN where D is the letter that corresponds to the CD ROM drive in the Open box 3 Click the Release Notes button if you want to read the WordPerfect Office 2002 Release Notes The Release Notes may contain installation tips that were not available at press time Welcome to WordPerfect Office 2002 19 4 Click the Next button and follow the instructions in the Network Administrator Setup wizard 20 Introduction LEARNING How TO USE WordPerfect Office 2002 In addition to the user guide you are reading WordPerfect Office 2002 offers electronic documentation to help you learn and use the applications efficiently and the PerfectExpert a user assistance tool to help you work more quickly while you become more familiar with WordPerfect Office 2002 applications WordPerfect Office 2002 electronic documentation is available in two formats that offer different content and tools online Help files and PDF manuals Using online Help The online Help is your most comprehensive source of information for WordPerfect Office 2002 applications The Help Topics dialog box provides four ways to find information You can choose a topic from the Contents page use the Indewwwx page to search for a topic use the Find page to search for specific words and phrases in Help topics You can also print topics from the online Help izi Daimi ira Fe Canak Jase Dick singh gid hen pkk Pili od
68. ccf e food ccf e literature ccf e music ccf e office ccf e personal ccf e travel ccf e wine ccf The personal ccf card file template also includes two preset cards If you want to use a card file template to store information you must save it in your profile with a new name To start Corel CENTRAL Card File 1 Click Start on the Windows taskbar 2 Click Programs WordPerfect Office 2002 gt CorelCENTRAL Applications CorelCENTRAL Card File Using Corel CENTRAL Card File 41 To open a card File template 1 Click File Open 2 Browse to X Program Files Corel WordPerfect Office 2002 Template where X represents the drive where CorelCENTRAL is installed 3 Double click a card file template To save a card File template in your profile Click a card file template tab 2 Click File Save as 3 Browse to one of the following locations e Windows 98 X My Documents CCWin10 Card File or if you have an individual user profile X Win98 Profiles Profile My Documents CCWin10 Card File where X represents the drive where CorelCENTRAL is installed e Windows 2000 X Documents and Settings Profile My Documents CCWin10 Card File where X represents the drive where CorelCENTRAL is installed e Windows NT X NT4 Profiles Profile Personal CCWin10 Card File where X represents the drive where CorelCENTRAL is installed e Windows Terminal Server and Citrix X WTSRV Profiles Profile Personal CCWi
69. clock to remind you of the events that you have scheduled in Corel CENTRAL Calendar and CorelCENTRAL Day Planner You can also Welcome To Corel CENTRAL 10 403 use CorelCENTRAL Alarms independently of CorelCENTRAL to create alarms that sound at specific times and dates Corel CENTRAL Address Book CorelCENTRAL Address Book is a powerful tool that lets you personalize and share your contact information You can add and customize information in the Corel CENTRAL Address Book and you can search for specific information You can share address books with other users on a network and set read and write permissions to limit what they can do within it This reduces duplication of contacts and centralizes contact lists Corel CENTRAL Mail CorelCENTRAL Mail is an email application that lets you manage multiple email accounts with high levels of security You can ensure the authenticity of the email messages that you send and receive with digital signatures and certificates You can apply a selected template or stationery style background to an email message use writing tools to edit an email message and set a priority level You can also filter email messages that you send and receive and flag email messages that you receive For more information on CorelCENTRAL Mail consult the online Help In this section you ll learn about e what s new in CorelCENTRAL 10 What s new in Corel CENTRAL 10 CorelCENTRAL 10 has several new features that help y
70. color of a table cell Click a line color on the Color palette Applying borders to tables You can add a border style to a table You can choose one of the border styles provided with WordPerfect or create a custom border with line style line color drop shadow and fill options then name that style so that you can apply it to other tables in your document You can also set a standard look for all tables in a document by defining a table style as the default setting The line fill and border settings you create will be the default for other tables in this and other documents that use the same template To apply a border to a table 1 Select a table 2 Click Table gt Borders fill 3 Click the Table tab 4 Click a border style on the Border palette To set a standard look for tables Select a table and click Table gt Borders fill Click the Table tab Click a border style on the Border palette In the Table border area click a color on the Color palette Click a line style on the Line palette In the Default cell lines area click a line color on the Color palette In the Fill area click a fill style on the Pattern palette In the Fill area click a fill color on the Foreground or Background palettes Click Default settings OMAN DU FWN Entering formulas in tables WordPerfect lets you add formulas or functions to tables You can create formulas in tables by using arithmetic and logical operators You can then ins
71. columns on multiple spreadsheets Select the rows or columns and a blank row and column around the data on each spreadsheet and click the QuickSum button on the notebook toolbar 188 Quarrro Pro 10 No You can total several cells in a column by selecting the data plus one blank cell below i For example to total the values in the cells A1 A3 select A1 A4 The total appears in cell A4 Os You can also total cells in a column or multiple columns SN To roral all cells on mulriple spreadsheers 1 Select the cells that you want to total on each spreadsheet 2 Select the same cells on a blank spreadsheet 3 Click the QuickSum E button on the notebook toolbar To total subtotals in a column 1 Select the first blank cell below the column containing the subtotal cells 2 Click the QuickSum E button on the notebook toolbar To use Calc As You Go 1 Select the cells on which to perform running calculations 2 View the totals on the application bar To disable Calc As You Go 1 Click Tools gt Settings 2 Inthe list of categories double click Workspaces Application and click General 3 Disable the Calc As You Go check box From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Creating a series to fill cells fill series Restricting and annotating cell data restricting data Calculating data in rows and columns Quick Math Creating A spreadsheet 189 Editing and FORMATTING A SDREACSHEET Qua
72. commands available when working in a chart File menu changes All the menu options listed below are found in the File menu Quattro Pro 9 Quattro Pro 10 new in 10 Close all new in 10 Save all Workspace Notebook group Workspace Restore Notebook group Open notebook group Workspace Save Notebook group Save notebook group Send to Mail Send to Send mail 170 Quattro Pro 10 Edit menu changes All the menu options listed below are found in the Edit menu Quattro Pro 9 Quattro Pro 10 Delete Clear Comments Clear gt Formats Links gt Change link Find page break Delete cells Clear Delete comments Clear Format Links Change links Find breaks View menu Changes All the menu options listed below are found in the View menu Quattro Pro 9 Quattro Pro 10 Draft Objects INSERT MENU CHANGES Draft view Objects Page All the menu options listed below are found in the Insert menu Quattro Pro 9 Quattro Pro 10 Cells Row Column Sheet Shape Comment Function Form control Button Form control gt Label Form control gt Scroll bar Name Cells Name gt Group of sheets XML tag Insert cells Insert row Insert column Insert sheet Shapes Insert comment Insert function Form control Push button Form control gt Label text Form control gt Vertical scroll bar Name gt Name cells Name gt Name group of sheets
73. common questions about installing WordPerfect Office 2002 What should I do if I qer a prompt telling me that I do not have enough room To install all the files Exit the Setup application and delete unnecessary files from your hard disk to make more disk space available You can also use the Custom Compact or Run from CD ROM installation options Several files such as the Clipart or data maps are not required to run the applications Use the Custom setup installation to add these files later How can I conserve disk space during installation Choose Compact installation which does not install all the components that come with WordPerfect Office 2002 You can also choose Custom installation and install only the required application files for each application plus any other files you want 18 Introduction I did a Compact installation Why do Spell Check Thesaurus or Grammarik NOT RUN A Compact installation installs only the files necessary to run WordPerfect Office 2002 If you want to install writing tools such as Spell Check Thesaurus or Grammatik run the Setup application again choose Custom installation then install the files you want Can I reinstall specific files If you need a specific file you can copy it from the CD where all the decompressed WordPerfect Office 2002 files are located You can also reinstall an entire product or component IF I install a mail system after installing WordPerfect Office 200
74. deleting objects Changing the color of objects Adding a chart to a report Previewing a report Printing a report Working with queries Using Query By Example Saving queries Creating multi table BE queries Creating advanced QBE queries Query operators Working with ObjectPAL Object based Event driven Methods Integrated Development Environment IDE Using the Object Explorer Using the Debugger Using the ObjectPAL Editor ObjectPAL Help Paradox and the INTERNET Publishing a table to the Internet Publishing a report to the Internet Importing HTML information from the Internet Compatibility with other applications Publishing reports Importing and exporting data Using Paradox table data in a Quattro Pro spreadsheet Creating a mail merge Working with previous versions of Paradox 372 372 373 374 374 375 375 7 7 377 379 379 380 380 787 385 386 386 386 386 387 387 387 789 389 389 390 29 391 392 393 393 342 Table of contents Paradox 10 Welcome to Paradox 10 Paradox is a powerful and easy to use relational database program that helps you organize track and retrieve information through the creation of tables and records You can also create sophisticated forms charts queries and reports to display your information You can run Paradox as a standalone system on a single computer or as a multi user system on a network Paradox contains Experts that guide you th
75. document gt Create form document If you have typed in the current document enable one of the following options e Use file in active window uses the active document e New document window creates a new document 3 In the Associate form and data dialog box enable the Associate an address book option and choose an address book from the list box 4 Click OK 5 Click Format gt Labels on the WordPerfect 10 menu bar 6 In the List labels for area enable one of the following label options e Laser printed displays laser label options Tractor fed displays tractor fed label options Both displays laser and tractor fed label options 7 Choose a label style from the Labels list and click Select 8 Insert fields in the form document SA You can merge selected records from an address book For information see To Ab ns A a merge selected records from an address book in the online Help Associating MERGE files When you merge documents you must link the name of a data source to a form document This is called associating a data source You can associate a data source with a form document or you can associate a form document with a data file such as an ODBC data source The association is always stored in the form document To associate A data file with a form document 1 Open a data file 2 Click Go to form on the Merge toolbar 3 Click one of the following e Select associates an existing form document
76. e Coloring book displays the selected object as a coloring book e Outline all displays the selected object with everything outlined Transparent displays the selected object with no fill so objects behind it are visible ANimaTing objects Objects or multiple objects can have animation effects applied to them For example you can choose the direction and speed of an animation effect and you can animate an object in its place or across the slide You can also apply sound to object animations Working with objects 287 To animate AN object 1 2 3 nu A Click an object Click Format Object properties Object animation In the Animation type area enable one of the following options Animate object in place animates the object in place on the slide e Animate object across screen animates the object by moving it across the slide If you want to show animation in Flash format enable the Show only Flash enabled transitions check box Choose an animation effect from the Effects list Choose an animation direction from the Direction list In the Speed area enable one of the following options e Fast Medium e Slow A Enable the Show only Flash enabled transitions check box if you intend to publish the slide show to the Internet using Flash format For information about using Flash format see Publishing slides and drawings as HTML documents on page 325 DS If you want to animate multiple
77. e Overwrite existing table imports data over existing table data Append to existing table imports data without affecting existing records 6 Click Export Using Paradox table data in a Quattro Pro spreadsheet You can copy individual fields or sections of tables from Paradox and paste them directly into a Quattro Pro spreadsheet You can also establish a link between a cell in a Quattro Pro spreadsheet and a field in a Paradox table When you link between Paradox and Quattro Pro the linked field in the spreadsheet is updated every time the data in the source table is updated 392 Paradox 10 When you copy one or more fields from a Paradox table and paste them into a Quattro Pro spreadsheet the field name is copied along with the data contained in the field To copy data from a Paradox table to a Quattro Pro spreadsheet 1 Ina Paradox table click the field you want to copy To select a block of fields click and drag over the fields you want to copy 2 Click Edit Copy 3 In Quattro Pro click the cell in which you want to paste the Paradox data 4 Click Edit gt Paste To link a Paradox table field to a Quattro Pro spreadsheet 1 Ina Paradox table click the table field to which you want to link 2 Click Edit Copy 3 In Quattro Pro click the cell you want to link to Paradox data 4 Click Edit Paste special 5 Enable the Paste link option Creating A mail MERGE You can use the Merge Expert to merge data from a table an
78. e PerfectScript tools Welcome to WordPerfect Office 2002 13 tools and utilities including code generation wizards for third party add ons to WordPerfect Quattro Pro and Corel Presentations utilities to monitor events in WordPerfect and Corel Presentations and a file format parsing tool The SDK can be downloaded from www corel com The Corel Solution Partners program supports developers of complimentary products and add ons for selected Corel products including WordPerfect Office 2002 The program is designed to help accelerate the development of third party products and promote these products For more information about Corel Solution Partners see our World Wide Web site at www corel com partners_developers csp 14 Introduction Installing WordPerfect Office 2002 You must install WordPerfect Office 2002 before you run it for the first time The WordPerfect Office 2002 Setup application makes it easy to install You can also use the Setup application to e add components to your currently installed WordPerfect Office 2002 e refresh files and configurations of your currently installed WordPerfect Office 2002 Before installing you should do the following e close any open applications e close any virus detection application e make sure your computer meets the system requirements which are listed below WordPerfect Office 2002 system requirements The following are the minimum system requirements for WordPerfect Offic
79. editor object explorer internet K key field choosing L abel expert inking tables to Quattro Pro inks removing ocating records ookup tables Lotus 1 2 3 importing from M mail merge mailing labels many to one relationship merge expert merging 389 372 344 390 390 391 389 389 391 390 356 387 387 386 389 351 372 352 392 364 360 356 391 393 372 365 393 data with text documents methods Microsoft Excel importing from Microsoft Word publishing N navigation reports tables O object explorer object tree object types ObjectPAL event driven events methods properties viewing code objects adding to forms adding to reports color deleting graphic moving text et ta 3s one to many relationship one to one relationship operators query p Paradox desktop introduction passwords creating picture templates previewing reports previous versions of Paradox printing enhancements forms reports project viewer publishing 393 386 391 391 375 359 386 386 348 385 386 386 386 385 387 385 366 372 374 367 373 372 367 373 372 365 365 380 347 343 357 355 375 393 343 369 375 348 396 Index Paradox 10 enhancements 343 string lists 344 reports to HTML 389 structure reports to RTF 391 database 351 tables to HTML 389 table 353 sup
80. electronic media and the World Wide Web Quattro Pro does not limit you to a spreadsheet presentation You can present your spreadsheet data in charts or present only relevant information in dynamic CrossTab reports which continually reflect the current state of the data they summarize Once you enter data you can edit the format and structure of your notebooks at any time In this section you ll learn about e what s new in Quattro Pro 10 e what s different in Quattro Pro 10 What s new in Quattro Pro 10 Quattro Pro 10 has new and enhanced features to help you create and present your spreadsheet information including a new charting engine new workspace functionality improvements to customization features and restructured online Help Outline of new Features The following features have been added or improved for Quattro Pro 10 For complete descriptions and procedural outlines of these features consult the online Help Charting A new charting engine allows you to present spreadsheet data graphically using a variety of chart types and styles customized titles and legends and advanced rendering and lighting options Workspaces A workspace specifies how the various command bars commands and buttons are arranged when you open the application With Quattro Pro you can now create import and export unique workspaces Enhanced Help The Quattro Pro online Help has been restructured to emphasize task based procedures and
81. ff Top right of table button FE Bottom left of table button Bottom right of table button To select a Row or column Select the row or column heading To select multiple spreadsheets 1 Click the tab of the first spreadsheet to select 2 Hold down SHIFT while you click the last spreadsheet tab you want included in the selection A black line appears under the tabs 166 Quattro Pro 10 To lock titles on a spreadsheet 1 Select the top left cell of the spreadsheet area you want to remain scrollable 2 Click View gt Locked titles A blue line divides the locked area and the notebook data A The Locked titles option is only available in Draft view lt You can display only row titles or only column titles as locked titles by selecting the Y RA row or column below or to the right of the last one to be displayed To unlock titles click View gt Locked titles again To repeat column titles on each spreadsheet of a printed notebook 1 Click File Page setup 2 Click the Options tab 3 Type the location of the column title in the Top heading box pe You can also repeat row titles by typing the location of the row title in the Left heading box Adding and deleting cells rows and columns You can insert cells rows or columns anywhere in a spreadsheet When you insert an item existing data is pushed down to the right or to the back of the notebook to make room for the new item As well when data is no l
82. following image shows the Master Gallery The masters in the Master Gallery are grouped into categories You can use a master provided with Corel Presentations in the Master Gallery Working with the Master Gallery 269 To use a master in The Master Gallery 1 Click Format gt Master Gallery 2 Choose a slide show category from the Category list box 3 Click a master on the Selected style palette Applying backgrounds and layouts To slides When you add a new slide to a slide show you can apply preset backgrounds and layouts from the Background Gallery and the Layout Gallery For example if you want a slideshow with a grayscale or black and white look you can choose one of the printout masters available in the Master Gallery category list To apply a background To a slide 1 Click Format gt Background Gallery 2 Click the Appearance tab 3 In the Backgrounds area choose a background category from the Category list box 4 Click a background on the Background palette If you want to apply the background to all slides in the slide show enable the Apply selected background to all slides in slide show check box Ar You can add up to 30 different backgrounds to a slide show DS You can also apply a background that is not in the Category list box by clicking the S NW Browse button and choosing the drive and folder where the background is stored For example you can apply clipart as a background To apply a layout To a slid
83. for the page numbers 3 From the Page numbering format list box choose a format for the page numbers A The sample facing pages in the Select page numbering format dialog box show where the page numbers will be positioned and how they will look in print To insert paqe chapter or volume numbers in dOCUMENT TEXT 1 Click in a document 2 Click Format gt Page gt Insert page number 3 From the list choose one of the following e Page lets you define a custom numbering style for pages e Chapter lets you define a custom numbering style for a chapter e Volume lets you define a custom numbering style for a volume Secondary page lets you define a custom numbering style for secondary pages e Total pages lets you define a custom numbering style for total pages for example page 6 of 10 4 Click Insert Setting page chapter and volume numbers You can specify the current page chapter or volume number in a document For example when you start a new chapter you can set the chapter number to two and the first page of the new chapter to one When you change the numbering for a page chapter or volume numbering begins with the new number from that point forward in the document To ser a page number 1 Click Format Page Numbering Click Set value In the dialog box click the Page tab Type a new page number in the Set page number box uk WN Enable one of the following options e Always keep num
84. format dates and Times 1 Select a cell to format 2 Click Format gt Selection properties 3 Click the Numeric format tab 4 Click one of the following formats from the Numeric formats list Date lets you choose a date format from the Date formats options e Time lets you choose a time format from the Time formats options Working with page breaks You can change the look of a spreadsheet by specifying page breaks There are two kinds of page breaks soft page breaks and hard page breaks Quattro Pro lets you view and find page breaks in spreadsheets Page breaks display as solid blue lines Quattro Pro automatically creates soft page breaks at the bottom of each page according to the page size You can insert either horizontal or vertical hard page breaks to start a new page You can delete page breaks no longer needed Quattro Pro lets you convert soft page breaks to hard page breaks and hard page breaks to soft page breaks You can also delete a hard page break To view page breaks e Click View Page breaks To find page breaks 1 Click Edit Find breaks 2 In the Break type area choose a type of page break from the list box 3 In the Break classification area choose a page break classification from the list box 4 Click Find next To insert hard page breaks 1 Click the cell where you want to insert a page break 2 Click Insert Page break Create 3 Choose a break type from the Break type list box Li
85. formats even if you do not have the native application installed on your computer Quick View Plus can be integrated into email applications including CorelCENTRAL Mail Netscape Messenger Eudora Microsoft Outlook and Microsoft Exchange 12 Introduction To install Quick View Plus Insert the WordPerfect Office 2002 CD 1 into the CD ROM drive Ifthe WordPerfect Office 2002 Setup screen does not display click the Start button on the Windows taskbar and click Run Type D SETUP where D is the letter corresponding to the CD ROM drive in the Open box 2 Click Quick View Plus Setup 3 Follow the on screen prompts PerfectExpert PerfectExpert includes the best features from QuickTask templates Coaches and online Help PerfectExpert lets you create complex documents quickly using professionally designed templates that you can change to suit your needs For example PerfectExpert can guide you through a detailed project such as creating a resume or it can guide you through a smaller task such as inserting a clipart image WordPerfect Office 2002 includes a number of templates and new templates can be downloaded from the World Wide Web to give you more selection TextArt TextArt lets you transform words into designs You can use multiple visual effects such as font color and rotation options to create professional looking 2 D or 3 D images You can create a TextArt image yourself or insert preset 2 D and 3 D images
86. i leading Index WordPerfect 10 139 adjusting lines applying to tables changing height to a fixed size inserting in footers inserting in headers spacing linking listing QuickCorrect words lists bulleted y creating custom symbols numbering M mail merging to margins changing page marking records for a merge merge commands inserting merge conditions merge files associating creating data files creating data table files creating data text files data table files data text files merging adding merged documents to active document adding merged files to active document associating merge files changing merge options creating data creating form documents creating labels data files Er O AR displaying merged fields sideways documents form documents marking records merge commands options performing SA printing merged documents saving merged documents saving merged files to disk saving output 69 108 70 56 56 69 91 87 77 78 79 126 46 45 46 128 123 128 125 121 121 121 121 121 126 127 125 129 121 124 123 125 121 123 121 123 128 123 126 126 127 126 127 126 127 126 selecting records for a merge selecting specific data for merges selective Jeet OR sending merged documents as email sending merged files to new document setting conditions stopping keyboard merge stopping merge in progres
87. inserting document filenames 56 deleting 91 inserting horizontal graphics line 56 displaying 91 inserting items 56 drawing soe 92 inserting numbering 57 editing in draw picture window 92 inserting time 56 grouping 95 suppressing 55 inserting from CDs 92 viewing 54 moving behind text 95 footnotes moving in front of text 95 changing locations 75 moving using keyboards 94 changing number formats 75 moving within boxes 98 changing numbering methods 76 ordering 95 changing spaces between 75 resizing 94 changing to endnotes 74 saving 91 continuing on other pages 75 sizing z 94 converting to endnotes 74 sizing proportionally 94 creating 73 stretching 94 editing 74 ungrouping 95 formatting 74 graphics boxes form documents adding borders 115 associating 125 applying gradient fills 118 associating with data sources 126 editing borders 117 creating 123 124 moving images within 98 inserting fields 125 removing borders 117 formatting graphics lines documents 45 inserting in footers 56 endnotes 74 inserting in headers 56 footers 54 grouping footnotes 74 graphics 95 headers 54 guidelines 45 138 Index WordPerfect 10 H importing objects 49 headers text 49 changing space above or below 55 indenting discontinuing 55 hanging indents 65 editing 54 paragraphs 65 formatting 54 paragraphs automatically 65 in table rows 108 text 64 inserting 53 54 indents inserti
88. international settings 170 173 columns and rows 197 printing 210 exiting spreadsheet functions 186 notebooks 180 DDE da Y 225 Experts 157 decimal format 208 Analysis 157 default column width 198 Budget 157 default margin settings 211 Chart 157 default row height 198 Consolidate 157 default templates 181 Database 157 delay time Map 157 changing 196 Scenario 157 drag and drop 197 Slide Show 157 deleting What If 157 columns 167 explanatory reporting ho 283 rows 167 external data sources 233 234 spreadsheets 169 external databases delimiters for columns 223 225 CrossTab reports 233 234 division 187 extracting division signs files 178 179 forward slashes 187 Draft View selecting 173 F drag and drop fields delay time 197 CrossTab reports 233 Quattro Pro objects 226 file extensions dragging QPW 178 cells 196 197 XLS 178 page breaks 209 default 178 179 dynamic file formats data 233 QIF 220 QPX 224 opening 219 240 Index Quarrro Pro 10 saving 221 currency 208 File menu 150 custom 208 files erasing 192 backing up 178 179 fraction 208 combining 221 hidden 208 extracting 179 numeric 208 importing 219 221 percent 208 inserting 219 221 222 predefined 201 managing 219 scientific 208 new 181 SpeedFormat 201 OLE 219 formatting sending 221 aligning data 206 filling borders 206 cells 205 cells 191 208 using QuickFill 186 copying 201 fills copying cell 201
89. into documents Saving an image as a separate file lets you use the image in a variety of projects You can also change the font of a TextArt image by specifying the font type and style or insert iconic symbols and characters from any fonts and alphabets available to you For more information refer to the TextArt online Help file The help can be accessed when you click Insert Graphics gt TextArt WordPerfect Office 2002 file Filters WordPerfect Office 2002 applications include file filters that let you open and edit documents created using Microsoft Office and Lotus SmartSuite applications For example you can open a Microsoft Word document in WordPerfect or you can use Quattro Pro to open a Lotus 1 2 3 spreadsheet You can also save WordPerfect Office 2002 documents in Microsoft Office and Lotus SmartSuite formats For example you can save a Corel Presentations slide show as a Microsoft PowerPoint presentation or a WordPerfect document as a Microsoft Word document aia To maintain backward file compatibility the file format for WordPerfect 10 remains the same as for WordPerfect 6 1 7 8 and 9 WordPerfect Office 2002 SDK and Corel Solution Partners The WordPerfect Office 2002 Software Developer s Kit SDK is a set of tools that lets software developers customize WordPerfect Office 2002 applications for commercial or business use The SDK includes the following components e online Help for the SDK e OLE automation samples
90. it will print From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Printing two sided documents two sided documents printing 722 Corel Presentations 10 From here For more information about Adjusting the size of drawings and slides for printing Adjusting the position of drawings and slides for printing Customizing printing Configuring printer settings In the online Help Index type size adjusting slides or drawings position adjusting slides or drawings printing customizing printer settings configuring Printing in Corel Presentations 323 INTERNET ANC electronic publishin You can use Corel Presentations 10 to publish slides and drawings to the World Wide Web In this section you ll learn about e publishing slides and drawings as HTML documents e publishing to Portable Document Format PDF e sending slide shows to other applications Publishing slides and drawings as HTML documents You can publish Corel Presentations slide shows as HTML documents so that you can publish them to the World Wide Web using Corel Internet Publisher To publish a slide show as an HTML document 1 Click File Internet Publisher The Corel Internet Publisher wizard starts 2 Click Next 3 Click Layout 4 Enable one of the following options e Create a new layout e Use an existing layout and choose a layout from the list 5 Choose the formatting options for the slide show b
91. lets you see the events and tasks that you have scheduled for the day CorelCENTRAL Day Planner is integrated with the default CorelCENTRAL Calendar so tasks and events that you schedule in CorelCENTRAL Day Planner can also be viewed in the default CorelCENTRAL Calendar Corel CENTRAL Calendar CorelCENTRAL Calendar lets you plan your activities in advance by days weeks months or even years With groupware CorelCENTRAL Calendar also helps you facilitate communication in a corporate environment The default CorelCENTRAL Calendar is integrated with CorelCENTRAL Day Planner so tasks and events that you schedule in the default Corel CENTRAL Calendar can also be viewed in CorelCENTRAL Day Planner Corel CENTRAL Card File Corel CENTRAL Card File is a versatile database application that you can use to store and organize personal information inventories reference material and many other types of data You can customize card files to store only the information that you need to record You can create as many cards as you need with fields specific to each card and the data it contains CorelCENTRAL Memos CorelCENTRAL Memos lets you write and store notes to remind yourself about appointments special events or anything else that you want to record and organize For example you can write yourself a memo to remind you of what you need to accomplish on a given day Corel CENTRAL Alarms CorelCENTRAL Alarms lets you use your computer as an alarm
92. low charts Formatting line charts Formatting pie charts Formatting radar charts Formatting surface charts Formatting xy scatter charts Converting data chart to drawing objects In the online Help Index type area charts formatting bar charts formatting bubble charts formatting high low charts formatting line charts formatting pie charts formatting radar charts formatting surface charts formatting xy scatter charts formatting data charts converting to drawing objects 308 Corel Presentations 10 Working with datasheets The datasheet is a spreadsheet that is used to enter edit or format the data that a data chart displays In this section you ll learn about e manipulating datasheets e adding and copying data in datasheets e working with datasheet cells e working with rows and columns e using formulas and number fills Manipulating datasheets When you have finished entering data in a datasheet you can hide the datasheet You can also move a datasheet to a new location on the screen and you can adjust the size of a datasheet To hide a datasheet 1 Double click a data chart 2 Click View Datasheet No check mark beside the Datasheet command indicates that the datasheet is hidden NX z The datasheet displays by default Pai To move a datasheet e Drag a datasheet to a new location in the drawing window To size a datasheet 1 Point to any side or corner of a datasheet 2 Drag
93. madw Lo pai k le AB ora do ot Ped ect 10 q Geaiting charted da ore rd Ling Acc ana A irom nj het dl crac A rl ba Pea ee gt Marga ban ah To access online Help topics From a WordPerfect Office 2002 application click Help gt Help Topics 2 Click one of the following tabs e Contents to browse through topics by category Index to see a list of index entries Find to search for a particular word or phrase in the online Help Learning how to use WordPerfect Office 2002 21 To print AN ENTIRE SECTION iN The online Help On the Contents page choose the section you want to print 2 Click the Print button To print a selected topic in the online Help Right click the help topic window and click Print Topic Context sensitive Help WordPerfect Office 2002 includes several forms of context sensitive Help help that provides you with information about the application while you work You can access context sensitive Help from the menus dialog boxes and toolbars The most common ways to access context sensitive Help are as follows To get help on Do the following Menu commands Position the cursor on a command A brief description appears called a ToolTip Toolbar buttons Position the cursor on a button A brief description appears called a ToolTip Dialog boxes Click the Help button in the dialog box or press F1 Dialog controls Click the What s This Help button E ina
94. make sure the input cells you are analyzing are arranged properly and contain numeric data not strings As well the analysis tools have varying restrictions on the contents of the input cells and size of the cell area Creating Freovency distribution tables A frequency distribution table indicates the values that a variable can take on and the frequency with which each value occurs For example you can create a frequency distribution table to find the number of times that numbers between two and five appear in a given block of cells You can supplement the statistical information in your notebook with appropriate spreadsheet functions For example you can include these formulas at the end of the weekly sales figures contained in a selection named SALES OSUM SALES Calculates total sales COUNT SALES Calculates the number of sales in the column AVG SALES Calculates the average sales amount To create a frequency distribution table you need one or more areas of values to count and bin cells listing the value intervals or bins for each count Bin cells contain the range of intervals you want analyzed The bin must be a single column with a column of blank cells to its right where the results will be written Value cells must also be placed in a single column To create A Frequency distribution table 1 Type values in a bin of ranges on the spreadsheet 2 Click Tools Numeric tools Frequency 3 Click the Range picker he in the V
95. new number From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Creating outlines with headings outlines creating Editing lists and outlines editing Arranging items in bulleted lists bulleted lists arranging items Arranging items in numbered lists numbered lists arranging items Arranging items in outlines outlines arranging items 80 WordPerfect 10 Numbering WordPerfect 10 allows you to assign numbers to paragraphs and documents as well as insert and customize numbers within documents In this section you ll learn about e numbering pages e setting page chapter and volume numbers e suppressing and discontinuing page numbers Numbering pages You can number the pages of a document including information such as the number of pages chapters volumes or secondary pages You can choose a position for the numbers and define the numbering format you want to use The following image shows various page numbering positions 1 no page number 2 page number in the bottom right corner 3 page number at the bottom center and 4 page number in the top right corner in a Numbering 81 You can choose from several common page numbering formats or create a custom format of your own For information about custom formats see Customizing page numbering formats in the online Help To insert page numbers 1 Click Format gt Page Numbering 2 From the Position list box choose a position
96. objects hold down SHIFT and click the objects SN To apply sound To an object ANIMATION 1 Click an object 2 Click Format Object properties Object animation 3 In the Sound area click Browse 4 Inthe Open file dialog box choose the drive and folder where the sound file is stored 5 Type a filename in the Filename box 6 Click Open 7 On the Object animation page move the slider to adjust the volume of the sound file From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Inserting objects objects inserting Copying objects objects copying Pasting objects objects pasting Arranging objects objects arranging Blending objects objects blending Molding objects objects molding 286 Corel Presentations 10 From here For more information about Creating 3 D objects Applying fills to objects Adding shadows to objects Adjusting the intensity of objects Creating SpeedLink objects In the online Help Index type 3 D objects creating objects applying fills objects adding shadows objects adjusting intensity SpeedLink objects creating Working with objects 287 Playing slide shows Once you create a slide show different options are available to play it in Corel Presentations 10 In this section you ll learn about e playing slide shows Playing slide shows There are different ways to play slide shows in Corel Presentations You can play a slide show by man
97. of 193 sizing 231 erasing feud wey 192 titles 231 filling 186 187 205 closing formatting 191 notebooks 178 180 indenting 206 codes inserting 167 footer 210 joining 203 header 210 locking 192 color palette 203 math in o 187 color coding moving 196 198 spreadsheet tabs 204 238 Index Quattro Pro 10 coloring copied cells data ranges 205 linking 198 spreadsheet tabs 206 copying colors cell formatting 201 adding 205 to spreadsheet groups 196 changing text 203 types of data 197 column width copyright symbol 182 adjusting 201 creating changing 199 charts 231 changing default 199 charts automatically s m 2A increasing 200 CrossTab reports 233 234 restoring default 200 scenario groups 217 columns scenarios 217 adding 167 cross tabulation 233 CrossTab reports ac oe Se 235 CrossTab report data deleting 167 168 refreshing 236 delimiters 223 225 updating 236 filling 186 CrossTab report data fields hiding Aa a 201 aligning 235 inserting 167 168 CrossTab reports 234 joining cells 203 adjusting appearance 236 navigating 163 building 234 parsing 223 225 formatting 235 QuickFill 186 naming 235 resizing i Ce se 198 refreshing 236 restricting 167 168 currency revealing 201 international settings 170 172 selecting 165 current dates setting number of 182 entering 184 185 totaling 187 customizing totaling subtotals in 189 appearance of CrossTab reports 236 tot
98. picture template 1 Click the Picture column for the field name to which you want to assign a picture template 2 Choose one of the predefined options or choose Picture assistant from the list If you chose a predefined option your picture template is already set Working with tables and records 377 Click Add Type a picture name in the Pictures list Click Code syntax to view valid picture codes nu kW Type a code in the Picture code box An example of a code would be 7 Type a sample value in the Sample value box An example of a sample value would be 1234 8 Type a description for the picture in the Description box To ser a field as mandatory e In the Create table dialog box enable the Req d check box for the appropriate field name Establishing a secondary index Secondary indexes help you to sort the records in your table and to retrieve data When you create a secondary index on a field the table s records sort under that field instead of under the key field the default To establish a secondary index 1 Click Format gt Restructure table 2 Click the Secondary index tab 3 Click Add 4 Type a name for the index in the Index names list Usually this takes the name of the field on which you set the index Choose a field from the Fields list Click the right arrow 7 In the Index options area enable one or more of the following options e Unique requires that the value entered exists only once I
99. preset calculations You can also total cells in rows or columns For example you can calculate totals in a single row or multiple rows or columns The row or column cannot contain blank cells and any labels in the selected cells are treated as zero values You can also total all cells on multiple spreadsheets and total the subtotals in a column Calc As You Go lets you display several different running totals for cells you select the sum average count maximum value and minimum value display on the application bar You can disable Calc As You Go To perform preset calculations 1 Type values across a row or down a column 2 Click the first blank cell after the values 3 Open the QuickFunction flyout on the notebook toolbar and click a function T Laie og Bin eg Dil pa hi ee Peete 1 lt 11 BP eect 4 ta T a Pai Te riada ES Bates b Pao vais py A Pa ce oe The icon on the flyout varies depending on which calculation you select To toral cells To total Do the following Cells in a row Select the cells and one blank cell to the right and click the QuickSum E button on the notebook toolbar Multiple rows Select the cells and a blank column to the right and click the QuickSum button on the notebook toolbar Rows and columns for a grand total Select the cells with a blank column to the right and a blank row below and click the QuickSum button on the notebook toolbar Rows or
100. project Click the Create new tab Select Quattro Pro 10 from the Categories list box 1 2 3 4 Choose a project from the Projects list 5 Click Create 6 Use the PerfectExpert panel to modify the project To change the size of a notebook 1 Click Tools gt Settings 2 Inthe list of categories double click Workspaces Application and click Compatibility 3 In the Notebook sizes area type a value in the Sheets box If you want to specify a minimum number of spreadsheet tabs to display type a value in the Minimum number to display box 4 Type a value in the Columns box 5 Type a value in the Rows box aia Any changes you make on the Compatibility page become the default settings for the application To open a notebook 1 Click File Open 2 Choose the driver and folder where the notebook is stored 3 Click a filename 4 Click Open ei Quattro Pro version 10 files use the qpw extension Earlier versions use wb3 wb2 or wb1 extensions To open a specific notebook when starting Quattro Pro 1 Click Start Run on the Windows taskbar 2 In the Open box type the Quattro Pro command with its path followed by a space and a notebook filename For example qpw exe C My Documents MYFILE QPW starts Quattro Pro and opens MYFILE QPW NX Me When you open a file that contains a PerfectScript or Quattro Pro native startup eee macro the macro launches as soon as you open the file However macros may contain c
101. project proposals interactive demonstrations multimedia presentations flyers signs banners and more Slide shows can be presented on large monitors portable computers overhead transparencies 35mm slides or printed in color or black and white You can also send presentations to other people over the Internet In this section you ll learn about e what s new in Corel Presentations 10 e what s different in Corel Presentations 10 What s new in Corel Presentations 10 Corel Presentations 10 contains the following new features Font embedding font matching Font embedding and font matching are useful when you want to share files with other users but they may not have the same fonts installed Font embedding allows you to embed fonts within a document so that it holds the same look and design regardless of whether other users have the available fonts on their systems Font matching allows for user notification and font substitution when a document is opened If the fonts used to create a document are not available on the user s system a message notifies the user of the mismatch Users can then choose to substitute the missing font with the recommended font or cancel opening the document to install the required fonts Corel Application Recovery Manager Corel Application Recovery Manager Corel ARM is an online wizard that allows you to save a document and quit Corel Presentations if the program ever becomes unstable You can also send
102. rather zeros remain in memory and will display if you choose to unhide them It is easy to accidentally overwrite cells containing formulas that evaluate to zero To prevent this make sure you are able to undo actions or consider protecting the spreadsheet Quattro Pro lets you format dates and times in a spreadsheet For example by default Quattro Pro displays times in long form as HH MM SS for example 09 32 30 or in short form as HH MM for example 09 32 when no seconds are specified but you can change this format To change the numeric format of a cell 1 Select a cell 2 Click Format Selection properties 3 Click the Numeric format tab 4 Choose one of the following formats from the Numeric formats list e General to display numbers exactly as you type them unless the column width is too narrow e Number to choose a negative number and number of decimal places formats and separate thousands with commas e Currency to choose a country whose currency symbol you want to use e Scientific to display numbers as scientific notations Fraction to choose a fraction format e Hidden to prevent a cell from displaying its contents e Percent to display numbers in a percent format e Custom to choose a customized format 208 Quattro Pro 10 To hide zeros on a spreadsheet 1 Click Format gt Sheet properties 2 Click the Display tab 3 Enable the No option in the Display zeros area To
103. real world testing opportunity op Paradox 10 does not use the Corel A R M as it already has built in application recovery features Location Manager The Location Manager utility is a component of the Corel A R M It makes sure the WordPerfect Office 2002 applications can start without errors even when files are missing or damaged When you start a WordPerfect Office 2002 application the Location Manager ensures that all the required files are present on the your computer If the file is missing due to being moved renamed or deleted or if it is damaged the Location Manager will repair the problem by replacing the file This means that instead of receiving an error message and not being able to start the application the Location Manager will automatically repair the problem and the application will start as expected This greatly reduces downtime and virtually eliminates the need to call technical support for errors caused by missing or damaged application files Welcome to WordPerfect Office 2002 9 Corel Connector If you have an Internet connection you can connect to product specific information newsgroups updates technical support and more using the new Corel Connector included in WordPerfect Office 2002 The Corel Connector is a thin Web client integrated into the applications You can use the Corel Connector without leaving the WordPerfect Office 2002 applications to e search for information on the World Wide Web using
104. representation of two or more linked tables and the nature of the relationship between them If you are creating a form or report that accesses data from more than one table you must link the tables first This link can also be removed if it is no longer needed In order to link your tables you need to identify a common field between the two That field becomes your linking field Paradox recognizes three possible relationships between linking fields 364 Paradox 10 To ON DU FW To _ ON DAU FW To PWN One to one a unique field in a table is linked to a unique field in another table There is a direct relationship between the tables in which there is only one record in either table for the unique value One to many a unique value in the linked field of a parent table is linked to a non unique field in a child table For example a single customer may have many orders for products Many to one a parent table of several non unique records is linked to a child table that contains only unique values For example you could link a table that contains customer information with a table that contains telephone numbers and area codes There are many customers per area code but each customer name is unique CREATE A data model Click File New gt Data model From the list box at the bottom of the Add object dialog box choose one of the following objects e Tables lets you search for tables e Queries lets you searc
105. resulting in automatic updating of the data when the spreadsheet is changed Import at current cell imports data at the selected cell 5 Inthe Filename box type the path and filename of the import file Type a value in the Range box to import a range of data Ds You can also import a predefined range of data by choosing a range from the Named S V ranges list To export data From a datasheet 1 Click a datasheet 2 Click Data Export 3 Choose the drive and folder to which you want to export the data 310 Corel Presentations 10 4 Choose a file format and delimiter type from the File type list box 5 Type a filename in the Filename box 6 Click Export Working with datasheet cells The Corel Presentations datasheet consists of a series of cells in which you enter or edit chart data You can select all of the cells in a datasheet By highlighting each area with a color in the range highlighter you can distinguish between datasheet data and the legend and label areas in the datasheet For information about legend and label areas see Working with data charts on page 305 While editing a chart you can move to any cell in the datasheet by specifying the column and row of the cell to which you want to move For example typing C4 specifies the cell at the intersection of the fourth row and the C column To select all cells 1 Click a datasheet 2 Click Edit Select all To highlight ranges Click a datasheet C
106. sounds in slide shows e working with movies in slide shows Working with sounds in slide shows Once you have correctly installed and set up sound hardware on your computer you can add Wave Wav and MIDI Mid sound files to slides You can add an entire CD track or only sections of a track to slides by choosing specific starting and stopping points The following image shows that you can add sound files to slide shows To insert a Wave and MIDI sound file into a slide 1 Click Insert Sound 2 Click Browse beside one of the following boxes e Wave e MIDI 3 Choose the drive and folder where the sound file is stored Type a filename in the Filename box 5 Click Open Adding multimedia effects 301 MMe You can only play one Mid and one Wav file at the same time You cannot play two sound files of the same type simultaneously Ds To get the best results from the MIDI sound files that are included with Corel S V Presentations make sure that your system is set up correctly for your sound card To add an entire CD track to a slide 1 Click Insert gt Sound Click Browse beside the CD box In the Slide CD Audio dialog box type a track description in the Description box Rh U N Type the number of the CD track in the Track box To add part of a CD track To a slide 1 Click Insert Sound 2 Click Browse beside the CD box 3 In the Slide CD Audio dialog box type a description in the Description box
107. that it displays its mirror image or you can rotate an image You can also change the center of rotation for an image To move AN image inside a Graphics box 1 Right click an image and click Image tools 2 Click Move 3 Drag the image to move it inside the graphics box gt To specify a precise horizontal and vertical position for the image click Edit V attributes in the Image tools dialog box and type a value in the Horizontal or Vertical box 98 WordPerfect 10 To flip an imaqe 1 Right click an image and click Image tools 2 Click one of the following e Vertical flip flips or reverses the image on its vertical axis Horizontal flip flips or reverses the image on its horizontal axis S To ROTATE AN IMAGE 1 Right click an image and click Image tools 2 Click Rotate Os You can also flip an image by clicking the Horizontal flip button or the Vertical flip button 4 on the property bar Rotation handles display at each corner of the graphics box 3 Drag a corner rotation handle in the direction you want to rotate the image From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Modifying shapes using the mode toggle Modifying lines using editing points Changing the fill of an image Converting a color image to black and white Changing the center of rotation for an image Rotating an image using exact measurements Linking objects Embedding objects
108. the qpx file you want to load To customize parse settings For fixed width text files Click Tools Data tools QuickColumns Click the Range picker he in the Text source box and select the source cells Click the Range picker in the Destination box and select a location for the imported data Click Settings 1 2 3 4 Choose Fixed width auto from the Parse settings list box 5 6 In the Fixed width area enable any of the following options Skip first character skips the first character in each line of text Ignore nonconforming rows skips lines in the text that the QuickColumns Expert cannot parse Otherwise these lines are copied into the destination cells as unparsed labels 224 Quattro Pro 10 Join broken lines at characters unwraps lines before parsing For example if the text was generated by an application that wrapped text lines that exceeded 80 characters enable this check box and type 80 To adjust the column width for imported TEXT 1 Click Tools Data tools QuickColumns 2 Click Format 3 In the column heading point to the border until it changes to a double arrow 4 Drag the border until the column reaches the required width NT When you adjust columns that contain fixed width text the adjustment may change where the data is placed in the destination cells When you adjust columns that contain delimited text the adjustment resizes the entire column and does not affect where
109. the Document tab 4 Inthe Show area disable the RealTime Preview check box Sx ze Corel RealTime Preview is enabled by default Copying the Format of text You can copy the format of text and apply it to other text in a document If you want to copy selected text formatting attributes such as font font size and font style are all copied If you want to copy the heading in a paragraph the paragraph style as well as the font and its attributes are copied When you copy the format of text you automatically create a text style Changing text that has been formatted using a text style also changes other text in the document that uses that style For information about text styles see Creating and applying text styles in the online Help To copy the format of text 1 Click in the text whose format you want to copy 2 Click Format gt QuickFormat 3 Enable one of the following options e Selected characters copies the format of the font and its attributes e Headings copies the format of the paragraph and its styles and the font and its attributes 4 Click OK 5 Drag the QuickFormat paintbrush pointer over the text to which you want to copy the format 6 Click Format gt QuickFormat QuickFormat is disabled when no check mark displays beside the QuickFormat menu command iD You can also enable or disable QuickFormat by clicking the QuickFormat NW button Highlighting Text Highlighting text adds a bar
110. the arrow keys the ENTER key and the TAB key You can also automatically scroll through a spreadsheet using the AutoScroll tool As well you can quickly navigate to the Objects sheet and cycle through open notebooks Menu and dialog box options can be accessed using the keyboard For a complete list of keyboard shortcuts see Quattro Pro keyboard shortcuts in the reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help Finally you can go directly to specific cells or data types using the Go To and Browse By features To navigate in A spreadsheet e Press the relevant key combination as outlined in the table below To Do the following Move down columns after entering data Press ENTER or the DOWN ARROW Move up columns after entering data Press the UP ARROW Move across rows after entering data Press the LEFT ARROW or RIGHT ARROW key DS You can also move across rows by pressing the TAB key Sy To automatically scroll through a spreadsheet 1 On the notebook toolbar click AutoScroll The cursor changes to the AutoScroll arrow 2 Move the AutoScroll arrow in the direction you want to scroll yz The scrolling speed increases as you move the arrow farther away from the GAY SY AutoScroll tool You can disable AutoScroll by clicking anywhere on the spreadsheet To go to the Objects sheet e Click the Quick tab button at the bottom left of the notebook window DS To return to the original spreadsheet click the Quick tab I bu
111. the effect you want Flipping rotating And skewing objects You can flip rotate and skew objects in the drawing window Flipping lets you mirror an object left to right or top to bottom For example you can copy an object position it opposite to the original object and create a mirror image Rotating lets you reposition the object and skewing lets you distort the horizontal or vertical dimensions of the object To flip an object 1 Click an object 2 Click Edit Arrange gt Flip and click one of the following e Left right flips the selected object around a vertical axis e Top bottom flips the selected object around a horizontal axis To rotate AN object 1 Click an object 2 Click Edit gt Arrange gt Rotate 3 Drag a corner rotation handle You can also Rotate an object automatically Right click a rotation handle In the Rotate dialog box type a value in the Degrees box Rotate a copy of an object Right click a rotation handle In the Rotate dialog box enable the Rotate a copy of the object check box To skew an object 1 Click an object 2 Click Edit Arrange gt Rotate 3 Drag a side rotation handle Applying color and outlines to objects You can apply colors to objects You can also apply custom outlines to objects using color width and angle selections 284 Corel Presentations 10 To apply a custom color to an object 1 Click an object 2 Click one of the following buttons on
112. the exception list From the Exception list box choose the word that you want to delete Click Delete entry Making text Fit a specific number of pages You can make selected text or all text in a document fit a specific number of pages 68 WordPerfect 10 To make text fir a specific number of pages 1 Click in a document 2 Click Format gt Make it fit 3 Type a value in the Desired number of pages box The number of pages you set must be within 50 percent of the document s current page count 4 Inthe Items to adjust area enable any of the following check boxes Left margin Right margin Top margin Bottom margin Font size Line spacing 5 Click Make it fit Ds To make only a certain block of text fit select the text SY Changing the spacing between lines and paragraphs The space between lines the amount of white space that appears between the bottom of one line and the top of the next line is referred to as leading You can adjust the leading between lines and between paragraphs You can change the leading by changing the line spacing changing the line height to a fixed size and changing the space between paragraphs To adjust the leading 1 Click in a paragraph 2 Click Format gt Typesetting Word letter spacing 3 Enable the Adjust leading check box 4 Type a value in the Between lines box A positive value increases the leading a negative value decreases it To change the line spacing 1 Cl
113. the right and left margins All aligns text including the last line along both the right and left margins Xin Justification is applied to all text from the cursor location forward If you want to apply justification to a word line or paragraph you must first select the text gt lt You can also justify text by clicking the Justification picker on the property bar and clicking a justification 7 G Keeping TEXT TOGETHER To keep words together you can insert a hard space between them You can also prevent the first and last lines of a paragraph from being separated from the rest of the paragraph across a page break 66 WordPerfect 10 To keep words together 1 Click between two words 2 Click Format gt Line Other codes 3 Enable the Hard space HSpace option 4 Click Insert A Before inserting a hard space between two words you must remove any spaces between them To keep a paragraph together 1 Click at the beginning of a paragraph 2 Click Format gt Keep text together 3 In the Widow orphan area enable the Prevent the first and last lines of paragraphs from being separated across pages check box You can also Keep several lines of text together In the Conditional end of page area enable the Number of lines to keep together check box and type the number of lines you want to keep together including any blank lines Keep selected text from dividing between pages In the Block prot
114. to multiply 4 Click the Range picker in the Destination box and specify the destination cells Ne The number of columns in the first matrix must equal the number of rows in the second matrix To INVERT A MATRIX 1 Click Tools Numeric tools gt Invert 2 Click the Range picker he in the Source box and select the matrix cells to invert 3 Click the Range picker in the Destination box and select the upper left cell of the cells where you want to write the inverted matrix SS You can invert matrices of sizes up to 90 rows by 90 columns If you specify the same source cells as the destination cells the inverted matrix overwrites the existing matrix CREATING SCENARIOS Quattro Pro lets you create scenarios A scenario is a snapshot of a data model which is a set of formulas designed to simulate real life situations and conditions Scenarios show changing data 216 Quattro Pro 10 or variable values plugged into a model and the values that result For example a worst case scenario shows what you can expect from the least desirable set of variable values a best case scenario uses the most desirable values as input Scenarios are often used to find the optimum solution to a problem Before using scenarios you have to create a data model that includes formulas and supporting data To CREATE A SCENARIO Click Tools Scenario New Click the Range picker he in the Changing cells box and select the changing cells Click Nex
115. to size the datasheet Dragging inward reduces the size of the datasheet dragging outward increases it Adding and copying data in datasheets Entering and editing data in Corel Presentations 10 datasheets is similar to entering data in a spreadsheet application such as Quattro Pro The datasheet consists of cells in which you enter data These cells display in a series of rows and columns in the datasheet Working with datasheets 309 The following image shows what a datasheet looks like Lorem Ipsum EN You can also import spreadsheet data from files created in other applications into a data chart If you link the imported data to a chart any changes you make to the chart data in a spreadsheet application such as Quattro Pro are automatically updated in the Corel Presentations chart data every time you open the chart As well you can export a datasheet data To enter OR Edit data 1 Click a cell on a datasheet 2 Click Edit Edit cell 3 Type data in the Data box S PS You can also enter or edit data by typing directly in a cell To import spreadsheet data 1 Click a datasheet 2 Click Data gt Import 3 Choose Spreadsheet from the Data type list box 4 Enable any of the following check boxes e Transpose data switches data from columns to rows and rows to columns e Clear current data deletes all the data already in the datasheet Link to spreadsheet links the imported data to the data chart
116. we we 0 CorelCENTRAL Memos Creating 4g se ah Pee a PA Gt AL M Quitting x ce one pete nee ra AL memo categories starting o AD adding Memos 2 422 using BA pIE enic i ar apg AZ creating s o a e esa e 422 creating m ros card files a a a ANG categorizing a 422 cutting copying 422 memo text ee A creating s m OS ke ce Re oe Re ee OR oe Al creating categories 2 1 422 displaying contents 422 D findings e a a eA ae a Sy ADP DAD MOVING 4 ie oe oe Se Ge oe ge Se Ye 2422 starting CorelCENTRAL Alarms 423 pasting text e 6 a oe e an a 422 default A calendars 2 ee 410 411 searching 2 wee 4D deleting USI ye ee RO ee Oe oe ee AQT alarms er geo Bere aM a Bee a ae Le ADA WII ar A Ae ane oe PA ar a e 421 card files 2 ee 417 menu bar CorelCENTRAL eee 408 Mini calendar E selecting dates 0 411 editing USING AL a a AN alarms 424 Moving CorelCENTRALAlarms 424 MEMOLERES gt yros S tay o Se tae ps A22 events MEMOS oe oo ee oo de 422 scheduling 2 2 412 413 scheduling weekly 413 N Net2Phone F CorelCENTRAL Address Book gt 405 fields card file da ara i aa Oh o AT editing a a o ol Ae Sh lar aa a AO O linked 418 419 opening calendar databases 410 G card file templates
117. you might maintain a database with addresses of customers in different cities including information on customer sales The database effectively stores the information but does not allow you to analyze the data in a convenient or precise manner By building a CrossTab report you can analyze organize and summarize the data into a constantly updated report on area Sales The same database can also be analyzed to determine sales by salesperson for each product that the business sells Data does not have to be on the same spreadsheet of a notebook for you to create a CrossTab report You can connect two or more spreadsheets that contain data and produce a CrossTab report to summarize the data Planning and interpreting your data analysis Before you produce a CrossTab report from a data source like a database you must plan which data fields you want to analyze The CrossTab report feature analyzes data by using selected data fields as row or column labels and numeric data fields as the data being analyzed The fields in the row and column areas are used as selection criteria to determine which values from the database to include at intersections of the row and column field labels For example assume a database contains product sales information data In the CrossTab report place the field containing the names of the company s salespeople along the left of the spreadsheet rows and the field containing the products you sell along the top of the s
118. z test 213 analyzing CrossTab reports Bordar dy ARS A data De 213 233 234 accounting style data using CrossTab reports 233 lines 206 OLAP source data 234 Actions angle of rotation 203 redoing 195 angled text 203 reversing 194 appearance undoing 194 changing 203 adding text color 203 subtitles to charts 231 text size 203 titles to charts 231 application bar aligning Calc As You Go 188 center o 207 changing height 162 CrossTab report data fields 235 customizing 162 data 235 moving 162 footers 210 QuickSum 188 headers 210 using 161 horizontally 207 ATM font 203 horizontally across cells 207 Auto column 200 joined cells 203 Auto column row 201 labels 183 Auto row 201 left 207 Autoformat 201 right 207 automatic vertically 207 formatting 201 alignment averages characters 183 Calc As You Go 188 rotating 208 axis titles set default 207 adding to charts 232 analysis experts 214 analysis tools 213 advanced regression 213 B amortization schedule 213 bin cells 214 ANOVA one way 213 bold 203 204 ANOVA two way 213 border color 206 correlation 213 border type 206 covariance 213 borders descriptive statistics 213 adding cell 206 exponential smoothing 213 BrowseBy fourier 213 using 164 f test 213 Budget Expert 157 histogram 213 building Lo 283 mortgage refinancing 213 CrossTab reports 233 234 Index Quattro Pro 10 237 C noncontiguous 165 Paste special ari 1193 C
119. 08 Corel CENTRAL 10 Usin Corel CENTRAL Calendar CorelCENTRAL Calendar lets you plan your activities days weeks months or even years in advance With groupware functionality Corel CENTRAL Calendar also helps you facilitate communication in a corporate environment The default CorelCENTRAL Calendar is integrated with CorelCENTRAL Day Planner so tasks and events that you schedule in the default CorelCENTRAL Calendar can also be viewed in CorelCENTRAL Day Planner In this section you ll learn about e starting and quitting CorelCENTRAL Calendar using CorelCENTRAL Admin to create and open calendars e setting default calendars e selecting dates and times in a calendar e scheduling tasks in a calendar e scheduling events in a calendar STARTING ANd QuiTTING Corel CENTRAL Calendar There are several ways to start CorelCENTRAL Calendar You can start CorelCENTRAL Calendar from the Start menu and the Desktop Application Director DAD both located on the Windows taskbar You can also start CorelCENTRAL Calendar from the CorelCENTRAL Day Planner icon well When you start Corel CENTRAL Calendar for the first time CorelCENTRAL Admin also starts to guide you through the process of creating a new calendar on a Paradox database stored locally on your hard disk You can quit Corel CENTRAL Calendar from the Corel CENTRAL Calendar application window To start Corel CENTRAL Calendar 1 Click Start on the Windows taskbar 2 Click Programs
120. 1 rotating cell contents 106 Sas selecting 102 Ewe footers 54 selecting components 102 setting columns 104 headers i i setting rows l 104 records in data files 128 setting standard looks 109 vol me cuter setting the number of columns 104 Inserting lt 82 setting the number of rows 104 setting z pees skewing cells 106 splitting 105 W splitting cells 104 using 101 Web documents using QuickSelect 103 browsing the Web from WordPerfect 131 using Row Col indicators 103 building XML documents 133 text converting to GIF 132 changing highlight color 62 converting to JPEG 132 drop caps 62 creating 131 fitting to pages 68 69 previewing 131 publishing 131 Index WordPerfect 10 143 publishing active documents to PDF 132 publishing to HTML 131 publishingtoPDF 132 WordPerfect 10 getting started 2 ww 8D QUI N vna cr a wa ee ae AD Welcome tO 160 bn a ae ee ogee oe ge BS what s different 2 36 what snew 2 1 eB 144 Index WordPerfect 10 Quattro Pro 10 Table of contents Quattro Pro 10 Welcome to Quarrro Pro 10 E 149 What s new in Quattro Pro 10 O a A a a a 149 What s different in Quattro Pro 10 202a a aa a 150 Getting started i 177 Components of a notebook f 155 Working with Quattro Pro Experts ww 157 Working with toolbars 2 we 158 Working with t
121. 1111000 Office 2002 Copyright O 2001 COREL CORPORATION and COREL CORPORATION LIMITED All rights reserved For complete copyright information please refer to the About section in the Help menu of the software Book CONTENTS Sectio Sectio Sectio Sectio Sectio Sectio n l Introduction n 2 WordPerfect 10 N 2 Quattro Pro 10 n 4 Corel Presentations 10 n 7 Paradox 10 n 6 CorelCENTRAL 10 29 145 271 279 299 Section INrrROducTiON Table of CONTENTS Welcome to WordPerfect Office 2002 What s the purpose of this user guide 5 About Corel Corporation 7 WordPerfect Office 2002 EE 7 What s new in WordPerfect Office 2002 9 Other WordPerfect Office 2002 applications and utilities 10 Installing WordPerfect Office 2002 17 Setting up WordPerfect Office 2002 16 Registering WordPerfect Office 2002 17 Adding deleting and updating WordPerfect Office 2002 components 17 Upgrading from Corel WordPerfect Suite 18 Questions and answers about installing 18 Starting and closing WordPerfect Office 2002 ERIR 19 Network installations 19 Learning how to use WordPerfect Office 2002 21 Using online Help 21 PerfectExpert 22 We want your feedback 23 Other sources for learning WordPerfect Office 2002 24 Corel support and SERVICES 2 Registering Corel products 25 Technical support 25 Self serve technical support options 25 Telephone technical support options 26 Customer Service
122. 17 317 317 261 261 301 325 325 299 283 WMA WMA support WordPerfect sending slide shows working with bitmapped images bulleted lists organization charts subtitles text in slide shows and drawings titles Z zooming bitmapped images 257 257 327 295 277 315 281 273 281 297 338 Index Corel Presentations 10 Paradox 10 Table of Contents Paradox 10 Welcome to Paradox 10 245 What s new in Paradox 10 343 Introduction to relational databases 344 Database terminology 345 Exploring Paradox 747 The desktop 347 The Welcome screen 349 Planning your database 371 Working with tables and records 375 Creating a table structure 353 Saving tables 355 Setting validity checks 355 Establishing a secondary index 356 Creating a lookup table 356 Creating Passwords 357 Establishing referential integrity 358 Navigating between records 359 Adding editing and deleting records 359 Locating records p ugs oN 360 Adding and deleting table field 361 Resizing table rows and columns 361 Working with forms 3065 Creating a form 363 Creating a data model 364 Adding objects to a form 366 Moving or deleting objects 367 Changing the color of objects 367 Using forms to add edit or delete records 368 Printing a form 369 Working with reports 31 Creating a report 371 Table of contents Paradox 10 341 Creating mailing labels Adding text and graphics to reports Moving or
123. 2 do I need TO RUN The Setup application again No WordPerfect Office 2002 detects your mail system when you start one of the applications not when you install so the order in which you install the applications does not matter Starting and closing WordPerfect Office 2002 applications After you have installed WordPerfect Office 2002 you re ready to start using the applications and utilities To start a WordPerfect Office 2002 application From the Windows taskbar click Start WordPerfect Office 2002 and click the application you want To start a WordPerfect Office 2002 utility From the Windows taskbar click Start WordPerfect Office 2002 gt Utilities and click the utility you want To close a WordPerfect Office 2002 application e Click File gt Exit Network installations WordPerfect Office 2002 includes the Network Administrator Setup wizard Using this wizard Information Technology IT managers and system administrators can deploy WordPerfect Office 2002 to multiple workstations or set up WordPerfect Office 2002 so that it can run from a server The WordPerfect Office 2002 Network Administrator Guide is in PDF format on the CD It can provide more information about network installations To use the Network Administrator Setup wizard Insert the WordPerfect Office 2002 CD into the CD ROM drive If the WordPerfect Office 2002 Setup screen displays click Exit 2 From the Windows taskbar click the Start
124. 200 GOHOME i gana ge ee Be eg Ce ee 199 reSIZINS es ces he ee we a Boe ee 198 restoring column s 200 wildcards notebook links 2 228 windows arranging o 78 displaying eee 178 hiding si be ei gS TeSIZING oS Se ee oR Se ee ok Oe ee TD selecting an dja oa Pp ae a Pyle x ANTS splitting notebook 173 WOrd Wrap 4 e a Se a 1202 WordPerfect characters 2 2 we 182 wrapping over multiple rows and columns 203 short text e a ra 203 A 1 Z zeros displaying 0a eee 2009 hiding 2 208 209 zooming dafa koh ob Mob Boh ohn et So Se of RS Index Quattro Pro 10 249 Section 4 Corel Presentations 10 Table of contents Corel Presentations 10 Welcome to Corel Presentations 10 271 What s new in Corel Presentations 10 257 What s different in Corel Presentations 10 259 Creating slide shows and drawings 261 Using slide show views 261 Opening new slide shows 262 Saving slide shows 262 Working with the Slide Outline 262 Adding and removing slides 263 Working with the Slide Sorter 263 Creating portable slide shows 265 Creating and saving drawings 265 Setting up rulers Grids and quidelines 267 Setting up rulers 267 Setting up gridlines 267 Setting up alignment guides 267 Working with the Master Gallery 269 Applying masters to slides ee ak 269 Applying backgrounds and layouts to slides 270 Creat
125. 28 selecting rows 103 spacing selecting tables 103 changing between lines 69 rotating changing between paragraphs 69 70 gradient fills 2 118 119 lines 69 images 99 Spell As You Go table cell contents 106 disabling 86 enabling 86 spelling S correcting TE 85 saving correcting words automatically 87 document changes 42 splitting documents pe 42 columns 105 documents for the first time 42 QuickSplit Column 105 documents to new locations 42 QuickSplit Columns and Rows 105 documents with new names 42 QuickSplit Row 105 graphics 91 TOWS a 105 merge output 126 table cells 104 105 Scrapbook stretching inserting clipart 92 graphics 94 selecting suppressing columns 103 footers 55 data for merge 128 headers 55 records for merge 128 page numbers 83 rows 103 table cells 103 table columns 103 T table components 102 103 table cells table rows ae es es ek ee ee 103 changing fills 108 tables a ce wo woso n a 102 103 changing line styles 108 setting deleting contents 105 chapter numbers 82 83 fills se OE Le 108 merge conditions 128 129 ignoring during calculations 111 number of columns ina table 104 joining 104 number of rows in a table 104 line color 108 page numbers 82 line styles 108 standard looks for tables 109 rotating contents 106 volume numbers 83 skewing 106 Shadow Cursor splitting 105 inserting images
126. 3 stretching formatting text 274 objects 284 TextArt structure inserting 273 changing organization chart branches 318 time delays styles applying to slides 289 saving organization charts 316 titles subordinate bulleted levels changing font outlines 282 changing spacing 279 changing line spacing 282 subordinate positions formatting appearance 281 adding to organization charts 317 working with 281 Index Corel Presentations 10 337 trace contour effect tracks adding parts to slides adding to slides transforming polylines into circles transitions applying to slides turning off slides transparent colors selecting for bitmapped images turning off slide transitions U underlining text unique colors applying in bitmapped images copying in bitmapped images using formulas in datasheets masters in Master Gallery number fills in datasheets QuickPlay to play slide shows slide show views special effects the Slide Outliner the Slide Sorter V VBA E version control viewing datasheets e entire organization charts organization charts selected branches views switching between in slide shows using in slide shows W Wave sound files inserting into slides Web EE Web documents publishing wind effect windows selecting all objects 299 302 302 291 264 265 299 265 274 298 298 312 270 312 290 261 299 262 263 259 259 309 3
127. 310 299 318 310 303 322 312 257 284 298 292 274 257 257 278 282 274 274 259 257 372 Index Corel Presentations 10 formatting applying effects to objects 285 appearance of titles and subtitles 281 importing bulleted lists 278 spreadsheet data to datasheets 310 text in text objects 274 indenting formulas text 275 adding to datasheet columns 312 inserting adding to datasheet rows 312 MIDI sound files into slides 301 using in datasheets 312 rows and columns in datasheets 311 frames text boxes 273 sizing around bitmapped images 297 text lines 273 freehand shapes TextArt Ae 273 drawing 291 Wave sound files into slides 301 Internet 325 italics G applying to text 274 GIF 257 glyphs using to size shapes 293 J gridlines justification displaying 267 changing bulleted lists 278 hiding 267 justifying setting up 267 text 275 grids setting up 267 guidelines L setting up 267 labels guides adding to data charts 307 creating alignment 268 layouts displaying alignment 268 applying to slides 270 hiding alignment 268 creating for slide shows 270 setting up alignment 267 deleting slide shows 325 previewing slide shows 325 levels H moving up bulleted list items 278 handouts line charts 305 printing 322 line shapes hiding drawing 291 alignment guides 268 line spacing datasheets 309 changing in bulleted lists 279 gridlines 267 changing in titles and subtitles 282
128. 4 164 242 Index Quattro Pro 10 displaying 211 L viewing 211 labels math aligning A 183 simple 187 changing from values 183 simple equations 187 creating 183 mathematical signs 187 text reformat 202 matrices wrapping 202 multiplying 215 216 language matrix international settings 170 173 inverting 215 LICS multiplying 216 international settings 173 menus linear model 215 changes 150 linear relationship 215 File 150 lines Format 152 adding grand total 206 Help 153 adding total 206 Tools 152 double 206 View 151 single 206 mode total 204 edit te 92 linking group 195 196 cells to footers 211 insert 192 cells to headers 211 overtype 192 copied cells 198 typeover e 192 hyperlinks 229 Model copy 197 198 notebook links 227 moving OLE 225 cells 196 198 links columns and rows 198 DDE 225 multidimensional 234 hyperlinks 229 databases 234 notebook 227 multiple spreadsheets OLE TA 223 CrossTab reports 234 pasting 228 229 totaling cells 189 resizing OLE 227 multiplying wildcards 228 two matrices 216 list add to format 202 predesigned format 202 N locked titles 165 named cells 163 creating 165 naming locking CrossTab reports 235 cells 192 groups 195 graphics 192 spreadsheet groups 195 196 objects 192 navigating Control Menu 163 Go To 163 M keyboard shortcuts 163 macros notebooks 163 playing from toolbars 161 Objects sheet 163 settings 170 ro
129. 4 Choose a transition effect from the Effects list 5 Choose a transition direction from the Direction list 6 Inthe Speed area enable one of the following options e Fast e Medium e Slow If you want to apply the slide transition to an entire slide show enable the Apply to all slides in slide show check box You can also Show only transitions with Flash format Enable the Show only Flash enabled transitions check box Apply sound to the slide transition Type a file path and filename in the Sound box and move the slider to adjust the volume of the sound Qs If you want to apply a slide transition to a range of slides hold down SHIFT and click SW the first and last slide in the range If you want to apply a slide transition to multiple slides not in consecutive order hold down CTRL and click the slides you want To turn off a slide TRANSITION 1 Click a slide 2 Click Format gt Slide properties gt Transition 3 Click the Transitions tab 4 Choose Immediate from the Effects list Creating portable slide shows You can create a self executing version of a slide show that can be played on any computer that uses the Windows operating system even if it doesn t have Corel Presentations installed The slide show files and the Corel Presentations application files necessary to run the slide show are copied to the disk on which you create the portable slide show To create a portable slide show 1 Click File
130. 7 Z You can also color code a spreadsheet tab by right clicking a spreadsheet tab and SW clicking Sheet properties To add a border to cells 1 Select the cells to which you want to add a border 2 Click Format gt Selection properties 3 Click the Border tab 4 Inthe Border properties area open the Type picker and click a border type 5 Open the Color picker and click a color 6 Click one of the following buttons All applies the borders to all the grid lines of the cell selection e Outline applies the borders to only the exterior grid lines of the cell selection e Inside applies the borders to only the interior grid lines of the cell selection e Verticals applies the border to only the vertical gridlines of the cell selection e Horizontals applies the border to only the horizontal gridlines of the cell selection ao You can use the sample box to indicate where to draw lines on selected cells You can remove lines in a border by clicking a line opening the Type picker in the SAN Border properties area and clicking No line SS You can also clear all segments of a selection by clicking Clear selection To add a line for totals and qrand totals 1 Select the cells to which you want to add lines 2 Click Format gt Selection properties 3 Click the Cell font tab 4 In the Accounting style area enable one of the following options Single line Double line Aligning data You can align data hor
131. 8 deleting 169 properties 204 dragging cells 196 rotating 203 editing 191 strikeout 203 formatting 191 subscript 203 grouping 195 196 superscript 203 hiding zeros on 209 typing 183 inserting 169 underlining 203 moving 169 wrapping 202 moving cells to new 197 text color 203 naming 170 text files navigating 163 adjusting column format 225 protecting 191 adjusting column width 225 selecting 165 adjusting row format fz bi fe 225 setting number of 182 importing 222 223 Index Quarrro Pro 10 247 parsing QuickColumns bm sige QuickColumns importing text files text font changing text orientation Text Reformat text style changing time international settings time formats times entering formatting in footers in headers E international settings titles across cells adding to charts charts locking minimized toolbar buttons toolbars creating customizing deleting displaying editing graphics launching programs moving playing macros renaming resetting text on buttons types tools CrossTab QuickFormat SpeedFormats Tools menu total lines totaling cells columns grand totals in columns rows subtotals subtotals in columns values in columns 221 222 223 225 204 206 202 204 170 208 184 185 209 210 210 173 203 232 231 165 163 158 159 159 160 159 159 160 161 159 161 160 160 161 158 233 201 201 a 152 204 206
132. AL work area 408 Using CorelCENTRAL Calendar 409 Starting and quitting CorelCENTRAL Calendar 409 Using CorelCENTRAL Admin to create and open calendars 409 Setting default calendars 410 Selecting dates and times in a calendar 411 Scheduling tasks in a calendar 411 Scheduling events in a calendar 412 Using Corel CENTRAL Card File 417 Starting CorelCENTRAL Card File for the first time 415 Creating card files 416 Using fields to organize card file data 417 Creating linked fields 418 Using CorelCENTRAL Memos i 421 Starting and quitting CorelCENTRAL Memo 421 Working with memos 421 Categorizing memos 422 Using Corel CENTRAL Alarms 423 Starting CorelCENTRAL Alarms 423 Setting alarms 423 Editing and deleting alarms 424 HorSyncinq com PalmPilot and Corel CENTRAL 427 Table of contents Corel CENTRAL 10 401 Welcome TO Corel CENTRAL 10 CorelCENTRAL 10 is a suite of applications that help you manage time tasks appointments and email and facilitate communication in a corporate environment You can use CorelCENTRAL to plan your everyday schedule write reminders to yourself organize reference information send and receive email messages and manage business contact information The applications in Corel CENTRAL are Corel CENTRAL Day Planner Corel CENTRAL Calendar Corel CENTRAL Card File CorelCENTRAL Memos Corel CENTRAL Alarms CorelCENTRAL Address Book and Corel CENTRAL Mail Corel CENTRAL Day Planner CorelCENTRAL Day Planner
133. Bitmap bmp Joint Photographic Experts Groups jpg CompuServe GIF gif Windows Metafile wmf and more ObjectPAL methods also allow for the exporting of graphics to a variety of formats Welcome To Paradox 10 343 Reports can now be published interactively and through ObjectPAL to many different file formats including WordPerfect 6 and later Microsoft Word 95 97 and 2000 HTML Rich Text Format and plain text HotKey assignment mechanism Allows the easy creation of hotkeys without the need for an ObjectPAL based solution String lists The addition of string lists allows translatable strings for all UI Objects and ObjectPAL to be stored in an external text file which is loaded when the associated form or report is run This allows for a created application to be translated quickly and easily Accessibility Corel is committed to supporting the special needs community We are a proud supporter of accessible software that promotes quality of life employability and independence for disabled persons Corel Paradox is now accessible to users with disabilities and includes information in the Help about how to make the application suit individual needs For more information about making Corel Paradox accessible see Using Accessibility features in the online Help Introduction To Relational databases In a database data is stored in fields with one data item in each field All fields pertaining to one subject are refe
134. CENTRAL includes the following components CorelCENTRAL Day Planner CorelCENTRAL Calendar CorelCENTRAL Memos CorelCENTRAL Card File and CorelCENTRAL Address Book Now CorelCENTRAL comes with its very own email client CorelCENTRAL Mail offering you multiple mailboxes and email security that are integrated directly into CorelCENTRAL For more information about new features included in CorelCENTRAL 10 refer to the What s new section of the online Help file Paradox 10 Paradox 10 is a powerful and easy to use relational database program that helps you organize track and retrieve data You can also create sophisticated forms charts and reports to display data You can run Paradox as a standalone system on a single computer or as a multiuser system on a network Paradox contains Experts that guide you through the process of creating tables forms reports charts mailing lists and queries If you prefer you can create these objects on your own Enhanced table and report publishing capabilities make it easy for you to share your data over the World Wide Web Paradox 10 uses HTML and CSS when publishing reports to the World 8 Introduction Wide Web ensuring more accurate reporting In addition Paradox 10 contains enhancements to developer features new graphics filters and new document filters Paradox also features ObjectPAL an object based event driven development language that you can use to create customized datab
135. CENTRAL is a suite of applications that you can use to effectively plan your everyday schedule write reminders to yourself organize reference information send and receive email messages and manage all of your personal and business contact information This section will introduce you to the concepts necessary to use the CorelCENTRAL applications In this section you ll learn about e starting and quitting CorelCENTRAL e exploring the CorelCENTRAL work area STARTING ANd QuiTTING Corel CENTRAL There are several ways to start CorelCENTRAL You can start Corel CENTRAL from the Start button and the Desktop Application Director DAD located on the Windows taskbar When you start CorelCENTRAL Corel CENTRAL Day Planner loads by default From the icon well in CorelCENTRAL Day Planner you can start CorelCENTRAL Address Book Corel CENTRAL Calendar CorelCENTRAL Card File Corel CENTRAL Mail and Corel CENTRAL Memos In fact you can start any CorelCENTRAL application from within another You can quit Corel CENTRAL from whichever CorelCENTRAL application that you are using To start a Corel CENTRAL application from the Windows START MENU 1 Click Start on the Windows taskbar 2 Click Programs WordPerfect Office 2002 CorelCENTRAL Applications and click one of the following e CorelCENTRAL Address Book e CorelCENTRAL Alarms e CorelCENTRAL Calendar e CorelCENTRAL Card File CorelCENTRAL Day Planner e CorelCENTRAL Mail e CorelCEN
136. E on the property bar lets you split a cell into four cells columns and rows The Shadow Cursor now works in table cells You have more flexibility in selecting text with your mouse or keyboard From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Corel Corporation Using WordPerfect documentation Documentation conventions Online Help Printing online Help topics Corel Web site PerfectExpert Application information System information Corel Corporation WordPerfect documentation documentation conventions online Help online Help topics Corel Web site PerfectExpert application information system information Welcome to WordPerfect 10 31 Working with documents This chapter tells you how to perform basic operations in WordPerfect In this section you ll learn about e understanding the components of a document e creating documents e opening documents e adding the date and time to a document e saving a document e printing a document e closing documents and quitting WordPerfect Understanding the components of A document A WordPerfect document is a file with a filename extension Each document consists of one or more of the following components Text Text can be typed directly into WordPerfect or imported from text editors or other word processing applications For more information about adding text to a document see Entering or inserting text in the on
137. Enable one of the following options Header A Header B e Footer A e Footer B 3 Click Insert gt Line and click one of the following Horizontal line e Vertical line iD lt You can also add a graphics line to a header or footer by clicking the Horizontal line NW button on the property bar To insert The filename of The active document into A header OR Footer 1 Click Insert Header footer 2 Enable one of the following options e Header A e Header B e Footer A e Footer B 3 Click Insert Other Filename Ne If you rename the document the filename within the header or footer updates oe automatically Ds If you want to insert the path and filename click Insert Other gt Path and filename SN To insert The date and time into A header or Footer 1 Click Insert Header footer 2 Enable one of the following options e Header A e Header B 56 WordPerfect 10 e Footer A Footer B 3 Click Insert gt Date time 4 Choose a date and time format from the Date time formats list 5 Click Insert To insert numbering into A header or footer 1 Click Insert Header footer 2 Enable one of the following options e Header A e Header B e Footer A e Footer B 3 Click Format gt Page gt Insert page number 4 Choose a page numbering format from the Number list 5 Click Insert PS You can also insert page numbers in headers or footers by clicking the Page numbering button on the Page toolba
138. Expert lets you create and display groups of scenarios data conditions and results based on models in your notebook e What If Expert lets you create tables that show the effect of changing one or two variable cells referenced in a formula To access an Expert from a toolbar 1 Right click a toolbar and click Experts and numeric tools 2 From the Experts and numeric tools toolbar click the Expert you wish to use Ds You can position the cursor over a toolbar button to see a description of a particular S N Expert To access an Expert From A MENU Follow the menu path in the table below to access a particular Expert To use Click Analysis Expert Tools Numeric tools Analysis tools Budget Expert Tools Numeric tools Budget Chart Expert Insert Chart Consolidate Expert Tools Consolidate New Getting started 177 To use Click Database Expert Insert External data Expert Map Expert Insert gt Graphics Map Scenario Expert Tools Scenario New What If Expert Tools Numeric tools What If tables Working with toolbars Toolbars give you quick access to the features you frequently use You can create your own toolbars from a wide assortment of toolbar buttons Quattro Pro creates a personal toolbar to which you can drag or copy toolbar buttons You can edit a toolbar to display the buttons you want and in the order you want them Because of the enhanced toolbar functionality in Q
139. Go box is red the word may be misspelled If the text is blue there may be a grammar or usage error If the text is black you can choose a synonym to replace the word If the box is blank there are no suggestions for the word Editing documents 87 To enable or disable Spell As You Go Grammar As You Go and Prompt As You Go To Do the following Enable or disable Spell As You Go Click Tools Proofread Spell As You Go A bullet next to the Spell AsYou Go command indicates that Spell As You Go is enabled A bullet next to the Off command indicates that Spell As You Go is disabled Enable Grammar As You Go Click Tools Proofread Grammar As You Go A bullet next to the Grammar As You Go command indicates that Grammar As You Go is enabled Disable Grammar As You Go Click Tools gt Proofread Off A bullet next to the Off command indicates that Spell As You Go and Grammar As You Go are disabled Enable or disable Prompt As You Go Click Tools Proofread gt Prompt As You Go A check mark next to the Prompt As You Go command indicates that Prompt As You Go is enabled If Grammar As You Go is enabled Spell As You Go is also enabled even though there is no dot next to Spell As You Go Enabling or disabling Grammar As You Go or Spell As You Go does not affect Prompt As You Go By default Spell As You Go is enabled To use Spell As You Go or Prompt As You Go e Right click a word underlined in red o
140. If you want to create a data table file enable the Format records in a table check box 5 Click Add Click any of the following to organize a selected field Replace replaces the name of the selected field Delete deletes the selected field e Move up moves the selected field up in the Fields used in merge list e Move down moves the selected field down in the Fields used in merge list 7 Click OK In the Create or edit data in record area type the data for each record 9 Click Close and click Yes You can also Number the fields in an empty data file Click OK in the Create data file dialog box Specify the number of fields in the Number of fields in each record box yz To add a line to a field press CTRL ENTER PS SN Press TAB to move to the next field Working with form documents FOR A MERGE A form document provides the pattern and layout for a merged document It can contain text formatting graphics and merge commands You create form documents the same way you create regular documents however instead of typing specific information you insert a command which can be replaced by information from a data source when you perform the merge For more information about inserting merge commands see Using merge commands in the online Help The following image shows a form document containing 1 FIELD codes where the name and address of the recipient are inserted and 2 text for a letter Mergin
141. L and PalmPilot applications Corel CENTRAL 3Com PalmPilot CorelCENTRAL Calendar and CorelCENTRAL Day Date Book Planner CorelCENTRAL Address Book Address Book CorelCENTRAL Memos Memo Pad CorelCENTRAL Calendar and CorelCENTRAL Day To Do List Planner For information about installing 3Com PalmPilot Desktop software see the manufacturer s manual Using 3Com PalmPilot with CorelCENTRAL Address Book You can only HotSync the default Corel CENTRAL Address Book with PalmPilot If you want to HotSync an address book you must first set it as the default address book HorSyncinq com PalmPilor and Corel CENTRAL 425 PalmPilot does not recognize CorelCENTRAL Address Book group resource or organization entries Also only the Mailing address segment of a Corel CENTRAL Address Book address entry transfers to PalmPilot when you HotSync PalmPilot stores only three phone numbers so you can only HotSync that many phone numbers from CorelCENTRAL Address Book The following table lists corresponding CorelCENTRAL Address Book and PalmPilot fields CorelCENTRAL Address Book field PalmPilot field Last name Last name First name First name Job title Title Organization Company Home phone Home Work phone Work Fax Fax Cellular phone Mobile Pager number Pager Email Email Using 3Com PalmPilot with Citrix To use 3Com PalmPilot from Windows Terminal Server running Citrix MetaFrame application server software you must first install
142. L functionality that was available in Corel WordPerfect 9 is available in WordPerfect 10 For information about working with SGML and XML documents see Working with SGML and XML in the WordPerfect online Help From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Saving documents as PDF files PDF files Working with fonts in PDF files PDF files working with fonts Editing PDF files PDF files editing Optimizing PDF files PDF files optimizing Using hyperlinks hyperlinks Publishing Web documents 133 Index WordPerfect 10 A table formulas 110 adding calculations capitalization exceptions automatically 68 ignoring table cells 111 drop caps 63 capitalization values in a table 111 automatically correcting 68 adjusting changing 67 leading 69 correcting 67 table column widths 107 correcting after periods 68 aligning listing exceptions 68 objects 96 capitalization exceptions applying automatically adding 68 borders to tables 109 listing exceptions 68 color to tables 108 removing 68 fills 118 caps lock capitalization fills to tables 108 automatically correcting 68 lines to tables 108 CD graphics arranging inserting 92 graphics 94 changing associating capitalization 67 form documents with data sources 126 drop cap colors 64 drop cap fonts 64 drop cap positions 64 B drop cap sizes 63 binding 48 49 drop cap styles 64 borders endnote location 75 adding 115 endnotes number
143. Layout tab 3 In the Two sided printing area enable one of the following options Book side to side lets you print the document for binding the long edge of a page Tablet top to bottom lets you print the document for binding the short edge of a page Choosing a document layout for binding You can give a document extra space for binding by choosing a particular document layout You can also divide pages to create a book or tablet layout because a document contains physical and logical pages A physical page displays on the screen a logical page exists within the physical page When you modify a feature such as margins for binding you are modifying the logical page You can also divide the physical page into smaller logical pages to create small foldable documents such as tickets or greeting cards For information about printing folded and bound documents see Printing booklets and defining binding offsets in the online Help 48 WordPerfect 10 As you edit the document each logical page is treated as a separate page The document window also changes to show the dimensions of the logical page After you fill a logical page the text continues on the next logical page All the formatting you can use in a regular document applies to the logical pages you create To choose a document layout for binding 1 Click File Page setup 2 Click the Page setup tab 3 In the Margins area type margin values in the followin
144. NTATIONS Extensive printing options designed for both desktop and commercial printing are available in Corel Presentations 10 In this section you ll learn about e printing slide shows and drawings Printing slide shows and drawings Before printing a slide show or drawing you can preview the job to see how it will look when printed You can print an entire slide show or drawing a range of slides or pages a specific slide or page or selected objects on a slide or page You can also print handouts speaker notes and audience notes If you print to a file on a disk rather than to a printer you can print the file from a computer even if Corel Presentations is not installed on the computer The following illustration shows 1 how you can use speaker notes as cue cards and 2 how you can use audience notes to create handouts Ej Ea l To preview a print job 1 Click File gt Print 2 Click Preview If you are printing a slide show click the preview window to view each slide consecutively y za The preview window closes automatically when you click the drawing or the last slide in the slide show Printing in Corel Presentations 321 PS You can also close the preview window by pressing ESC You can also preview a print job by clicking the Mini preview button El in the Print dialog box To print a slide show or drawing 1 Click File Print 2 Click the Main tab 3 In the Destination area choose a printer from th
145. Open gt Table Choose the drive and folder where the table is stored Double click a table Click Record gt Locate gt Field From the Fields list choose the field name you want to find To locate A Record 1 2 3 4 5 Click File Open gt Table Choose the drive and folder where the table is stored Double click a table Click Record gt Locate Record number Type the record number in the Locate record number box To locate A value nau FWN Click File Open gt Table Choose the drive and folder where the table is stored Double click a table Click Record gt Locate gt Value From the Field list box choose the field under which you want to search In the Value box type the value you want to find 360 Paradox 10 To replace a field value Click File Open Table Choose the drive and folder where the table is stored Double click a table Click View Edit data Click Record Locate Replace From the Field list box choose the field you want to search In the Value box type the value you want to search for o N AU FWN Type the new value in the Replace with box Adding and deleting table fields You can add or delete fields in your tables after you have created them To add a field 1 Click Tools gt Utilities Restructure 2 Choose the drive and folder where the table is stored 3 Double click a table 4 Click the first blank row in the Field Name column
146. Perfect Office 2002 gt Setup and notes gt Corel Remove Program 3 Click the Next button and follow the installation instructions in the Corel Uninstaller Welcome to WordPerfect Office 2002 17 To update a WordPerfect Office 2002 installation I Close any open WordPerfect Office 2002 applications 2 On the Windows taskbar click Start WordPerfect Office 2002 gt Setup and notes gt WordPerfect Office 2002 Setup 3 Enable the Update Current Installation button 4 Click the Next button Click the Install button Upgrading From Corel WordPerfect Suite WordPerfect Office 2002 can co exist with earlier versions of WordPerfect Office applications for example WordPerfect Office 2000 or Corel WordPerfect Suite 8 providing you have enough disk space The WordPerfect Office 2002 Setup application does not replace earlier versions of these applications If you don t plan to use earlier versions of the applications you can remove them from your hard drive to free up drive space To delere WordPerfect Office 2000 I Close any open applications 2 On the Windows taskbar click Start WordPerfect Office 2002 gt Setup and notes gt Corel Remove Program Click the Next button Click the Select All button Enable the Remove Modified Files check box anu bh W Click the Next button and follow the installation instructions in the Corel Remove wizard Questions and answers About installing The following list answers some
147. Printing keyboard lists Selecting sections Tables to text Lets you align and distribute objects in relation to themselves and the page When you save a document for the first time or save as a new file WordPerfect automatically inserts a suggested filename Lets you add an indicator in the margin of a document to notify the author that the text has changed Lets you convert WordPerfect documents for use on the World Wide Web by using the increased flexibility and advanced page layout and formatting of CSS support Lets you print a copy of the keyboard shortcuts You can export the list to a file and you can also customize the list Lets you select pages secondary pages chapters and volumes Lets you convert a table to delimited text Welcome to WordPerfect 10 37 Feature Text to tables Toolbar and property bar pickers Two page view Variables Zoom tool What it does Lets you convert document text to a tabular format based on a user specified delimiter Lets you choose an option for underlining undoing or redoing adding drop caps and other formatting options Supports Reveal codes and writing tools Lets you insert a variable placeholder into a document and change the contents later updating all instances of the variable Lets you magnify certain areas of a document What s different in WordPerfect 10 With every new version of WordPerfect certain items are enhanced othe
148. S You can also change the fonts colors and grid style in your table See Working with table fields and properties in the online Help From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Creating a table structure databases planning Validity checks validity checks applying Secondary indexes secondary index defining Lookup tables lookup tables creating Password security passwords attaching to a field Referential integrity referential integrity defining Editing table data editing table data 362 Paradox 10 Working with forms Forms are database objects that provide you with an efficient way of viewing adding and editing records in your tables A form looks something like an application dialog box It has fields that contain data stored in tables and buttons that let you navigate between records Forms can be designed to view one record at a time or groups of records You can also design a form to view and edit data in two or more linked tables If you want your form to view data from more than one table you must create a data model first A data model is a graphical representation of your tables and the way that they are linked There are three different views or modes in which you can work with a form e Form Design provides all the tools you need to create a form e View Data lets you see your data e Edit Data lets you view and make changes to your data Creating A form Once you know what i
149. Show On The Go 2 Click Create Creating and saving drawings Corel Presentations drawings can contain data charts bitmapped images clipart and drawn objects Drawings unlike Corel Presentations slide shows cannot contain transitions animations sound files or movie files Creating slide shows and drawings 267 You can save Corel Presentations drawings in various file formats such as a WordPerfect graphic Windows bitmap JPG and GIF This allows you to use the drawings you create in other applications such as WordPerfect documents or in Web pages To CREATE A dRAWING 1 Click File New from project Click the Create new tab Choose Corel Presentations drawing from the list 2 3 Choose Corel Presentations 10 from the list box 4 5 Click Create To save a drawing for the First time 1 Click File Save Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the file 2 3 Type a filename in the Filename box 4 Choose a graphic file format from the File type list box 5 Click Save From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Viewing slide shows slide shows viewing Assigning and deleting SpeedKeys SpeedKeys assigning Adding document summary information document summary information adding to drawings and slide shows 266 Corel Presentations 10 SETTING UP rulers Grids and Guidelines You can use several visual aids such as rulers gridlines alignment guides a
150. TRAL Memos To start a CoreLCENTRAL application from CoreLCENTRAL Day Planner Click one of the following buttons in the CorelCENTRAL Day Planner icon well Z CorelCENTRAL Address Book EJ CorelCENTRAL Calendar Getting started with Corel CENTRAL 407 2 CorelCENTRAL Card File E CorelCENTRAL Memos EY CorelCENTRAL Mail You can also Start CorelCENTRAL from the Desktop Application Click the CorelCENTRAL 10 icon on the Windows Director DAD taskbar Start an application from within any other Click Tools and click an application CorelCENTRAL application To ouvir Corel CENTRAL e Click File gt Exit Exploring the Corel CENTRAL work area The work areas in CorelCENTRAL applications include everything you see on your screen when you start each application Most of the CorelCENTRAL applications include a title bar menu bar status bar and tool bar CorelCENTRAL Day Planner includes an icon well You can display or hide the tool bar and status bar To display or hide the toolbar e Click View Toolbar A check mark beside Toolbar indicates that the command is enabled To display or hide the status bar e Click View gt Status bar A check mark beside Status bar indicates that the command is enabled From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Using the Corel Desktop Application Director desktop application director The Corel Application Recovery Manager CARM using 4
151. The options show the punctuation marks used to mark thousands and the decimal place followed by the punctuation mark used to separate arguments in spreadsheet functions and macros a1 a2 The last four options specify that a blank space separates thousands in numbers To change available date Formats Click Tools gt Settings Click International Enable the Date format option PWN Select a date format option To change available time Formats Click Tools gt Settings Click International Enable the Time format option PWN Select a time format option To convert LICS characters _ Click Tools gt Settings 2 Click International 3 Enable the LICS check box NT Lotus International Character Set LICS characters are identical to the standard ANSI set except for the range 128 through 255 which is usually used for international and graphics characters For more information about LICS characters see your Lotus 1 2 3 documentation When you save the notebook these characters are converted back to the LICS equivalents To chanqe the defaulr lanquaqe 1 Click Tools gt Settings 2 Click International 3 Enable the Language option 4 Enable one of the following options Suite default specifies the default language of all suite applications e Quattro Pro specifies a different language for only Quattro Pro Displaying ARRANGING resizing ANd hiding windows A Quattro Pro window displays a Qu
152. a document 2 Click Tools Language gt Hyphenation 3 Type a value in the Percent left box 4 Type a value in the Percent right box A If hyphenation is enabled before you change the hyphenation zone percentages you may be prompted to rehyphenate some words in the active document To insert a Nonbreaking hyphen Press CTRL hyphen 70 WordPerfect 10 Setting hyphenation prompts and notifications Setting a prompt for hyphenation lets you choose whether to be prompted when a word needs hyphenation You can also set a notification sound when a word needs hyphenation To set a prompt for hyphenation 1 Click Tools gt Settings 2 Click the Environment icon 3 In the Environment settings dialog box click the Prompts tab 4 Inthe Prompt area choose one of the following settings from the On hyphenation list box e Always displays a prompt every time a word is hyphenated e Never never displays a prompt when a word is hyphenated e When required displays a prompt when a word must be hyphenated but is not found in the main word list 5 Click OK Click Close zo Prompting when required is enabled by default Xx Changing hyphen options and position You can choose how words are hyphenated Words can be separated with a hyphen space or soft return You can also ignore the hyphenation prompt and let the word wrap to the next line You can change the position of hyphens in words Hyphenation options are a
153. a table Click Table Format Click the Skew tab Choose the cells you want skewed from the Skew settings list Click More From the Skew rows list box choose one of the following au WN 106 WordPerfect 10 e None lets you leave the top row unskewed e Top lets you specify the skew angle for the top row 7 From the Skew columns list box choose one of the following e None lets you leave the columns unskewed Left column lets you specify the skew angle for the left column Right column lets you specify the skew angle for the right column You can also Create a 90 degree angle with the first column and Enable the Square first column check box the top row Create a 90 degree angle with the last column and Enable the Square last column check box the top row Join the edge of the first or last column with the Enable the Join corners check box top row Modify the skew angle of the top row left column Type a skew angle in the appropriate Angle box or right column The Square first column and Square last column check boxes are available only if the top row is skewed The Join corners check box is available only if the left or right column is skewed Q Wn Xe You may need to increase the row height of a skewed row to accommodate the text For information about changing the height of a row see To change the height of a table row in the online Help Ds To prevent text from slanting
154. able settings if you do not want to show the table formula indicators To enter A formula in a table 1 Click Table Formula toolbar 2 Click in the Formula edit box to the right of the Accept the formula button W 3 Type cell addresses operators and values in the Formula edit box To insert the name of a table instead of a cell address click Names on the Table formula toolbar click a name and click Insert 4 Click one of the following e Accept the formula lets you insert the formula into the cell e Cancel changes lets you cancel the formula or changes you have made My WordPerfect does not recognize formulas in cells in which the numeric format is set S to Text When you insert or cancel a formula the Formula edit mode is disabled Ds You can also click the Formula toolbar button Jy on the property bar to display the E Table formula toolbar Calculating formulas in tables WordPerfect lets you perform spreadsheet calculations on table data For example you can calculate the sum of table cell values list and use functions and names calculate formulas and fill in cells with incrementing patterns You can add values in a table quickly and you can ignore a cell during calculations You can also fill a table with incrementing numbers or dates A pattern of values must increment or decrement based on addition or subtraction You cannot fill in a pattern of values that increment or decrement based on multipli
155. adjusting footer adjusting header adjusting row increasing row options resetting row resizing row Help menu hidden formats hiding borders column letters columns objects rows screen components scroll bars spreadsheet tabs windows hiding zeros horizontal alignment horizontal text horizontally rotating hyperlinks inserting importing 195 208 206 195 196 196 210 210 210 211 210 211 210 210 211 165 211 211 201 201 199 200 198 199 153 208 176 201 201 176 201 176 176 176 173 209 207 206 208 229 229 character limit file formats files der OLAP CrossTab reports Paste special text text files inches indenting cells insert mode inserting cells columns files footers hard page breaks headers ms multiple spreadsheets page breaks Quattro Pro objects rows spreadsheets integers serial international settings currency dates language LICS punctuation times Internet linking to notebooks opening files in Quattro Pro inverting matrix italics J joining aligning cells cells centering cells formula cells K keyboards accessing dialog boxes accessing menu options 222 219 219 235 223 223 221 222 211 206 192 167 167 168 222 210 209 210 169 209 227 167 169 184 170 172 170 173 173 170 173 170 173 170 173 229 220 215 216 203 204 203 203 203 203 203 16
156. ag the command to the desired position on the application bar You can also Reset the application bar to its original state Right click the application bar and click Customize Application bar gt Reset to default Add spaces to the application bar Right click the application bar where you want to place a separator and click Customize gt Application bar Add separator PS You can move commands and spaces in the application bar without opening the 5 Customize dialog box by holding down ALT as you drag To change the position of the application bar 1 Right click the application bar and click Customize Application bar gt Position 2 Click Top or Bottom To change the height of the application bar 1 Right click the application bar and click Customize Application bar Size 2 Click One line or Two lines PS Z You can also change the height of the application bar by dragging its border y To use the QuickCell Feature 1 Click a cell on the spreadsheet 2 On the application bar click QuickCell You can also Clear the QuickCell value Click a blank cell on the spreadsheet and click QuickCell Remove QuickCell Right click the application bar click Customize Application bar Add new command and drag the QuickCell button from the application bar to the spreadsheet window 162 Quarrro Pro 10 Navigating in spreadsheers and notebooks You can navigate columns and rows on a spreadsheet using
157. age You can even enter the contents of a cell in a header or footer You can change the distance between a header or footer and the first or last row of data After creating a header or footer you can edit it as required To add a header or footer 1 Click View gt Page 2 Right click the top or bottom margin and click one of the following e Create header e Create footer 3 Type the header or footer text 4 Click Format gt Selection properties 5 Choose a font face from the Face list 6 Choose a font size from the Size list box 7 Enable any of the following check boxes in the Appearance area e Bold e Italics Underline Strikeout 210 Quarrro Pro 10 To link the contents of a cell To a header or footer 1 Click File Page setup 2 Click the Header footer tab 3 In the Header or Footer area enable the Create check box 4 Type the cell address preceded by a back slash For example A A1 NT You cannot enter text or insert positioning characters on the same line as the cell i content To adjust the space above or below a header or footer 1 Click File Page setup 2 Click the Header footer tab 3 Type a height value in the Height box PS You can also adjust the space between the header or footer and the first or last row y of data by dragging the dotted line that borders the top or bottom of the spreadsheet data To edit a header or footer 1 Click View gt Page 2 Double click in the header or f
158. aintain the table structure you can delete the contents only or formulas only When you delete a row column or an entire table you can delete the data the structure or only the formulas To delete a table row or column 1 Select a row or column and click Table Delete 2 Enable one of the following options e Rows lets you specify the number of rows to delete Using tables and charts 107 e Columns lets you specify the number of columns to delete If you want to delete only the contents of a row or column enable the Cell contents only option Rotating table cell contents and skewing cells You can rotate the contents of a table cell counterclockwise Rotated text is placed in a text box You can skew slant the top row or the left or right column of a table You can also change the skew angle and specify other skew options The following image shows several examples of skew table presets When you change the skew of the top row you can square the edge of the first or last column to create a box effect This prevents the cells from extending beyond the edge of the table To rotate Table cell contents 1 Select a cell 2 Click Table gt Format 3 Click the Cell tab 4 Choose one of the following from the Rotate list box e 90 degrees e 180 degrees 270 degrees A es When you rotate a table cell containing a formula the formula is permanently replaced by its result To skew cells in a table Select
159. al to the last margin size used Minimum lets you set all four margin settings to the minimum value the current printer settings allow To ser The page margins by using The ruler 1 Point to the Margin marker E to the left or right of the ruler The pointer changes to a double sided arrow 2 Drag the Margin marker to a new location on the ruler To ser margins for a few paragraphs only 1 Click Format gt Paragraph gt Format 2 Choose from the following First line indent lets you choose the indentation of the first line Left margin adjustment lets you choose the spacing for the left margin Right margin adjustment lets you choose the spacing for the right margin 3 In the Spacing between paragraphs area enable one of the following options e Number of lines lets you choose the number of lines between paragraphs e Distance in points lets you choose the distance in points between paragraphs 46 WordPerfect 10 SETTING PAGE size definitions ANd ORIENTATION A page size definition determines how a printer formats and prints pages For example you can create page size definitions for envelopes and nonstandard sized pages You can choose from preset page size definitions or you can create your own Page size definitions are matched to the printer you have selected A definition may not be available when you change to another printer or a different computer Ifthe same definition is not available WordPerf
160. alc As You Go 189 pasting 193 197 198 disabling 189 protecting 191 192 calculating QuickFill 186 columns 187 reformatting 202 joined cells 203 replacing 192 subtotals 189 rotating 203 using QuickFunctions 188 search and replace 192 calculations selecting 165 preset 188 totaling 188 189 running 189 transposing 197 simple 187 unjoining 203 viewing 189 unprotecting 192 cell backgrounds wrapping text 202 filling 204 center alignment 207 cell borders 204 centering 206 cell comments across blocks 207 copying 197 198 across cells 207 cell content joined cells 203 changing 192 centimeters 211 displaying in footers 210 changing displaying in headers 210 CrossTab report format 235 replacing 192 changing cells cell fonts 204 scenarios 217 cell formats character series copying 201 repeating 184 cell properties characters copying 197 198 inserting special 184 cells number allowed 222 adding 167 repeating 184 adding borders 206 special 182 adding lines 202 WordPerfect 182 alignment 206 charts background color 205 adding axis titles 232 centering 206 adding footnotes 232 clearing 192 adding subtitiles 232 combining z 203 adding subtitles Ass ity ZO copying 197 198 adding titles 231 232 cutting 193 198 axis titles 231 deleting 167 168 creating 231 deleting content 193 creating automatically 231 dragging 196 197 expert 231 editing 191 floating 231 editing content
161. aling using QuickSum 188 parse settings 224 totaling values in o 187 SpeedFormat 201 transposing 197 198 start options 181 182 combining cutting cells 203 cells 198 combining files mathematical operations 223 comments D displaying 173 data compatibility settings changing 192 accessing 170 comparisons 233 changing 170 copying 195 file type 170 CrossTab reports 233 Menu Bar 170 finding and replacing 193 notebook size 170 linking 219 content manipulating 234 editing 193 overwriting 192 replacing 193 protecting 191 replacing cell 192 repeated 186 Control Menu searching and replacing 193 commands 163 summarizing CrossTab reports 233 converting unprotecting 191 page breaks 209 210 zooming 176 Index Quattro Pro 10 239 data analysis 233 234 data models E scenarions 216 edit mode 192 data ranges editing coloring 204 205 cells 191 192 data types data 192 changing color 204 footers 210 database files headers 210 opening 220 multiple spreadsheets 195 saving 220 emailing databases 233 notebooks 221 multidimensional 234 sending notebooks 221 relational 233 embedding using OLAP 234 OLE 3 e y ain 229 date formats 208 Quattro Pro objects 226 227 DATE function 184 186 equations dates simple 187 current 185 solving 213 entering 184 186 erasing 192 formatting 209 ERR o 167 in footers 210 examining data 233 234 in headers 210 exchanging
162. allel 2 2 parallel with block protect removing borders conditions for a merge continuing endnotes on other pages footnotes on other pages converting endnotes to footnotes footnotes to endnotes copying table components text formats Corel Presentations creating charts Corel RealTime Preview changing fonts colors disabling correcting capitalization capitalization after periods automatically capitalization automatically caps lock capitalization automatically grammar errors 111 112 112 112 101 91 92 43 98 108 62 96 97 97 97 96 116 51 118 50 50 50 52 117 50 50 50 117 128 129 75 75 74 74 103 61 111 60 97 61 67 68 68 68 85 initial caps automatically misspelled words automatically spelling creating data table files data text files form documents cropping images cutting table components D data charts creating data files associating with form documents creating field names fields finding records records retrieving from other file formats sorting sorting records viewing records data sources associating using address books data table file data text files creating dates adding to documents deleting editing inserting inserting in footers inserting in headers deleting dates graphics QuickCorrect listings table cell contents table columns table components table rows
163. ally The following image shows the indent options that WordPerfect provides 1 a paragraph that is 64 WordPerfect 10 not indented 2 an indented paragraph 3 a paragraph to which a double indent has been applied and 4 a paragraph to which a hanging indent has been applied Sl gee ad ar lr li e ll cea Ten ny iba os ui te il rra vel com iria dali is rider ja pe rd dii ai al yrl ihm dalcer re kupini calls Escilisis si ere ras ri ita el da o dia a a rar dl hi plata seri dek rii pao dus dolor Dacia Loria adi hiks r pra tarie erji raar Moles ir correa ed lb baker ru igid bzika k m aro aroa at EC al haD Hi qu ld pearl inp bsi acide ere me dolore te bagai nulls iilii De ET basm dior maaga quan oat ea lan To apply a single indent TO TEXT To indent Do the following A line of text Click at the beginning of a line of text Press TAB A paragraph Click at the beginning of a paragraph Click Format Paragraph Indent The first line of every paragraph automatically Click in a paragraph Click Format Paragraph Format In the First line indent box type a value to specify the distance to indent To apply a hanging or double indent 1 Click at the beginning of a paragraph 2 Click Format Paragraph and click one of the following Hanging indent indents all but the first line in the paragraph e Double indent indents the paragraph equally from both margins To Remove AN in
164. also have the option of applying a password to the notebook You can specify a default filename extension for your Quattro Pro files and a default folder for your work When you first open Quattro Pro the default folder appears when you open or save a file If you open or save a file in another folder that folder becomes the default folder until you restart Quattro Pro If you exit Quattro Pro without saving your document or if a power or network failure occurs you will lose your work unless you have selected the document backup option If you exit Quattro Pro unexpectedly with timed backup activated you are prompted to recover any open files the next time you start Quattro Pro You can extract part of a notebook and save it as a separate file leaving the original file intact This is similar to copying the data but allows you to also copy values or formulas and to save the notebook s cell names and charts along with specified cells When you close a Quattro Pro notebook you are prompted to save any unsaved changes When you close a file you remove the notebook and all its associated information from the desktop Always save before closing your notebook or exiting Quattro Pro to keep any changes you have made To save a notebook 1 Click File Save 2 Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the file 3 Type a filename in the Filename box 4 Click Save PS You can save all open notebooks at once using Save all To
165. alue cells box and select the value cells 4 Click the Range picker in the Bin cells box and select the bin cells The bin cell ranges must be in ascending order K Each value in the bin cells represents all values from it down to the previous value The first value represents any value less than or equal to itself The result area is one cell longer than the bin cells and is displayed to the right of the bin cells The last cell contains the number of values found that were greater than the final number in the bin 214 Quattro Pro 10 Ds To create an XY chart of a frequency distribution specify the bin cells as the x axis SN series and the results as the first series of values Performing regression analysis Regression analysis answers the question To what extent can one or more independent variables explain and predict a dependent variable By performing regression analysis you can create a regression analysis table showing how sets of independent variables affect a certain set of dependent variables For example you can estimate how the number of hours worked affects production or how advertising expenditures affect sales The relationship between dependent and independent variables is a linear estimate With one independent variable regression analysis plots a line of best fit also called a regression line through a scatter plot of each independent dependent value pair Because regressions assume a linear relations
166. aming spreadsheets e specifying Quattro Pro settings e displaying arranging resizing and hiding windows e zooming data and hiding and displaying screen components e saving and closing notebooks Components of a notebook Notebooks spreadsheets and their associated elements are the core of the Quattro Pro application Notebooks provide a way to organize many spreadsheets within the same file There are 18 000 spreadsheets in a notebook Each spreadsheet consists of approximately 1 000 000 rows and 18 000 columns Outline of notebook components The following information describes the basic components of a Quattro Pro notebook Spreadsheets A spreadsheet is an electronic ledger It contains columns and rows in which you enter arrange calculate and analyze data In a spreadsheet you can arrange and categorize data perform simple math operations and apply complex formulas Once you enter your data in a spreadsheet Getting started 177 you can create a chart add maps and graphics or produce a report The spreadsheet you see when Quattro Pro opens is one of thousands available in each notebook Objects sheet The last sheet of every notebook is the Objects sheet The Objects sheet displays an icon for every chart in the notebook This sheet also displays icons for custom dialog boxes you build You can copy rename and print items in the Objects sheet The Objects sheet property bar has buttons for creating editing
167. ant WordPerfect Office 2002 to read required files from the CD ROM drive when you use applications The CD ROM Based option saves hard disk space but requires you to insert the WordPerfect Office 2002 CD into the CD ROM drive each time you want to run a WordPerfect Office 2002 application Enabling this option also results in slower than normal performance 9 Click the Next button and follow the installation instructions in the Setup Wizard When the installationis completed you will be prompted to register WordPerfect Office 2002 electronically using the Internet For more information about registering see Registering WordPerfect Office 2002 on page 17 16 Introduction lt To change selections in the Setup Wizard click the Back button PS Click the Help button for more information when you make selections in the Setup Wizard Registering WordPerfect Office 2002 Registering WordPerfect Office 2002 provides you with timely access to the latest product updates and to high quality technical support The serial number on the registration card is proof that you own a legal copy of WordPerfect Office 2002 You will need the serial number when you call Corel Technical Support upgrade to a new version of WordPerfect Office 2002 or order replacement discs You can register using any of the following methods e While the Setup application is running fill out the WordPerfect Office 2002 registration card and return it to Core
168. aphics 93 PS ae can also modify a shape by using the property bar to change the attributes of a S shape To skew a shape 1 Right click a shape and click Skew shape Small green diamond shaped skewing handles display 2 Drag a skewing handle until the shape is the size you want To modify a shape by using a glyph 1 Select a shape 2 Draga glyph until you obtain the desired effect Manipulating Graphics WordPerfect 10 lets you manipulate a graphic in several ways You can size a graphic and you can also stretch a graphic Sizing a graphic makes it larger or smaller while keeping its original proportions intact Stretching a graphic extends it horizontally or vertically You can also move a graphic Graphics can be cut copied and pasted within a document or into other documents For information about cutting copying and pasting graphics see Cutting copying and pasting text and graphics in the online Help To size a qraphic 1 Select a graphic 2 Draga corner handle until the graphic is the size you want You can also Stretch a graphic Drag a side handle until you achieve the effect you want Size a graphic proportionally Hold down SHIFT and drag a handle To move a Graphic by using the keyboard 1 Select a graphic 2 Press any of the ARROW keys to move the graphic in the direction you want ARRANGING Graphics When two or more graphics overlap in a document you can arrange their order by moving their graphi
169. are useful when creating a form To zoom a notebook 1 Click View gt Zoom 2 Select a zoom level 3 Enable the Notebook option A The Zoom setting does not affect printed output DI To restore the screen to its normal display choose 100 IN i En If you select one cell and choose Selection Quattro Pro finds the boundaries of the data then zooms only that cell To zoom data TO fir on The SCREEN 1 Select the cell or cells to zoom 2 Right click a toolbar and click Data manipulation 3 Click Zoom to fit 5 To hide notebook Features 1 Click Format Notebook properties 2 Click the Display tab 3 Disable any of the following check boxes Vertical scroll bar Horizontal scroll bar Sheet tabs To hide parts of the SCREEN 1 Click Tools gt Settings 2 Click Display 3 Disable the appropriate check boxes To hide borders on a spreadsheet 1 Click Format Sheet properties 2 Click the Display tab 3 Disable any of the following check boxes Row borders Column borders Getting started 177 To hide qrid lines on a spreadsheet 1 Click Format gt Sheet properties 2 Click the Display tab 3 Disable any of the following check boxes e Horizontal e Vertical Saving and closing notebooks Each notebook is saved as its own file The default filename for the first notebook is NOTEBK1 QPW The first time you save a notebook you can accept this default filename or rename the file You
170. aring applications e vCard and vCalendar an electronic personal information calendaring and scheduling exchange format You can import CorelCENTRAL Calendar CorelCENTRAL Address Book and CorelCENTRAL Mail data from Microsoft Outlook Outlook Express and legacy versions of CorelCENTRAL into CorelCENTRAL 10 files You can import CorelCENTRAL Address Book data into a custom field using comma separated values csv or plain text txt files and to modify or delete imported data You can also export CorelCENTRAL 10 data to Microsoft Outlook and Outlook Express format or to text format for many other software solutions Making telephone calls from the computer CorelCENTRAL Address Book includes Net2Phone Pro Version 10 4 a suite of utilities that lets you initiate a call from your computer to another computer to a fax machine or to a telephone You can also send voice email messages Net2Phone includes the following capabilities e PC2Phone lets you place telephone calls from your computer to a telephone anywhere in the world Computer to phone calls are free within North America e PC2PC lets you place telephone calls from your computer to another computer free of charge e PC2Fax lets you send faxes from your computer to virtually any fax machine in the world at low rates e PC2VoiceEmail lets you send voice email messages Welcome To Corel CENTRAL 10 407 7 GETTING STARTEd with Corel CENTRAL Corel
171. ase applications For more information about new features included in Paradox 10 refer to the What s new section of the online Help file What s new in WordPerfect Office 2002 WordPerfect Office 2002 provides enhancements in the area of choice compatability and performance The following section outlines what s new overall in WordPerfect Office 2002 For information about what s new in WordPerfect Office 2002 applications see their respective sections in this user guide or refer to the online Help file Not all WordPerfect Office 2002 editions include all the applications tools and features described in this section Corel Application Recovery Manager Corel Applicaton Recovery Manager Corel A R M helps you recover from most application failures without losing your work The Corel A R M is an online wizard that opens automatically at program failure and then offers three courses of action e saving the document and closing the application e exiting the application without saving the document e continue working If you chose to continue working there is no guarantee that you can recover any work in your document since the last time you saved The Corel A R M Provides a program log which contains the details of the applications failure You can initiate a report over the Internet to provide Corel with this important information By receiving reports that you encounter in day to day situations Corel can take advantage of a
172. at To resize an OLE object 1 Right click an OLE object and click Properties 2 Click the OLE tab 3 Disable the Automatic resizing check box 4 Drag the borders of the OLE object to the required size Creating notebook links You can insert links into Quattro Pro notebooks There are several advantages to setting up notebook links instead of using multisheet notebooks You can eliminate redundancy ensure data is always up to date save disk space divide tasks among several people and build larger models that exceed the limits of a single notebook You can link notebooks by selecting cells in the source notebook when both notebooks are open When you are consolidating information from several files that have the same layout you can use wildcards to link to the same place in all of them You can also link cells Links between Quattro Pro and other applications can be created For example you can write a memo in WordPerfect and link a cell in Quattro Pro to it You can create hyperlinks in a notebook to jump to another file at an Internet site To insert a notebook link 1 Select a cell in which you want to place a link 2 Type a plus sign and type the link address as Drive Path Filename Extension Sheet Cell reference where e Drive is the drive containing the notebook This is necessary only if the notebook you are linking is not on the same drive as the primary notebook e Path is the path to the folder con
173. at from the Formats list You can also apply a predesigned format by clicking the SpeedFormat button on the w Y y toolbar You can revise a predesigned format by disabling any properties that you do not want applied to the cells To add a format TO the predesiqned formar list 1 Click Format gt SpeedFormat 2 Choose a format to customize from the Formats list 3 Click Add 4 Type the name of the new format in the Format name box 5 Select the cells that contain the format using the Range picker w tool in the Example cells box WRAPpiNG TEXT Text that displays wider than a column width overflows to the next cell when that cell is empty If the next cell contains data the overflow text is hidden and the text appears truncated To fix this you can wrap text within a cell or enter short lines of text in one cell You can redistribute text in a cell to display as a paragraph covering multiple rows or columns Although the text displays in several rows or columns the data is stored in the left most cells of each row Redistributed text maintains the original row height unless you reformat entries with different font sizes the font size of the entry in the first row determines the font size of the redistributed text You can redistribute only existing text text entered later is not affected To wrap text within a cell 1 Click the cell in which you want to wrap text 2 Click Format Selection properties 3 Click t
174. at you copy or move by specifying the type of data or cell properties to be moved For example you can copy data without copying its properties or you can copy properties without copying data Quattro Pro also lets you transpose columns to rows and rows to columns For example after transposing columns and rows all data in a column can be transposed to display as a row To copy cells 1 Select the cells to copy 2 Click Edit gt Copy 3 Select the destination cells within the active spreadsheet 4 Click Edit gt Paste MMe When you copy a selection of cells to a specific cell the Clipboard uses that cell as the upper left position of the copied information Editing and formatting a spreadsheet 197 To move cells 1 Select the cells to move 2 Click Edit gt Cut 3 Select the destination cells within the active spreadsheet 4 Click Edit gt Paste To copy cells to a specified location 1 Click Edit Copy cells 2 Inthe From box specify the cells to copy 3 Inthe To box specify the destination cells If you copy cells containing absolute references enable the Model copy check box gt Z Instead of specifying the cells you want to copy you can press F3 and choose a oy named cell from the Cell names dialog box To copy specific types of data cell properties and cell comments in a cell selection 1 Select the cells to copy 2 Click Edit Copy 3 Select the destination cells 4 Click Edit Paste special
175. ata 394 Paradox 10 Index Paradox 10 A design objects 366 385 accessibility 344 adding records 359 E table fields 361 editing advanced queries 380 records 359 answer table 377 example elements 380 experts button 366 B field 366 boxes form 363 adding 366 HTML import 390 buttons HTML report 389 adding 367 HTML table 389 label 372 query 377 C report 371 charts table 353 adding to reports 374 tee 366 391 columns exporting resizing 361 data 391 compatibility with other applications 391 copying F fields to Quattro Pro 392 field creating definition 345 passwords 357 fields adding 361 366 default values 355 D defining 351 data deleting 361 definition 345 maximum value 355 editing 368 minimum value 355 import export 391 names 353 presenting 371 size 353 printing 371 type 353 retrieving 377 files data model compatibility 391 creating 364 from previous versions 393 data objects 385 filters database terms 345 graphics 343 databases financial statements 371 planning 351 finding records 360 stricture 351 form expert 363 defining forms fields 351 creating 363 deleting data model 363 records 359 printing 369 table fields 361 Index Paradox 10 39 G graphics H hotKey assignment mechanism HTML import expert importing publishing report expert table expert importing data HTML indexes secondary ES integrated development environment IDE debugger
176. ate and save documents created with the Standard Generalized Markup Language SGML or eXtensible Markup Language XML Although the user interface is XML oriented all the SGML functionality that was available in WordPerfect 8 and WordPerfect 9 is available in WordPerfect 10 For more information about new features included in WordPerfect 10 refer to the What s new section of the online Help file Quattro Pro 10 Quattro Pro 10 is a spreadsheet application that lets you manage analyze report and share data Quattro Pro 10 helps you make informed business decisions by providing the tools you need to produce tables financial forms lists databases charts and reports Quattro Pro 10 lets you perform simple tasks such as creating personal budgets to more complex tasks such as Welcome to WordPerfect Office 2002 7 preparing year end financial statements performing complex data analysis and creating reports from external databases Like WordPerfect 10 Quattro Pro 10 lets you create a single file then publish it to paper electronic media and the World Wide Web As well as enhancements to existing features the charting engine in Quattro Pro 10 has been reengineered to give you more power control flexibility and ease of use You can now take advantage of features like advanced rendering riser transparency and glow effects to produce professional looking results For more information about new features included in Qu
177. attro Pro 10 refer to the What s new section of the online Help file Corel Presentations 10 Corel Presentations 10 lets you create high quality slide shows and drawings Corel Presentations lets you produce project proposals interactive reports and demonstrations multimedia presentations flyers signs and banners You can also create slide show presentations for large monitors portable presentations the Internet or an intranet overhead transparencies 35 mm slides and printed color or black and white copies of a it Corel Presentations 10 is also a drawing application that lets you create drawings edit and create bitmap images and convert vector images to bitmaps Corel Presentations 10 incorporates a number of new features such as slide footers font embedding support for Macromedia Flash and support for animated GIFs For more information about new features included in Corel Presentations 10 refer to the What s new section of the online Help file CorelCENTRAL 10 CorelCENTRAL 10 is a personal information manager that helps you make the most of your time You can plan your daily schedule write reminders organize reference information and manage contact information You can synchronize CorelCENTRAL with a 3Com Palm Pilot In addition CorelCENTRAL is compatible with any Internet browser when you click on a hyperlink in a CorelCENTRAL component it automatically opens your default Internet browser Corel
178. attro Pro file or a file imported into Quattro Pro While working in Quattro Pro you can have several windows open For example suppose you are Getting started 173 working with four different notebooks each dealing with a quarterly report You can display all four at once You can select which windows you want open and how you want to view the data in those windows As well there are several methods of rearranging windows on your desktop You can also hide windows You can change how you view your notebook without changing the notebook itself For example you can use Draft view when quickly entering data or you can use Page view when you want to change margins and see how information will fit on a printed page You can also use Zoom to make the notebook display larger or smaller You can display actual formulas instead of formula results You can also have Quattro Pro automatically display spreadsheet comments Once a comment is displayed you can move or copy it to a new cell You can create any number of views When you create a new view of a notebook window the duplicate window appears full size in front of other open windows with cell A1 selected on the first spreadsheet To view different parts of the same notebook you can duplicate the window or split the window into two panes Panes can be split vertically or horizontally Ifwindow panes are synchronized you can scroll both of them at once to compare the data in rows
179. aving with new name 42 enlarging understanding components 39 images 97 draw picture window entering opening 92 formulas 109 drawing functions 109 shapes 90 envelopes drawing tools 89 creating A See ee 126 drawings mergingto 1 126 127 deleting 91 saving 91 drop caps F adding 63 field codes 123 changing colors 64 fields changing fonts 64 in data table files 121 changing positions 64 in data text files 121 changing sizes 63 inserting in form documents 125 changing styles 64 filenames editing 62 inserting in footers 56 removing 63 inserting in headers 56 Index WordPerfect 10 137 fills pages 45 adding 118 text 59 adding gradient 118 formulas applying to tables 108 calculating 110 editing 118 entering 109 flipping entering in floating table cells 110 images 99 entering in tables 110 floating table cells functions entering formulas 110 entering 109 font colors 96 fonts changing 60 G changing color 60 glyphs changing relative size 60 modifying shapes 94 changing size 60 gradient fills changing style toes 60 changing placement of shadows 118 119 changing with Corel RealTime Preview 60 rotating 118 119 modifying settings 59 grammar errors footers correcting 85 changing space above or below 55 Grammar As You Go discontinuing 55 disabling 86 editing 54 enabling 86 formatting 54 graphics inserting 53 54 arranging 94 inserting dates be 56 creating 90
180. awings creating drawing shapes editing shapes printing a publishing as HTML documents publishing to the Web saving i saving for the first time working with objects working with text 291 261 265 291 321 311 310 311 311 309 309 311 311 309 312 312 309 311 311 312 325 263 275 268 309 267 267 318 325 325 292 292 292 292 292 292 291 291 291 292 292 292 266 291 292 322 325 325 265 266 283 273 E edit points changing the shape of lines and polylines editing data in datasheets shapes mae Bg stp shapes in slide shows and drawings text in organization charts text to organization charts effects adding multimedia to slide shows applying special to bitmapped images applying to objects using special electronic publishing emailing slide shows emboss effect entering data in datasheets equalize effect expanding subordinates exporting spreadsheet data from datasheets F files adding movies to slide shows printing to filling cells with numbers automatically Flash support flipping objects flood fill tool flowchart shapes drawing font colors changing font embedding font matching font outlines changing in bulleted lists changing titles and subtitles font sizes changing fonts changing fonts online footers in slide layout layers 293 310 291 292 316 316 301 299 285 299 325 326 299
181. bar by dragging it to the top bottom left or right edge of the application window If you drag the toolbar away from all edges of the application window it becomes a floating toolbar You can also rename or delete a toolbar you have created If you make changes you no longer want you can reset the toolbar to its default settings You can change the graphic or text of a toolbar button or have Quattro Pro display text under all toolbar buttons Quattro Pro lets you create a button that will launch a Windows application or document You can also create a button that executes either a Quattro Pro or PerfectScript macro 178 Quattro Pro 10 To create a Toolbar 1 Click Tools Customize 2 Open the Customization menu 3 Click Toolbar 4 Click New 5 Type a name for the toolbar 6 Click Commands 7 Choose the commands you want from the Commands list Each command appears under the appropriate menu name 8 Drag the commands from the list to the toolbar To edit a toolbar 1 Click Tools Customize 2 Open the Customization menu 3 Click Toolbar 4 Enable the check box beside the toolbar you want to customize 5 Click Commands 6 Choose the command you want from the Commands list Each command appears under the appropriate menu name 7 Drag the command to the desired location on the toolbar You can also Rearrange toolbar buttons Click Commands and drag the toolbar buttons to their new locations Resize toolbar but
182. ber the same ensures that the number remains the same when the document is edited Let number change as pages are added or deleted lets the number change as the document is edited 82 WordPerfect 10 No When you merge a multiple page form document you can restart the page numbering for each merged record by enabling the Always keep number the same option To ser a chapter number _ Click Format Page Numbering 2 Click Set value 3 In the dialog box click the Chapter tab 4 Type a new chapter number in the Set chapter number box 5 Enable one of the following options Always keep number the same ensures that the number remains the same when the document is edited Let number change as chapters are added or deleted lets the number change as the document is edited To ser a volume number 1 Click Format gt Page Numbering 2 Click the Set value button 3 Click the Volume tab 4 Inthe Set volume number box type a new number 5 Enable one of the following buttons Always keep number the same ensures that the number remains the same when the document is edited Let number change as volumes are added or deleted lets the number change as the document is edited Suppressing And discontiNUING page numbers You can remove page numbering from one page in your document You can also discontinue the page numbers so that they are removed from the entire document To suppress A
183. bjects 2 2 ww 227 calculating 4 6 a amp os oe ao os 188 patterns QuickFunctions character ai ee ee 184 QuickSum o 188 repeating eee 184 QuickLinks 2 229 percent format 208 QuickSum 2 ee eee ee 188 189 plotting QUERIAS oa 70 Ser a ee Ser ara we oe 1186 data in a chart e 44 aye ws Boa a BA pointer o ee 165 predefined 2 w 2 wice eu w e wre Y gt 201 R preserving range picker 0 aa aaa 165 data formatting a 2835 ranges preset coloring data ee 205 calculations 2 2 1 ew we 188 redoing previewing actions x Ba OS pce D E a Be 195 font face s eg So lycra ank op Bo ese a ag 203 disabling 0 ee 195 printing level oS Bako o 4 ASS footers a 1 ee ee ee 210 numberof 2 1 1 eee eee 195 headers eee 210 reducing locked titles e e ca e a e 165 fontisiza sn a a 03 page breaks 209 reformatting project templates Ekta Lo th Tae a A Gee A OE ote az 2203 creating notebooks 182 refreshing opening o 182 CrossTab report data 236 projects 1 CrossTab reports 236 properties regression analysis 0 215 copying o 197 repeat characters 2 2 2 2 2 we 182 spreadsheet items 171 repeating Property Bar a ee ee ee 15 characterseries 184 property settings character
184. by a period closing parenthesis or hyphen at the beginning of a new line Press TAB Type the text for the first list item and press ENTER win For a paragraph let the text wrap at the end of the line instead of inserting a hard return Perform this step for each entry in the list 4 Press BACKSPACE Li To use QuickNumbers QuickBullets must first be enabled For information about Aa enabling QuickBullets see To enable QuickBullets on page 78 When you use QuickBullets or QuickNumbers you create your own numbering style The most recently used numbering styles display in the Description area of the Bullets and numbering dialog box To number EX ST NG TEXT 1 Select the text you want to number 2 Click the Numbering button on the toolbar To renumber a numbered list or numbered outline 1 Click in a list or outline 2 Click the Set paragraph number button E5 on the property bar 3 Type the new number in the Paragraph number box The number you change and all numbers following it are renumbered accordingly PS You can also renumber paragraphs by pressing CTRL SHIFT F5 For more SAY information see Numbering paragraphs in a document in the online Help If the numbering you want to change is indented from the left margin type for each indention level in the Outline level box before you type the new number For example if the text is indented two levels from the margin type followed by the
185. c concepts and helps you to understand and learn the language It also contains a complete language reference section providing descriptions and code examples for elements methods and procedures The code examples available in this file can be copied and pasted directly into the ObjectPAL Editor The ObjectPAL tutorial is available for beginning programmers The tutorial takes you through the core concepts of the language introduces when and why you would use it and familiarizes you to the process of writing ObjectPAL code Workinq wirh ObjecrPAL 387 To access The ObjecrPAL help e Click Help gt ObjectPAL reference To access the ObjectPAL Tutorial e Click Help gt ObjectPAL tutorial From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Event driven behavior event model overview Object based objects Methods methods overview Integrated Development Environment IDE Object Explorer object explorer overview ObjectPAL Editor ObjectPAL editor Debugger debugger window 388 Paradox 10 Paradox ANd ThE INTERNET Paradox provides tools to convert your tables and reports to HTML documents so you can display your data on a Web page You can use the HTML Table Expert and the HTML Report Expert to publish static or dynamic documents Static publishing takes a snap shot of your table or report and publishes that information to a Web page The Web page will not reflect any changes to your data unless you publish ano
186. ca Telephone technical support options Corel users can use complimentary and fee based telephone technical support options Three levels of support are available Classic Service Classic Service is a complimentary 30 day service designed to address installation configuration and new feature issues This service begins on the day of your first technical support call For more information see http www corel com support options telephone htm on the Internet Classic Service is not available for OEM White box Jewel Case CD only trial or Academic versions of Corel products Priority Service Priority Service is a fee based service for users who require the help of second level technicians Priority Service may be purchased by the minute by the incident or on a term basis Options range from core business hour access for individual users to around the clock access for multiuser environments Premium Service Premium Service is Corel s highest level of support This service is designed for organizations that want to establish a direct relationship with Corel and for organizations that employ dedicated support professionals or have centralized technical management Customer Service Corel Customer Service can provide you with prompt and accurate information about Corel product features specifications pricing availability and services Corel Customer Service does not provide technical support You can access Customer
187. can sort the slides in a slide show by dragging them Once you drag a slide to a new position the Slide Sorter reorders and renumbers each slide Creating slide shows and drawings 263 The following image shows how the Slide Sorter lets you rearrange the order of slides in a slide show a A slide show consists of a series of slides presented in succession using slide transitions Slide transitions control how each slide is introduced creating a smooth visual progression for the audience The default transition displays slides and the objects on the slide at the same time but you can choose to display them separately You can use the Slide Sorter to apply a different transition effect to each slide a range of slides or apply the same transition effect to the entire slide show The following image shows how 1 a transition is applied to a slide 2 the Lines Sweep transition is applied to a slide and 3 the transition moves to the next slide lt l i k You can also turn off the transitions that you apply to slides To sort slides 1 Click View gt Slide Sorter 2 Draga slide to a new position You can also Sort a range of slides Hold down SHIFT click the first and last slide in the range of slides and drag them to a new position To apply a slide transition 1 Click View gt Slide Sorter 264 Corel Presentations 10 2 Click a slide 3 Click Format gt Slide properties gt Transition
188. cation 1 Click File Open Choose the drive where the document is stored from the Look in list box 2 3 Double click the folder in which the document is stored 4 Choose the file format you want to open from the File type list box 5 Double click the document name Adding the date and time To A dOCUMENT You can insert the date and time into a document The format of the date and time text can be edited To insert The date OR TiME 1 Click where you want to add the date or time 2 Click Insert Date time 3 Choose a format from the Date time formats list box If you want the date or time to be updated when you open or print the document enable the Keep the inserted date current check box 4 Click Insert DI You can insert the date as text by pressing CTRL D SN S You can insert the date as a code that is updated when you open or print the document by pressing CTRL SHIFT D To edit the date or time format 1 Select the date or time 2 Click Insert Date time 3 Choose a new format from the Date time formats list box 4 Click Apply format Working with documents 41 To delete the date or Time 1 Select the date or time in your document 2 Press DELETE Saving A dOCUMENT When you save a document for the first time you assign it a name and choose a folder in which to store it Any changes you make to the document after that are saved to that location You can create a new copy of the document by savi
189. cation or division You can get more information about table formula errors including a brief explanation of any and ERR error symbols that display in a table as you calculate formulas To calculate a formula in a table 1 Click in a table 2 Click Table gt Calculate 3 Enable one of the following options 110 WordPerfect 10 e Calculate table calculates the table or floating cell in which the insertion point is positioned e Calculate tables in document calculates all tables and floating cells in the document To add values in a table quickly 1 Click the table cell below or to the right of the cells whose total you want to calculate 2 Click Table QuickSum iz If you click in a cell instead of selecting a range of cells the calculated sum overwrites any values formulas or text in the cell QS You can also add values by clicking the QuickSum button on the Table formula toolbar To display the Table formula toolbar click Table Formula toolbar To ignore a table cell during calculations 1 Select a cell and click Table Format 2 Click the Cell tab 3 Enable the Ignore cell when calculating check box Creating charts WordPerfect lets you create and insert charts and graphs in a document You can create a chart by using data in a table or a spreadsheet or you can add data as you create the chart A chart can be linked to a table so that the chart is updated whenever the table data changes If you mov
190. cells A cell is like a small editing window in which you can insert text graphics numbers or formulas The cells in a table are labeled alphabetically from left to right and numerically from top to bottom Using tables and charts 101 The following image shows a table with 1 rows and 2 columns Quercus Betula Abies Cedrus To create a Table 1 Click Table gt Create 2 Type values in the following boxes Columns e Rows 3 Click Create You can also Create a table in a graphics box Enable the Drag to create a new table check box click Create and drag a rectangle anywhere in a document Create a floating cell Enable the Floating cell option in the Create area DS You can also create a table by clicking the Table QuickCreate button on the SY toolbar and dragging to specify the number of rows and columns for the table If the Shadow Cursor is enabled you can create a table by dragging a rectangle and clicking Table in the QuickMenu that displays Selecting and moving Table COMPONENTS You must select a table or table component before you can perform a procedure such as changing the number of rows or columns in the table or copying the format of one table cell to another You can also select table components by using QuickSelect or Row column indicators You can copy cut and paste table components You can copy the format of a table cell and apply the formatting to another cell or group of cell
191. ch field It is easier to design all of your field sizes to be large but remember that large fields take up more disk space whether they are full or not Paradox automatically assigns sizes for certain field types such as number money short and long integer Choose a field type according to the type of data you want to store in the field The following table outlines the various field types available in Paradox Type symbol Description Alpha A Contains letters numbers and other printable ASCII characters Maximum size 255 characters Number N Contains numbers ranging from 10307 to 10308 with 15 significant digits These fields are best used for performing calculations Money Contains only numbers Displays decimal places and symbol Short S Contains whole numbers ranging from 32 767 to 32 767 Working with tables and records 375 Type symbol Description Long Integer 1 BCD Date D Time T Timestamp O Memo M Formatted memo F Graphic G OLE 0 Logical L Autoincrement Binary B Bytes Y Contains 32 bit signed whole numbers ranging from 2147483648 to 2147483647 Binary Coded Decimal numbers Use when performing calculations that require a higher level of precision than the Number field provides Maximum size 32 characters Contains date information Displays in a variety of formats Contains time of day information formatted as h
192. ck Advanced 4 Type a value in the Space between notes box To continue FOOTNOTES OR ENGNOTES ON ANOTHER PAGE 1 Click Insert Footnote endnote 2 Enable one of the following options Footnote number Endnote number 3 Click Options and click Advanced 4 Inthe Continued notes area type a value in the Amount of note to keep together box This value specifies the minimum distance allowed for a footnote or endnote at the bottom of a page before the note is moved to the next page 5 Enable the Insert continued message check box Working with footnotes and endnotes 17 To change the numbering method of a footnote OR ENdNOTE 1 Click Insert Footnote endnote 2 Enable one of the following options Footnote number Endnote number 3 Click Options and click Advanced 4 Inthe Numbering method area choose a numbering method from the Numbering list box If you want to restart footnote numbering on every page enable the Restart numbering on each page check box To restart subsequent endnote numbers aT 1 1 Click Insert Footnote endnote 2 Enable the Endnote number option and type a value in the box beside it 3 Click Endnote placement 4 Enable the Insert endnotes at insertion point and restart numbering option NT When you enable the Insert endnotes at insertion point and restart numbering option all endnotes up to the number specified display and then a new page begins Note numbering starts over with 1 on the
193. ck View gt Ruler 2 Drag from the horizontal or vertical ruler to a position on the slide or drawing Xi The ruler must be displayed to create an alignment guide From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Setting up the crosshair crosshair setting up Setting up the pointer position pointer position setting up 268 Corel Presentations 10 r ES Working ls the Master Galler A master is a set of layouts and backgrounds A layout is a slide with preset placeholders for objects such as titles subtitles bulleted lists text data charts and organization charts Each layout has a page format and color scheme that is consistent with the other layouts and backgrounds that are part of a master A background can include a border a gradient background and other related images Corel Presentations 10 provides a selection of masters to work with in the Master Gallery In this section you ll learn about e applying masters to slides e applying backgrounds and layouts to slides e creating slide show layouts and backgrounds Applying masters To slides Corel Presentations provides a collection of masters in the Master Gallery Each master is a set of professionally designed slide backgrounds and layouts that include preset objects such as titles bulleted lists and charts Choosing a preset layout allows you to concentrate on the content of the slide show rather than on the format The
194. click an organization chart Click a subordinate box Click View Zoom to branch An entire organization chart Double click an organization chart and click View Zoom to chart Working with organization charts 317 Xi In organization charts manager positions are represented by the highest boxes in the chart subordinate and staff positions by the next level of boxes and coworker positions by the lowest level of boxes To display or hide a subordinate position 1 Double click an organization chart 2 Click a subordinate position box 3 Click View and click one of the following Expand subordinates displays subordinate positions e Collapse subordinates hides subordinate positions Changing organization chart branch structures ANd ORIENTATION Changing how the branches are structured allows you to create a different look for the organization chart For example you can change the branches to stagger the boxes By changing the branch orientation you can change the arrangement of boxes For example top to bottom orientation lets you have one box at the top of the organization chart but bottom to top orientation lets you have many boxes at the top The following image shows examples of 1 a multiple structure 2 a single structure 3 a staggered structure 4 a left top structure and 5 a right bottom structure lt e H E L The following image shows examples of 1 top to bottom orientation 2 left to righ
195. corresponds to the CD Drive Click Adobe Acrobat reader setup uk WN Follow the instructions in the Adobe Acrobat reader setup program To publish the active document to PDF Click File Publish to PDF Click the General tab In the File name box click Browse Choose the drive where you want to save the file from the Save in list box Double click the folder in which you want to save the file Type the file name in the File name box Choose a file type from the Save as type box Click Save OMAN DU FWN In the Export range area enable one of the following options Full document publishes your entire file e Current page publishes the active page only Pages publishes a portion of the file 132 WordPerfect 10 Selection publishes highlighted text NM If you enable the Pages option you must type the numbers for the first and last pages which you want to publish in the Publish page number boxes Building XML documents You can use WordPerfect to create edit retrieve validate and save documents created with the Standard Generalized Markup Language SGML or the eXtensible Markup Language XML Both SGML and XML allow you to create your own Document Type Definition DTD or use existing DTDs to define a document architecture and markup Both SGML and XML are open international standards and are platform and application independent Although the user interface is now XML oriented all the SGM
196. cs boxes in front of or behind the other boxes in the stack You can also move graphics behind text like a watermark or in front of text like a sticky note You can also select a graphic that is over or under another graphic 94 WordPerfect 10 You can group graphics so that they remain together when they are moved sized and edited The following image is an example of grouped graphics A E E To reorder overlapping Graphics 1 Right click a graphic 2 Click Order and click one of the following To front moves a graphic in front of the overlapping graphics To back moves a graphic behind the overlapping graphics Forward one moves a graphic forward one layer Back one moves a graphic back one layer QS You can also reorder overlapping graphics by clicking the Object s forward one button or the Object s back one button on the property bar To move a graphic behind or in Front of text 1 Select a graphic 2 Click the Graphics button on the property bar and click one of the following In front of text moves the selected graphic in front of the text Behind text moves the selected graphic behind the text To qroup graphics 1 Hold down SHIFT and click the graphics you want to group 2 Right click one of the selected graphics and click Group Sic Grouping is useful when you want to keep an image and text together When you click one of the graphics one set of sizing handles displa
197. ct box type a name for the task 3 Click the Mini calendar button in the Date box and click a date 4 Click the Mini calendar button in the Due date box and click a due date If you want to include comments about the task type text in the Notes box You can also Set a priority level for the task Choose a priority level from the Priority list box Track the progress of a task Type a value in the complete box Delete a task Right click the task and click Delete task To schedule a weekly task in a calendar Click Calendar New task Type a subject in the Subject box Click Repeat In the Repeat task dialog box click the Weeks tab 1 2 3 4 5 Type a value in the Event repeats every box 6 Click the Mini calendar button in the From box and click a date 7 Click the Mini calendar button in the To box and click a date 8 In the On day s area enable any of the check boxes gt lt You can also schedule a task for specific weeks in a month Click the Weeks of month tab and enable any of the check boxes in the During area To schedule a task on a specific day and week in A year Click Calendar New task Type a subject in the Subject box Click Repeat In the Repeat task dialog box click the Weeks of year tab Click the Mini calendar button in the From box and click a date Click the Mini calendar button in the To box and click a date Choose a month from the Month list box ON AU FWN Choos
198. cuments You can open text files and other word processing documents that were created in WordPerfect or in another application For example you can open Microsoft Word and Rich Text Format rtf files in WordPerfect For more information about opening Microsoft Word documents see Opening Microsoft Word documents in the online Help The advantage of opening a document created in another application rather than importing text is that many of the formatting attributes in the original document such as page size margins font properties bullets and underlining are preserved Some of the features not supported include embedded pictures hidden text interline spacing kerning macros multiple page layouts the first one in the document is used throughout and OLE objects For more information about importing files see Import and export file formats for WordPerfect 10 in the Reference Information section of the online Help 40 WordPerfect 10 To open a WordPerfect document 1 Click File Open 2 Choose the drive and folder where the document is stored 3 Choose a file format from the File type list box Choosing the All files item displays files of all types 4 Double click the document file name DS You can also open a document by clicking the Open button a on the toolbar If you know where a file is located you can type the full path and filename in the File name list box To open a document created in Another appli
199. d click one of the following Slide Editor Slide Outliner Slide Sorter Creating slide shows and drawings 261 gt lt You can also change the slide show view by clicking the Slide Editor Slide Outliner or Slide Sorter tab on the right side of the slide show window Opening new slide shows A slide show project is a predefined slide show that includes a prepared layout and outline All you need to do is type in data You can design your own slide show or start a slide show from a predefined slide show project To open a new blank slide show 1 Click File New 2 Choose a slide show from the Category list box 3 Click a slide show master on the palette To open a new slide show From a predefined project Click File New from project Click the Create new tab Choose Corel Presentations 10 from the list box 1 2 3 4 Choose Corel Presentations slide show from the list 5 Click Create 6 Inthe Startup master gallery dialog box choose a slide show from the Category list box 7 Click a slide show master on the palette Saving slide shows You can save slide shows that you create You can also save slides as WordPerfect graphics or you can save them using another graphic file format For more information about the types of graphic file formats you can save see Export graphic file formats in the online Help To save a slide show for the First Time 1 Click File Save 2 Choose the drive and folder
200. d embed it in a text document such as a letter The document does not need to exist before running the Merge Expert The merge settings can be named and saved to run again at a later date You can merge Paradox data with documents created in the following applications WordPerfect Paradox reports and Microsoft Word To create A mail MERGE 1 Click Tools Experts 2 Click Merge 3 Click Run expert 4 Follow the steps of the expert Working with previous versions of Paradox Files created in previous versions of Paradox can be used in Paradox 10 Tables created in any version of Paradox can be opened directly in a newer version However some files such as forms reports and scripts must be converted to Paradox 10 format before you can use them To convert files ro Paradox 10 1 Open the file in Paradox 10 2 Click the Run button on the property bar Ate You can only convert undelivered objects If the form report or script is in delivered format FDL RDL or SDL extension you must run the source object FSL RSL or SSL extension in Paradox 10 and then deliver the converted object Compatibility with other applications 393 From here For more information about Publishing to RTF Importing data Exporting data Sending data to Quattro Pro Mail merges In the online Help Index type rich text format publishing to importing data exporting data Quattro Pro exporting data to experts merging d
201. d fill tool replaces only the colored regions of a bitmapped image A colored region is a group of connecting pixels that share the same color To copy and apply a unioue color in a birmapped image 1 Double click a bitmapped image 2 Click Insert Pickup color 3 Click a color in the bitmapped image The color you choose displays in the Foreground fill picker 4 on the tool palette 4 Use one of the following tools to apply the copied color to bitmapped image Paint brush e Air brush Flood fill aia Some colors are a blend of different color pixels The color you pick up depends on what pixel the pointer is on when you click the bitmapped image To selectively replace a color in a bitmapped image 1 Double click a bitmapped image 2 Click Insert gt Selective replace 3 Click Format gt Brush 4 Inthe Brush attributes dialog box choose a brush shape from the Brush shape list box 5 Type a value in the Brush width box and click OK 6 Click Insert Pickup color 7 Click a color in the bitmapped image The color you choose displays in the Foreground fill picker on the tool palette 298 Corel Presentations 10 8 Open the Background fill picker a on the tool palette and click a color 9 Click the bitmapped image where you want to replace the color To select a TRANSPARENT Color for a birmapped image 1 Double click a bitmapped image 2 Click Format gt Set transparent color 3 Click a color on the palette Using specia
202. dPerfect SN To preview color changes 1 Select a graphic 2 On the property bar click one of the following buttons Foreground color lets you change the foreground color of a shape Background color lets you change the background color of a shape Shadow color lets you change the color of a drop shadow Line color lets you change the color of a graphics line 3 Point to a color on the color palette When you pause on a color a preview of the graphic in that color displays on the page If you want to apply the color to the graphic click the color er Corel RealTime Preview is enabled by default For more information about Corel RealTime Preview see Modifying font settings on page 59 Changing the appearance of images WordPerfect 10 includes tools that let you change the way an image looks You can enlarge or reduce an image You can crop an image You can adjust the color attributes for an image and you can change the fill for an image You can also reset an image to its original appearance To enlarge or reduce AN IMAGE 1 Right click an image and click Image tools 2 Open the Zoom flyout and click the Zoom in zoom out tool Ea A scroll bar displays at the right side of the image 3 Click the arrows at the top or bottom of the scroll bar to enlarge or reduce the image You can click the Zoom actual size tool HI in the Zoom flyout to restore the image Se S to its original size To use prec
203. dd fields to match all of the parent s key fields 00 Click the left arrow 9 Enable one of the following options in the Update rule area e Cascade any change you make to a value in the key field of the parent table is automatically made in the linked field of the child table e Prohibit you cannot change a value in the parent table key field if there are records that match that value in the child table Strict R I ensures that earlier versions of Paradox cannot access a table on which you ve established referential integrity Paradox must obtain locks on all tables involved in a referential integrity relationship when you modify it 378 Paradox 10 La When you establish referential integrity Paradox checks the validity of a value before Sr accepting it in the referential integrity table Navigating between records Paradox provides you with several ways of navigating between records to view enter and edit data The following toolbar buttons are also provided to navigate between records Button Action First Record 4 Move to the first record in the table Previous Set si Move up one record set the number of records displayed in the table window Previous Record 4 Move up one record Next Record k Move down one record Next Set ikt Move down one record set the number of records displayed in the table window Last Record i Move to the last record in the table Adding editing and deleting records Yo
204. deNT 1 Click at the beginning of a line of text 2 Press SHIFT TAB Justifying Text You can justify text in a document Doing so aligns the text horizontally between the left and right margins of the page FORMATTING TEXT 67 The following image shows the justification options that WordPerfect provides 1 a left justified paragraph 2 a right justified paragraph 3 a center justified paragraph 4 a fully justified paragraph and 5 a paragraph with all lines justified TED MEHE ME Cee Ae al dem ia aan vel DE valo ura ola oa ra le Tee ra rag rbd 2 fot 1b hwn bl ir ve com irre dolor inh ula der vehi ewer malevar rr nai er dhim da lors ra kopiri pija lecilists ai vera ero ron jee rd digeser lcd presea lope coil desir sagor daj dolore tardis Binare aini rararciriara alicia riii wed a Teer priba a ei eee Visi era vel cere ir sigas dida dolore Lila DO IEHL ME A ee Ai dl da AE my al pai oe Va a vel cere ere dolar ta le qu val ium 15 E T dak ou imagi mala cid ai vamni Hi blade presanl mgpa duia dolore beis ip mimi na pai modi Via inama J To justify Text 1 Click in a paragraph 2 Click Format gt Justification and click one of the following e Left aligns text evenly with the left margin Right aligns text evenly with the right margin e Center centers text between the right and left margins Full aligns text excluding the last line along both
205. defines how an object behaves in response to an event The ObjectPAL language is made up of methods and procedures special code not attached to a specific object ObjectPAL methods fall into one of three categories built in event methods that are included with every Paradox object methods in the ObjectPAL run time library and custom methods you create ObjectPAL objects are grouped by type Objects of a given type have the same properties and methods For example all text files have properties in common and all tables have properties in common but the properties of tables and text files are different Tables and text files are objects of different types you use one set of methods to operate on text files and another to operate on tables Integrated Development Environment IDE When you work with ObjectPAL you work in the Integrated Development Environment consisting of the Object Explorer the Editor and the Debugger You access the Editor through the Object Explorer The Object Explorer lets you view an object tree for the current form and provides a developer s interface to properties In an ObjectPAL Editor window you can write edit compile and debug the ObjectPAL code that is attached to methods on a form library or script The ObjectPAL Debugger lets you interactively test and trace the execution of commands in your methods Using the Object Explorer Paradox provides an interactive way of writing code through the Objec
206. der where the table is stored 3 Double click a table 4 Enable the check boxes for each of the fields you want to include in the Answer table 5 Type the value you want to retrieve under the appropriate field The value you type in the query window must be of the same case and spacing as the value you want to retrieve 6 Click Query Run query The following image illustrates specific values being retrieved from a database To CREATE A QUERY USING The Query Expert 1 Click Tools Experts 2 Click Query 3 Click Run expert 4 Follow the steps of the Expert 378 Paradox 10 SAvinq QUERIES Paradox lets you save your queries so that you can use them again Saving a query is particularly useful in the case of complicated queries By re running a saved query you ensure that the same selection conditions are used each time you want to retrieve data from your tables To SAVE A QUERY 1 Click File Save 2 Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the file 3 Type the query name in the File name box Creating multi table BE oueries Paradox lets you retrieve data from two or more tables by allowing you to create multi table queries In this way a multi table query is similar to a multi table form or report If you have already created a data model for the purpose of creating a form or report you can base your multi table query on the same data model For more information on creating data models see
207. dialog box and click the dialog control for which you want help To install Adobe Acrobat Reader Insert the WordPerfect Office 2002 CD into the CD ROM drive If the Setup Wizard does not start automatically click the Start button on the Windows taskbar and click Run Type D SETUP where D is the letter that corresponds to the CD ROM drive in the Open box Click Adobe Acrobat Reader Setup Follow the instructions in the Adobe Acrobat Reader setup application To view information about using Adobe Acrobat readers e In the Adobe Acrobat reader you are using click Help Acrobat Online Guide PerfectExpert WordPerfect Office 2002 provides an Expert to help you with many common tasks The PerfectExpert includes the best features of QuickTasks templates and Coaches which were included in earlier versions of WordPerfect Office 2002 applications The PerfectExpert can guide you through a detailed project such as creating a resume or it can guide you through a smaller task such as inserting a clipart image The PerfectExpert even 22 Introduction provides you with galleries of professionally designed documents to choose from whose layout and content you can change to match your needs SE E gt WordPerfect Start X Write a Draft Set Up the Document Typing Formatting Add Visual Elements Edit and Proofread Finish Tip Ss Create a wide variety of documents quickly and easily with WordPerfect
208. disable the Skew text check box SY Adjusting table column widths You can specify an exact table column width change unequal table columns so that they have equal widths or change table column widths automatically To adjust table column widths automatically 1 Click in a table 2 Click Table gt Size column to fit Ar The Size column to fit option changes a table column to the width of the widest text in the column cells Creating table header rows and adjusting Table rows You can create a table header row A header row displays at the top of the page each time the table spans a page break Using tables and charts 107 You can allow a table row to continue across pages You can also change the height of a table row and the number of text lines per row and you can align a table between the left and right page margins To create A Table header Row 1 Select a row or several rows Click Table Format 2 3 Click the Row tab 4 Enable the Header row check box Applying fills lines and color to tables You can change the fill line style and line color of a cell a group of cells or an entire table WordPerfect lets you create contrast between cells rows and columns by applying an alternating fill to a table A fill style consists of a fill type and foreground and background colors A fill type can be either a pattern such as a checkerboard or fill percentage or a gradient which displays a progression between two colo
209. diting tool used to change matching values Inserts a specified value into records Deletes records with specified values Defines a record set of matching values for set comparisons Summary operators Definition CALC AVERAGE CALC COUNT CALC MAX CALC MIN CALC SUM CALC ALL CALC UNIQUE Calculates the average of the values Displays the total number of matching values Displays the highest value for the field Displays the lowest value for the field Provides the total of the values for the field Calculates a summary based on all the values in a group including duplicates Calculates a summary based on all the unique values in a group Set comparison operators Definition ONLY Display only those values matching values in a defined set NO Display only those values that do not match any values in the defined set EVERY Display only values that match every value in a defined set 382 Paradox 10 Set comparison operators EXACTLY Definition Display only values that match all the values of a defined set and no others From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Using Query By Example Multi table queries Query operators query by example multi table queries query operators Working with oueries 383 Working with ObjectPAL ObjectPAL Object Paradox Application Language is an object based event driven visual programming languag
210. djusting arar ae eo ae ce as oe Sa 201 files 221 changing 2 we ee 199 separating increasing eee 201 joined cells 203 restoring default 2 2 1 200 serial integers 184 rows series adding eo Ae od e e e ta TOP QuickFill 186 CrossTab reports 0 235 setting deleting 167 168 margins 211 A A gt settings Hidifigs cds e War oe ke e Was Ghee 201 application 2 ee 70 171 inserting 2 gae e 167 changing margin e eo 212 joining cells 208 compatibility 2 170 172 navigating 2 ee eee 163 display 170 parsing ve q biog Boas ott A od e 228 225 file open 172 QuickFill 2 186 file options 170 PESIZING E Gir yh Wat a o 98 file save 172 restoring default height 200 general 170 restricting 2 2 167 168 international 170 revealing wee 2201 macros 170 selecting io ay te GB oe Ae ee hs a oe ae C165 notebook size 172 setting number of 2 2 2 1 182 property 170 totaling using QuickSum ww 188 shortcut keys 163 transposing 2 eee 197 198 shortcuts running calculations 2 2 ww 89 keyboard 163 mnemonics 163 showing S CrossTab report column summaries 235 saving signs database files 2 220 mathematical 187 Al formats 2 e e a a a 99 simple calculations 187 notebooks a 178 179 simple equations 187
211. document and choose the location of the form file to merge Click Data source and choose the location of the data file to merge Click Output and choose one of the following e Current document e New document Printer Click Merge You can also Stop a merge in progress Press ESC Save the merged file to disk Click Output gt File on disk Choose the folder drive and where you want to save the file Type a filename in the Filename list box Click Select Ds You can also perform a keyboard merge by clicking Merge on the Merge toolbar For V more information about using the Merge toolbar see Using the Merge toolbar in the online Help To merge To envelopes 1 N Click Tools Merge Click Form document and choose the location of the form document If you are merging envelopes only click Current document as the location of the form file Click Data source and choose the location of the data file Click Envelopes Insert fields in the form document Click Close Click Continue merge on the Merge toolbar Click Output and choose a location for the merged file N The merged envelopes are placed at the end of the merged file If there is an existing envelope for this document you can edit cancel or define the envelope For more information about creating envelopes see Creating envelopes in the online Help To merge To email 1 2 3 4 5 Click Tools Merge Click For
212. e 1 Click Format gt Layout Gallery 2 Click the Appearance tab 3 Click a layout on the Layouts palette 7 You can add up to 30 different layouts to a slide show Creating slide show layouts and backqrounds Creating new slide show layouts and backgrounds is an alternative to applying preset formats The layout layer of a slide can consist of titles subtitles bulleted lists data charts and organization charts To create a slide show layout 1 Click Edit Layout layer Click Insert New layout Type a layout name in the Name box Click OK Insert any objects into the layout uk WN 270 Corel Presentatons 10 No When you insert a text object such as a text box or a text line into a slide show layout you must type placeholder text in it To create a slide show backqround 1 Click Edit Background layer Click Insert New background Click OK uk WN From here For more information about Type a background name in the Name box Insert any objects into the background In the online Help Index type Editing the background layer of slides Renaming the background layer of slides Deleting the background layer of slides Applying different color and fills to background layers Editing the layout layer of slides Renaming the layout layer of slides Deleting the layout layer of slides Adding new masters to the Master Gallery background layers editing background layers renaming bac
213. e You can use ObjectPAL to customize applications with new buttons menus dialog boxes prompts warnings and online Help ObjectPAL can be used to extend the regular Paradox functions or to create non database applications ObjectPAL and Paradox are tightly integrated the more you know about Paradox the more you can take advantage of it in your ObjectPAL programming If you think of ObjectPAL as a tool that extends the power of Paradox you can discover ways of using the language to perform tasks that would be awkward difficult time consuming or impossible to perform without it ObjectPAL supports variables control structures such as IF FOR WHILE LOOP and many of the same data types as other programming languages You can use methods and procedures supplied by ObjectPAL or you can create your own custom methods and custom procedures Object based ObjectPAL works with objects You create and work with objects such as fields lines ellipses pushbuttons and table frames when you design forms and reports A formal definition states that an object consists of data and code In ObjectPAL terms objects have properties color position and line width and methods code that defines how the object behaves properties are data methods are code Paradox recognizes two kinds of objects Design objects and Data objects Design objects such as buttons list boxes and other UI Objects are used in forms Data objects are files data typ
214. e and finally you can list and view the methods and procedures on the call stack those called since your form started running Using the ObjectPAL Editor The ObjectPAL Editor provides the location for you to add new code or edit existing code You can also copy cut and paste code from code examples available in the ObjectPAL Help into the Editor window The Editor window contains two list boxes under the title bar The list box on the left allows you to move between the objects in your document The list box on the right shows all possible events or methods for the object selected To View ObjectPAL code 1 Click View gt Design form 2 Select an object on the form 3 Click Tools Object explorer 4 Click the Events tab or the Methods tab All events or methods associated with that object are listed ul Double click a method or event All methods and events that have code attached to them will have a blue dot appearing beside the method or event name Lia Within the Editor window you can select any type or method name and press F1 to get help on that type or method If there is only one help topic for the selected item pressing F1 takes you directly to that topic If help contains multiple topics for the selected word you ll see a list of topics Choose a topic and click Display ObjectPAL Help The Paradox online Help contains a separate file on ObjectPAL called ObjectPAL Reference This file introduces you to the basi
215. e the chart to a different place in the document it maintains its association with the table The following image is an example of a data chart Lorem Ipsum vw br ql When you create a chart in WordPerfect Corel Presentations menus and tools display These menus and tools let you choose a chart type and edit the chart You can choose from a variety of chart types such as bar line and pie and you can add chart attributes such as a legend or frame You can also use Corel Presentations to add text to charts however the text is saved as part of the chart rather than with the document You can create an organization chart to display the structure of an organization or the relationships of people and positions Using tables and charts 111 The following image is an example of an organization chart rm hrar aam bes 1 bee a ci a h y E a You can edit and update charts and graphs You can also edit the data that the chart is based on You can use the data in a table to create a chart containing the same information When you create a chart from a table the two are associated You can specify that charts associated with tables automatically update when you make changes to the data in the tables For more information about charts refer to the Corel Presentations online Help To create A data chart Click where you want to insert a chart Click Insert Chart Click Cha
216. e 2002 e Windows 98 Windows 2000 Windows NT 4 0 with SP6 or higher or Windows Me Pentium 166 MHz processor e 16 MB Ram 32 MB recommended 150 MB hard disk space 280 MB typical install e CD ROM drive e VGA monitor e Mouse or tablet The following are the minimum system requirements for WordPerfect Office 2002 Professional Edition with Dragon NaturallySpeaking e Windows 98 Windows 2000 Windows NT 4 0 with SP6 or higher or Windows Me e Pentium 266 MHz processor 64 MB Ram 32 MB recommended e 260 MB hard disk space 380 MB typical install CD ROM drive e VGA monitor Mouse or tablet Installing WordPerfect Office 2002 e 16 bit sound card or built in audio input quality equal to or greater than Soundblaster 16 Speaker required for sound output ae Additional hardware may be required for laptop installation Setting up WordPerfect Office 2002 The WordPerfect Office 2002 Setup application installs all the main applications and components To Install WordPerfect Office 2002 applications Insert the WordPerfect Office 2002 CD into the CD ROM drive If the WordPerfect Office 2002 Setup screen does not display click the Start button on the Windows taskbar and click Run Type D SETUP32 where D is the letter corresponding to the CD ROM drive in the Open box 2 Click WordPerfect Office 2002 Setup If you want to read the WordPerfect Office 2002 Release Notes click the Release Notes button The
217. e Name list box 4 Type a value in the Number of copies box 5 Click Print You can also Print the current page or slide only In the Print range area enable the Current view option Print a specific object in a slide or drawing In the Print range area enable the Selected objects option Print a range of slides In the Print range area enable the Slides option and type a slide range in the box beside it Print handouts In the Print range area enable the Handouts option and type a slide range in the box beside it Type a value in the Number of slides per page box Print speaker notes In the Print range area enable the Speaker notes option and type a slide range in the box beside it Type a value in the Number of slides per page box Print audience notes In the Print range area enable the Audience notes option and type a slide range in the box beside it Type a value in the Number of slides per page box Print to a file In the Destination area enable the Print to file check box Click Print In the Print to file dialog box choose the drive and folder where you want to print the file Type a filename in the Filename box Click Save No When printing speaker notes the font size may vary to accommodate the amount of text you are printing For example the more text that is added to the speaker notes box the smaller the font is when you print speaker notes If there is too much text in the speaker notes box not all of
218. e a number 3 Press ENTER To enter fractions 1 Click a cell 2 Type a number as a decimal 3 Press ENTER 4 Click the cell Click Format Selection properties 5 6 Click the Numeric format tab 7 Choose Fraction from the Numeric formats list 8 Choose a type from the Fraction list To ENTER A dATE OR TIME 1 Click a cell 2 Type a date or time 3 Press ENTER To enter The CURRENT daTE 1 Click a cell 2 Click Insert Date Quattro Pro inserts the short date format specified in Windows Regional Settings on the Control Panel PS You can also enter the current date by clicking a cell and pressing CTRL D ES Creating A spreadsheet 187 To enter A date using the spreadsheet DATE Function Click a cell Click Insert gt Insert function Choose Date from the Function category list Choose DATE from the Function list Click OK Type the date year month and day between parentheses Press ENTER N DU aqu No Filling cells and spreadsheet tabs automatically Quattro Pro lets you automatically enter repeated labels and functions Once the initial letters or sequence you are typing is recognized the data is automatically inserted As you type a function the likeliest function displays You can fill cells automatically You can save time by automatically filling cells with a sequence that you start with a seed value You can also fill spreadsheet tabs automatically To automatically insert Repeat
219. e a week from the Week list box If you want to schedule a task for specific days enable any of the check boxes in the On day s area Scheduling events in A calendar Events can be scheduled in several ways in a calendar You can schedule one occurrence of an event and you can schedule a weekly event For example you can schedule a weekly meeting or appointment to display in a calendar on the day you specify 412 Corel CENTRAL 10 You can assign a task to an event To schedule An EVENT in A calendar 1 2 3 Click Calendar gt New event Click the Events tab Type a subject in the Subject box Ifyou want to schedule a location type text in the Room box Click the Mini calendar button in the Date box and click a date Choose a time from the Start list box Choose a duration from the Duration list box Ifyou want to include comments about the event type text in the Notes box You can also Schedule an all day event Enable the All day event check box Assign an icon to the event Click the Down arrow button next to the Subject list box and choose an icon Delete an event Right click an event and click Delete event To schedule a weekly event in a calendar 1 2 3 O NOU A To Click Calendar gt New event Click the Events tab Type a subject in the Subject box If you want to specify a location type text in the Room box Click the Mini calendar button in the Date box and click a date
220. e columns on the screen are labeled A C D and so on You can reveal rows and columns that are hidden To hide rows or columns 1 Select the rows or columns to hide 2 Right click the rows or columns and click Hide To reveal hidden columns 1 Click Edit Select all 2 Click Format gt Selection properties 3 Click the Row column tab 4 Enable the Reveal option in the Column options area You can also reveal a hidden column by placing the pointer slightly to the right of AY where the hidden column should be and dragging S You can reveal hidden rows by enabling the Reveal option in the Row options area Using Formatting tools to format a spreadsheet Quattro Pro lets you format a spreadsheet by copying the formatting background color font numeric format and so on of one cell to another cell or selection of cells You can apply a predesigned format to data You can also add a format to the predesigned format list This formatting overrides any existing cell property settings To copy cell Formatting 1 Click the cell or cells with the format you want to copy 2 Click the QuickFormat button on the toolbar 3 Select the cell or cells where you want to copy the formatting Editing and formatting a spreadsheet 201 DS To turn off QuickFormat click the QuickFormat e button on the toolbar To apply a predesiqned formar 1 Select the cells to format 2 Click Format gt SpeedFormat 3 Choose a form
221. e drive and folder where the form is stored Double click a form Click View gt Design form uk WN Click an object to select it You may have to click the object more than once Selection handles appear around the object when it is selected Right click the object and click Properties 7 Click the General tab Click a color n the palette Ar The Color property is only available for certain types of design objects Using forms To add edit or delete records A form is a useful tool for accessing the data in your tables because it presents the data in an easy to understand format You can use forms to add edit or delete records To add a record usinq A form 1 Click File Open gt Form 2 Choose the drive and folder where the form is stored 3 Double click a form 4 Click View gt Edit data 5 Click Record gt Insert 6 Type data in the fields Press TAB to move from one record to the next To edit an EXisTING record USING A form 1 Click File Open gt Form 2 Choose the drive and folder where the form is stored 3 Double click a form 4 Click View gt Edit data 5 Click the field you want to edit 6 Type new data in the field To delete a Record using A form Click File Open Form Choose the drive and folder where the form is stored Double click a form Click View Edit data Click the record you want to delete Click Record Delete nau FWN 368 Paradox 10 NT You cannot retri
222. e following image shows examples of preset bullet formats Using lists and outlines 77 To create A bulleted list 1 Click in a document 2 Click Insert gt Outline bullets amp numbering 3 Click the Bullets tab 4 Choose a bullet style from the Description list box 5 Click OK 6 Type the text and press ENTER Perform this step for each entry in the list 7 Press BACKSPACE to discontinue the list QS You can also create a bulleted list by clicking the Bullets picker E on the toolbar To enable QuickBullets 1 Click Tools QuickCorrect 2 Click the Format As You Go tab 3 Enable the QuickBullets check box ae QuickBullets are disabled by default in WordPerfect 10 To create A bulleted list by using QuickBullets 1 Click in a document 2 Type a QuickBullet character 3 Press TAB 4 Type the text and press ENTER Perform this step for each entry in the list 5 Press BACKSPACE to discontinue the list If you do not want one of the characters in the QuickBullets list to begin a bulleted a on a list add it to the QuickCorrect list For information about QuickCorrect see Correcting misspelled words automatically in the online Help To create a custom symbol bullet 1 Click in a document 2 Click Insert gt Outline bullets amp numbering 3 Click the Bullets tab 4 Click More bullets 5 Inthe Symbols dialog box choose a set of symbols from the Set list box 6 Choose a symbol from the Symbols list
223. e memo e Copy copies the selected text into another memo A Select a memo to which you want to copy or move text ul Click in the Type the memo text here box 6 Click Edit gt Paste CATEGORIZING MEMOS CorelCENTRAL Memos lets you create categories that you can use to organize memos When you start CorelCENTRAL Memos the All Memos category displays and contains all memos from every category The Unfiled category contains all memos that have not been placed in a category You can move memos from these categories to others that you create To CREATE A MEMO CATEGORY 1 Click Category Add 2 Type a name in the New category name box To move A MEMO TO ANOThER CATEGORY 1 Select a memo 2 Click Category Move to category 3 Choose a category from the Select the new category list box From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Customizing display of memos memo categories Publishing memos in HTML memos publishing in HTML 422 Corel CENTRAL 10 7 Usin Corel CENTRAL Alarms CorelCENTRAL Alarms lets you use your computer as an alarm clock to remind you of the events that you have scheduled in Corel CENTRAL Calendar and CorelCENTRAL Day Planner You can also use CorelCENTRAL Alarms independently of CorelCENTRAL to create alarms that sound at specific times and dates To hear alarms you need a sound card properly installed on your computer If you do not have a s
224. e of graphics applications is continually evolving to meet the demands of the corporate retail and academic users Committed to value compatibility choice and open standards Corel develops products for the Windows Macintosh UNIX and Linux platforms Corel s common stock trades on the NASDAQ Stock Market under the symbol CORL and on the Toronto Stock Exchange under the symbol COR WordPerfect Office 2002 applications This section describes the major applications included in WordPerfect Office 2002 Not all WordPerfect Office 2002 editions include all the applications described in this section For example WordPerfect Office 2002 Standard Edition does not include Paradox while the Professional Edition does You can find more information about each of these applications in other sections of this user guide and in the online Help files WordPerfect 10 WordPerfect 10 is a word processing application that lets you produce professional looking documents such as newsletters articles reports books proposals legal pleadings and brochures WordPerfect 10 makes it easy to add graphics charts and tables to any document WordPerfect 10 continues to support reveal codes which lets you control every element of a document WordPerfect 10 also has enhanced publishing features which let you create a document and publish it to paper electronic media and the World Wide Web You can also use WordPerfect 10 to create edit retrieve valid
225. e spreadsheet name in the address For example to move to cell Z36 on spreadsheet D type D Z36 If the cell is in another notebook add the notebook prefix for example Budget D Z36 You can also Go to a named cell Choose the cell or group name from the Names box Go to a named spreadsheet in the current Choose the spreadsheet name from the Sheets notebook box Go to the most recently edited cells Choose a cell location from the Last edited box Go to a cell type Choose a cell type from the Other box To browse to specific data in a notebook 1 Right click the Browse By button in the lower right corner of the spreadsheet 2 Choose a data type 164 Quattro Pro 10 Selecting cells rows and columns You can select cells individually or in rows columns blocks or 3 D blocks When you select a cell a black bordered rectangle appears to indicate the active cell This rectangle is called the selector You can set the selector to move when you press the ENTER key You can select noncontiguous cells allowing you to write formulas that refer to various selections in different locations You can also select 3 D blocks of cells which is a group of cells selected on more than one spreadsheet For example A2 B5 on sheets A through D is a 3 D selection The syntax for 3 D selections can also be changed to suit your specific needs When you need to enter cell references in dialog boxes it is usually easier to select the cells
226. e style picker and click a line style To edit the border of a page Click a page Click Format gt Page gt Border fill Choose a border pattern from the Available border styles list Open the Color picker and click a color uk WN Open the Line style picker and click a line style If you want to adjust the spacing inside and outside the border click the Advanced tab Removing borders You can remove a border from a graphics box column paragraph or page To remove a border from a graphics box 1 Right click a graphic and click Border fill 2 Click Discontinue To remove a border From a column 1 Click a column border 2 Click Format Columns gt Border fill 3 Click Discontinue Applying borders and fills 117 To remove a border from A paragraph or page 1 Click a paragraph or page border 2 Click Format and click one of the following e Paragraph gt Border fill lets you change border options for a paragraph Page gt Border fill lets you change border options for a page 3 Click Discontinue Applying Fills You can add or edit a fill You can add gradient fills to a graphics box column paragraph or page To add or edir a fill 1 Right click a graphic and click Border fill 2 Click the Fill tab 3 Choose a pattern from the Available fill styles list 4 Click a color on any of the following palettes Foreground Background To add gradient fills to a qraphics box 1 Right click a gra
227. e the data chart Enable the Place legend inside chart check box Adding titles to data charts You can add a title and subtitle in a data chart To add a data chart title 1 Double click a data chart Click Chart Title Click the Title options tab Enable the Display chart title check box and type a chart title name in the box Ja Ra U N Enable an option in the Position area To add a data chart subtitle 1 Double click a data chart Click Chart Subtitle Click the Subtitle options tab Enable the Display chart subtitle check box and type a subtitle name in the box uk WN Enable an option in the Position area Labeling data charts Adding labels to data charts and pie charts lets you identify data To label a data chart 1 Double click a chart 2 Click Chart Data labels 3 Enable the Display data labels check box 4 Click the Position tab 5 Click one of the following Inside e Outside From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Updating data charts data charts updating Formatting data chart titles data charts formatting titles Including clipart in data charts data charts including clipart Saving data chart styles data chart styles saving Retrieving data chart styles data chart styles retrieving Working with data charts 307 From here For more information about Formatting area charts Formatting bar charts Formatting bubble charts Formatting high
228. e work area work areas exploring Welcome to Corel Presentations 10 279 CREATING slide shows and drawings Corel Presentations 10 includes comprehensive slide show tools that allow you to create professional looking slide shows and drawings In this section you ll learn about using slide show views opening new slide shows e saving slide shows e working with the Slide Outliner e adding and removing slides e working with the Slide Sorter e creating portable slide shows e creating and saving drawings Using slide show views You can create edit and sort a slide show in three views You can use the Slide Editor to add view and edit the text objects and charts of individual slides The Slide Editor is also used to specify slide properties for the slides in a slide show You can use the Slide Outliner to create an outline for a slide show You can specify a layout and then type the text for each slide For more information about the Slide Outliner see Working with the Slide Outliner on page 262 The Slide Sorter displays thumbnail sketches of each slide in a slide show You can select slide properties and display detailed information about the settings used for each slide in the current slide show For more information about sorting slides see Working with the Slide Sorter on page 263 You can switch between each of these slide show views To switch between slide show views e Click View an
229. ea enable one of the following options All printers lets you display page size definitions for all installed printers e Current printer only lets you display page size definitions for the selected printer FORMATTING PAGES 47 No The default paper source is the source specified in the Windows printer properties for the selected printer Choose Manual feed from the Source list box in the Edit page definition dialog box only if you put paper in the printer manually one sheet at a time To delete a page size definition 1 Click File Page setup 2 Click the Page setup tab 3 Choose a page size from the Page definition list box 4 Click the Delete form button Gy lp When you delete a page size definition you can no longer use that definition a document can print with a similar page definition but it may not be an exact match Ds All printers have a nonprintable zone If information is formatted to print in this area S WY itwill not print To shift information out of the nonprintable zone you must specify printing adjustments when you define the page size Setting single sided or double sided pages for a document You can set either single or double sided pages for a document To set single sided pages for a document 1 Click File Page setup 2 Click the Layout tab 3 In the Two sided printing area enable the Off option To set double sided pages for a document 1 Click File Page setup 2 Click the
230. eb Dragon NaturallySpeaking features a high level of speed and accuracy and because of its ability to learn the speed and accuracy of the software increase with each use Dragon NaturallySpeaking is integrated in WordPerfect Ds Not all WordPerfect Office 2002 editions include Dragon NaturallySpeaking Sy Eouation editor Equation Editor lets you insert and format mathematical and scientific equations in a WordPerfect document To start the editor click Insert Equation For more information refer to the online Help in the Equation Editor window Fonts clipart and photos To help you enhance your documents WordPerfect Office 2002 offers an extensive collection of fonts clipart and photos WordPerfect Office 2002 provides e more than 1 000 TrueType fonts When you install WordPerfect Office 2002 using Typical Installation a default set of fonts is installed automatically Fonts are grouped by style and appearance to help you find the font you need Type 1 fonts may be downloaded from the Web e 12 000 clipart images and symbols to help communicate your ideas and make your documents more interesting WordPerfect Office 2002 includes a full color Libraries Catalog in PDF format to help you find the clipart image or symbol you need WordPerfect Office 2002 also lets you use the Scrapbook to search for clipart images or symbols by keyword or file name e more than 200 photos which you can add to your documents and presentations Fo
231. eck box Playing slide shows 289 Li The time delay begins the second the first slide displays on the screen Time delays also apply to animated images For example if you set a two second time delay for a slide the first animated object automatically displays two seconds after the slide appears The next animated object follows two seconds later and so on Two seconds after the last animated object displays the show advances to the next slide Ds You can also apply a different time delay to each slide in a slide show by selecting an individual slide To play a slide show by using QuickPlay 1 Click a tab on the bottom of the slide show window 2 Click the QuickPlay tab on the side of the slide show window 3 Press ESC to stop playing the slide show a When QuickPlay reaches the end of the show it returns to the slide show window To play a portable slide show 1 Insert a disk containing a slide show into the floppy disk drive 2 Click Start on the Windows taskbar and click Run 3 Inthe Open box type the path and filename of the portable slide show From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Speeding up slide shows slide shows speeding up Using the slide highlighter slide highlighter using 290 Corel Presentations 10 Drawing and editing shapes You can enhance Corel Presentations slides and drawings with seven categories of preset shapes line basic arrow flowchart sta
232. ect area enable the Keep selected text together on same page check box Ar If you keep several consecutive paragraphs together you must separate each paragraph by at least one soft or hard return otherwise they are treated as one large block of text Correcting capitalization You can quickly change a word or selected text to all uppercase or lowercase letters or to lowercase letters with initial caps Lowercase and initial capitals exceptions are as follows e Words beginning with I such as I m Pd I ve and the first word in each sentence remain capitalized when you convert text to lowercase e When you convert text to initial capitals the first letter of each word is capitalized except for articles prepositions conjunctions and some pronouns If you want to specify additional capitalization exceptions you can edit the Wt9xx icr file where xx is a language code in Program files Corel Shared Writing tools 9 0 You can change capitalization after the end of a sentence You can specify that when you change capitalization after the end of a sentence the entry is automatically added as an exception item You can also remove exception items To change capitalization 1 Select the text for which you want to change capitalization 2 Click Edit Convert case and click one of the following FORMATTING TEXT 67 e Lowercase changes all letters to lowercase e Uppercase changes all letter
233. ect finds the best match for a page definition selecting from those available with the other printer Ifthe match does not work you may need to edit or re create the definition To select a preset PAGE size definition 1 Click File Page setup 2 Click the Page setup tab 3 Choose a page definition from the Page definition list box 4 Enable one of the following options e Portrait prints text and graphics on a page whose height is greater than its width e Landscape prints text and graphics on a page whose width is greater than its height 5 Inthe Apply to area enable one of the following options e Current and following pages applies the page definitions to the current and following pages e Current page only applies the page definitions to the current page only Entire document applies the page definitions to the entire document Editing and deleting page size definitions WordPerfect uses a page size definition to format pages Once you have created or selected a page size definition you can edit it or delete it To edit a page size definition 1 Click File Page setup Click the Page setup tab Click the Edit form button FE In the Edit page definition dialog box choose a paper source from the Source list box uk WN In the Printing adjustments area choose an adjustment from any of the following list boxes and type a value in the box beside it e Vertical e Horizontal 6 In the Show page size for ar
234. ed ALT F2 Find previous e SHIFT F2 Find next Corel Connector The Corel Connector including the Web Connector Active X WCAX control provides users with the ability to conveniently access Web information from all of Corel s Web ventures including items such as product specific information web services portal information and Corel related information Oxford Pocket Dictionary The Oxford Pocket Dictionary contains approximately 30 000 words and allows users to look up the spelling definitions and phonetics of words Accessibility Corel is committed to supporting the special needs community We are a proud supporter of accessible software that promotes quality of life employability and independence for disabled persons Corel Presentations is now accessible to users with disabilities and includes information in the Help about how to make the application suit individual needs For more information about making Corel Presentations accessible see Using Accessibility features in the online Help Large icon support is now available 278 Corel Presentations 10 What s different in Corel Presentations 10 This section summarizes a few of the changes made in Corel Presentations 10 Enhanced Microsoft PowerPoint filter Both the import and export filters for Microsoft Power Point 95 and 97 have been enhanced to provide better support for such items as bulleted text titles subtitles background layers a
235. ed data 1 Click Tools gt Settings In the list of categories double click Workspaces Application and click General Enable the QuickType check box Click OK Type text in a cell uk WN Ne The blank cells to be filled must be contiguous with the seed value extending down the column or across the row to the right To fill empty cells automatically 1 Select the cells 2 Click Edit gt Fill gt QuickFill 3 Choose a series from the Series name list box 4 Choose an element from the Series elements list 5 In the Fill as area enable one of the following options e Columns fills to the bottom of the first column of cells and continues at the top of the second column e Rows fills to the end or the first row of cells and continues at the beginning of the second row Ds You can also open the QuickFill dialog box by clicking the QuickFill button on the notebook toolbar You can create a new series using part of an existing series by modifying the series and saving it under another name 186 Quarrro Pro 10 To fill cells automatically using seed values 1 Type a seed value in a cell 2 Select the seed value cell and the blank cells you want to fill 3 Click Edit gt Fill gt QuickFill DS You can also fill cells automatically by clicking the QuickFill E button on the SN notebook toolbar To fill spreadsheet tabs automatically 1 Select an empty cell 2 Click Edit gt Fill QuickFill 3
236. ed functions see Querying databases in the online Help The following image illustrates a query that calculates the value of a parts inventory To perform a calculation on a field using A Query Click File New Query Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored Double click a table Enable the check boxes for each of the fields you want to include in the Answer table Press F5 Type example elements in the fields you want to use in the calculation nau BaOGQqNnN You must press F5 before typing each example element 7 Type the formula you want to use in an unused field You must press F5 before typing each example element in the formula 8 Click Query Run query Query OPERATORS You can build complex queries by using query operators There are seven categories of operators that you can use to retrieve matching records display a range of data perform calculations search with a minimum of information using wildcards change data and compare sets of records 380 Paradox 10 Comparison operators Definition Equal to Greater than can be used in combination with lt to define a search range Less than can be used in combination with gt to define a search range Greater than or equal to Less than or equal to Arithmetic operators Definition Add numbers or join alphanumeric values Subtract Multiply Divide Give precedence to Wildcard Op
237. efault template Project templates can include fax cover sheets memos newsletters and brochures For more information about templates see Using project templates in the online Help Macros Macros are used to automate application tasks For example you can use WordPerfect macros to set margins select a font or create a merge file For more information about macros see Recordings macros and automation features in the online Help Creating documents You can create a document in WordPerfect by opening a blank document window Every document you create is based on a template Even a blank document is based on the default template which includes formatting elements such as the margins tab settings and toolbars WordPerfect also includes ready made project templates that you can open and use to create a wide range of documents including letters fax cover sheets calendars and business cards For more information about templates see Using project templates in the online Help To create a document by using the default template e Click File New To create a document by using the project template 1 Click File New from project 2 Choose the type of project you want to create from the Create new list box 3 Click the Create button 4 Click any of the appropriate buttons on the PerfectExpert panel Ds You can also create a new document by clicking the New blank document button e 5 on the toolbar Opening do
238. egative number However if you change the numeric format to currency or a value with a decimal negative numbers appear in parentheses Do not include spaces in the entry e Ifanumber does not fit into a cell it is displayed in exponential format e Use numeric characters not letters to represent 1 and 0 For example do not substitute a lowercase el for 1 one or an uppercase O oh for O zero Quattro Pro also lets you enter numbers as fractions You can enter a date or time in a cell While Quattro Pro reads dates and times as values it applies specific formatting and calculation criteria to them depending on the date and time 184 Quattro Pro 10 formats you set as defaults Dates or times can be in many formats such as 04 04 98 04 04 98 and 01 42 30 PM Quattro Pro stores all dates as serial integers and times as decimal fractions so that it can calculate dates and times as values The minimum serial integer is 109 571 which represents January 1 1600 the maximum is 474 816 which represents December 31 3199 The minimum decimal fraction for time is 0 99999 for the time 23 59 59 and the maximum is 0 000 for 00 00 00 The serial integer or decimal fraction appears in the input line when you select a cell A cell containing a serial integer mixed with a decimal fraction indicates the date and time For example 2 5 represents January 1 1900 at 12 00 noon To enter A numbeR 1 Click a cell 2 Typ
239. elCENTRAL custom sounds 424 compatibility 405 editing 424 getting started 407 Quick 0424 menu bar 408 setting 423 424 Net2Phone 203 new features 404 quitting 407 408 C starting ac 407 starting an application 407 calend rs starting from CorelCENTRAL Day Planner 407 choosing 3 me ALl starting from Windows 407 o times E status bar 408 ae title bar 408 creating local 410 toolbar 408 esguna remote 410 walcanie 403 group rao work area x 408 Opening 409 410 CorelCENTRAL Admin scheduling events 413 about eae 405 scheduling single tasks 412 t schedulingtasks wa creating calendar databases 409 schadaling w dkdly tasks T opening calendar databases 409 CorelCENTRAL Alarms selecting dates 411 istom dunde 424 selecting specific dates 411 deleting 424 setting a default 410 a tak 414 setting 423 starting 423 ard file templates ie from the DAD 423 ane 2 starting from Windows 423 any using o 423 saying Aeth CorelCENTRAL Calendar o 416 creating calendars 409 closing 416 EENES ee comment fields 418 sine caine oe creating g 416 o pe creating comment fields 418 Saif A ree A 409 dde linked fields pa CorelCENTRAL Card File local fields 418 dd 415 Index Corel CENTRAL 10 429 templates 415 to folders yo wo ioy wut 419 USING fee e e a A re S tomemos e a 2 419 CorelCENTRAL Mail to Websites 2 419 about oo 6 s osoro os a
240. em variables By using programming commands with product commands you can automate long or complex tasks WordPerfect Office 2002 provides detailed online Help files for WordPerfect Quattro Pro Corel Presentations and PerfectScript macro commands These files contain information about macro commands and their syntax and additional instructions and examples Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications More than three million software developers worldwide use Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications VBA to create custom business solutions VBA integrated in WordPerfect Quattro Pro Corel Presentations and CorelCENTRAL can be used by developers to build custom solutions VBA integrates its development capabilities with host applications When you use VBA to extend WordPerfect Office 2002 applications you can benefit from the Visual Basic programming language an integrated Rapid Application Development RAD environment and fast runtime performance You can also benefit from Microsoft Forms Package and support for ActiveX controls to create custom user interfaces provide access to the Windows API and the underlying file system add connectivity to corporate data and integrate applications with other Component Object Model based applications Quick View Plus Quick View Plus is an application designed to let you share files with ease You can view copy and print the contents of more than 200 Windows MS DOS Macintosh and Internet file
241. en 2 Open the primary notebook and any relevant supporting files 3 Type a wildcard character in place of the filenames in the link NM Me When you finish entering the link the formula is revised to include specific filenames This means that if you open new files after using a wildcard in a link they are not referenced in the formula To link cells 1 Inthe source notebook select the cells you want to link 2 Click Edit gt Copy 3 In the destination notebook select the upper left cell of the destination cells for the links 4 Click Edit Paste special 5 Click Link MMe Each copied cell contains a formula beginning with a plus sign followed by the filename in parentheses if different from the active notebook the sheet name and a colon if different from the active sheet and the cell address 228 Quattro Pro 10 To link dara berween applications 1 In the source application select the data you want to link to from Quattro Pro 2 Click Edit Copy 3 In Quattro Pro click the cell where you want to place the linked data 4 Click Edit Paste special 5 Enable the Paste link option 6 Choose a file format from the As box Li You can link contiguous and noncontiguous selections 4 ES Sf Each copied cell contains a formula beginning with a plus sign followed by the filename in parentheses if different from the active notebook the sheet name and a colon if different from the active sheet and the cel
242. eneral tab Click a color on the palette o N A UU BWN Adding a chart TO A REPORT A chart is a graphic representation of data The Chart Expert lets you add a chart to your report based on data from an existing table or from a table that is generated by a query Once the Chart Expert has finished adding a chart to your report you can resize or move it as required To add a chart TO A REPORT Click File Open Report Choose the drive and folder where the report is stored Double click a report Click View Design report Click the Chart tool th Click the location in the report where you would like to see the chart appear NOU ah qu No Follow the steps of the Expert Li If the Chart Expert is not launched automatically click Tools Settings Preferences ARES Click the Expert tab and select the Run experts when creating objects on a document check box To resize a chart 1 Click the chart 2 Drag a selection handle to resize the chart 374 Paradox 10 To move a chart 1 Click the chart 2 Drag the chart to a different area of the report PREVIEWING A REPORT When you are working with your report in the Report Design window you can switch the view at any time to see what the document looks like with your information displayed on it Button Action First Page E Move to the first page of the report Previous Page 3 Move back one page Next Page Move forward one page Last Page si Move t
243. er where the form is stored Double click a form Click View gt Design form Click the Button tool i nu FWN Follow the steps of the Expert oe If the Button Expert is not launched automatically click Tools Settings gt Preferences Click the Expert tab and enable the Run experts when creating objects on a document check box Moving or deleting objects Each field button and text item on your form is treated as a separate object These objects can be moved and deleted To move an object on a form 1 Click File Open gt Form Choose the drive and folder where the form is stored Double click a form Click View Design form uk U N Click an object to select it You may have to click the object more than once Selection handles appear around the object when it is selected 6 Drag the object to a new position on the form To delete an object on a form Click File Open gt Form Choose the drive and folder where the form is stored Double click a form Click View gt Design form uk U N e Click an object to select it You may have to click the object more than once Selection handles appear around the object when it is selected 6 Press DELETE Changing the color of objects Color can be used to create visual interest on your form or to focus attention on a particular object Working with forms 367 To change the color of an object 1 Click File Open gt Form Choose th
244. erators Definition Matches any single character in inexact matches must be used in combination with if used in a memo or formatted memo field Searches any sequence of characters including blank spaces in inexact matches suited to searching text embedded in memo or formatted memo fields Special operators Definition LIKE NOT BLANK TODAY OR Retrieves values that are similar to the value entered in inexact matches Only the values that match the first letter of the criteria entered will be retrieved LIKE cannot be used for binary memo formatted memo graphic or OLE field types Does not match Contains no value To exclude blank records from the search use NOT BLANK in the field Compares items with the current date can be used in conjunction with comparison and arithmetic operators to isolate ranges of dates One condition or another or both must be met Working with oueries 381 Special operators AS Definition Both conditions must be met Create this field name provided by the user following the AS operator and add to Answer table Requests that all values be displayed regardless of match Specifies the table from which all records are to be used in a joined table query Reserved words Definition CALC CHANGETO INSERT DELETE SET Requests that the result be displayed in a new calculated field in the Answer table A global e
245. erfect lets you create complex drawings For more information about creating a drawing refer to the Corel Presentations online Help You can open the draw picture window and modify these drawings To open the draw picture window 1 Click Insert Graphics Draw picture Corel Presentations opens NX ae For more information about the draw picture window refer to the Corel Presentations online Help To modify a drawing 1 Right click the graphic and click Edit image Corel Presentations opens 92 WordPerfect 10 2 Modify the drawing 3 Click File Save Os You can also modify a drawing or clipart image by double clicking it SN Modifying shapes In WordPerfect you can modify a shape in several ways For example you can add drop shadows and change the color of lines shadows and fills for shapes You can skew a shape which means to distort it or make it not symmetrical Some shapes can be altered using glyphs The following image demonstrates the different forms a shape can take when altered using a glyph An ellipse can be altered using the mode toggle The following image demonstrates the three forms an ellipse can take when altered using the mode toggle Lines and polylines can also be modified To modify a shape 1 Double click a shape 2 Click one of the following tabs e Fill to change fill options e Line to change line style options Shadow to change drop shadow options Using Gr
246. ert the formulas in tables and floating cells For more information about arithmetic and logical operators see Using operators in the online Help The cells in a table are labeled alphabetically from left to right and numerically from top to bottom When you use a cell address a comma is used to separate individual cell references for example if you want to add the contents of B1 and B4 you would use the formula SUM B1 B4 A colon is used to separate two references in a range for example to add all of the contents of B1 through B4 you would use SUM B1 B4 Table cell references can be uppercase or lowercase Using tables and charts 109 You can insert and copy formulas and functions in table cells and floating cells You can also type formulas directly into cells if you precede the initial symbols functions or numbers with or However it is best to enter formulas directly only if you know how to use functions and you remember the names you want to reference in formulas Formulas you enter are calculated automatically when you move the insertion point out of the cell that contains the formula You can also ignore a cell or a group of cells during calculations When you enter a formula in a table cell an indicator will display in the lower right hand corner of the cell You can view the formula by pointing anywhere inside the cell You can drag the formula indicator to another cell to copy the formula You can also change the t
247. es and programming structures Objects have properties When you create an object it has properties that define the appearance and behavior of the object The properties of a box include size position color and frame Using ObjectPAL you can create or change all the properties that you use in Paradox Objects exist in a context The context of a given object is defined by the objects that contain it This feature of ObjectPAL gives advanced programmers great flexibility and power As a beginning ObjectPAL programmer all you have to remember is that the form contains all other objects When you place objects in a form you are giving those objects context Working with ObjectPAL 387 Event driven An event driven interface is one that responds only to specific system or user actions such as clicking the mouse button moving the pointer over an object or pressing a key Anything you do in Paradox generates an event Paradox recognizes certain actions or conditions within forms as events When Paradox detects that an event has occurred it executes the method associated with that event There are different types of events that are appropriate for different types of objects For instance the pushButton event is recognized by a pushButton object but not by a graphic object There are however events that are recognized by all objects such as the timer event focus events and opening and closing Methods A method is code that
248. es to the field name or field type 6 Click Write Li If you have used unique Quattro Pro features a message may display stating that you E are saving in a file format other than Quattro Pro Click the database format to continue saving the database file To mark a field to be deleted click it in the list and press Delete An asterisk displays next to the field name To restore the field press Delete again 220 WordPerfect Office 2002 To save a Quarrro Pro file in anorher formar 1 Click File Save as 2 Choose a file type from the File type list box 3 Type a filename in the Filename list box 4 Click Save The entire file is saved when saving the file in the Microsoft Excel versions 5 7 and l 97 file formats When saving in any other formats only the contents of the current sheet or if it is empty the first non empty sheet are saved Sending files You can send notebooks to new locations You can also send notebooks by email If you have an email application installed on your computer or network you can access it from within Quattro Pro To send a notebook to another location 1 Click File Send to 2 Click the location where you want the file sent To send a notebook by email 1 Click File Send to Send mail 2 Set email options according to your system 3 Send the email 1 Z You can email selected parts of a notebook by selecting the parts you want and SN clicking File Send to Send mail
249. ets changing the shape C callout shapes drawing CDs adding entire tracks to slides adding parts of tracks to slides cells filling with numbers automatically highlighting ranges in datasheets moving to in datasheets selecting all in datasheets working with datasheets center drawing shapes changing appearance of text in bulleted lists branch orientation branch structures i font outline in bulleted lists font outlines of titles and subtitles font relative size E justification of bulleted lists line and polyline shapes line spacing in bulleted lists line spacing in titles and subtitles organization chart branch orientation organization chart branch structures spacing between main bulleted levels spacing between subordinate bulleted levels subtitle line spacing text font title line spacing chart styles saving organization charts creating organization saving organization viewing organization working with organization circles transforming polylines collapsing subordinates colors applying in bitmapped images applying to objects copying in bitmapped images selecting transparent for bitmapped images selectively replacing in bitmapped images columns 284 279 292 302 302 312 311 311 311 311 292 278 318 318 278 282 274 278 293 279 282 319 319 279 279 282 274 282 316 315 315 317 315 291 318 298 285 298 299 298 330
250. eve a deleted record PRINTING A form Although forms are intended for use primarily as screen based documents it is possible to print a form When you print a form Paradox prints only the current record unless you open the form as a report In this case a series of form windows are printed each containing a distinct record To print A form s desiqn Click File Open Form Choose the drive and folder where the form is stored 2 3 Double click a form 4 Click View gt Design form 5 Click File Print If the form page is larger than the printer paper Paradox trims the form design Click Print a To print A form as A REPORT 1 Click File Open gt Form Enable the Open as report check box Click File Print 2 3 Double click a form 4 5 Click Print From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Creating forms forms creating Data models data models creating Design object design objects Working with forms 369 Cai Working with REPORTS A report is a document that allows you to present your data Reports can be used to create mailing labels financial statements and invoices Reports are the best way to prepare your data for printing Paradox reports can display data from one or many tables using a variety of layouts There are two different modes or views in which you can work with a report e Design Report used to create the report and to make a
251. everal ways to select a date in CorelCENTRAL Calendar You can use the Mini calendar or you can select a specific date You can also choose a time in a calendar To use the Mini calendar to select a date in a calendar 1 Click the Mini calendar button fH 2 Click one of the following arrows e Left to choose a past year Right to choose a future year 3 Click a month 4 Click a day To select a specific date in a calendar 1 Click a calendar tab 2 Click Calendar gt Go to specific date 3 In the Go to specific date dialog box enable the Pick a date option 4 Click the Mini calendar button and click a date You can also Display the current date Click a calendar tab Click Calendar Go to today Advance a specific number of days in a calendar Click a calendar tab Click Calendar Go to specific date Enable the Go to option Type a value in the Days later box To choose a time in a calendar 1 Click a calendar tab 2 Inthe Events area click one of the following arrows a to scroll up the time slots to scroll down the time slots 3 Choose a time slot Scheduling tasks in a calendar Tasks can be scheduled in several ways You can schedule a single task in a calendar and you can schedule weekly tasks You can also schedule a task on a specific day and week in a year Using Corel CENTRAL calendar 411 To schedule a single task in a calendar 1 Click Calendar gt New task 2 Inthe Subje
252. ext row starts below the longest column of the previous row Parallel columns are useful for r sum s scripts charts or inventory lists i HL The following picture shows parallel columns with block protect and illustrates that parallel columns with block protect keep each row of columns together Ifa column in one row becomes so long that it moves across a page break the entire row moves to the next page You can also use tables to create this type of column For information about working with tables see Using tables and charts on page 101 Any column can be deleted You can use Reveal Codes to see column entries in your document and you can use shortcuts to make it easy to move around in columns For more information about Reveal Codes see Displaying Reveal Codes in the online Help To apply a column TO A page 1 2 3 4 Click a page Click Format Columns Type a value in the Number of columns box In the Type of columns area enable one of the following options e Newspaper makes text flow down a column to the bottom of a page or column break and continues it at the top of the next column Balance newspaper adjusts newspaper columns so that columns are of equal length Parallel groups columns across the page in rows and starts subsequent rows below the longest column of the previous row FORMATTING PAGES 71 e Parallel w block protect keeps all rows of the colu
253. f Paradox detects a duplicate value a warning message appears and the index is not created e Maintained instructs Paradox to update the index each time the table changes This setting is essential to speed up queries and to support linked tables e Case sensitive determines whether capitalization is considered when sorting records 8 Click Save Creating A lookup table Lookup tables provide a quick way to access acceptable values for a given field They also control the accuracy of the data entered into your database 376 Paradox 10 To create a lookup table 1 Click Format gt Restructure table 2 Click the Table lookup tab 3 From the Fields Current Table list choose the field to which you want to assign the lookup 4 From the Lookups defined area click the right arrow to move the field name to the Field column From the Lookup tables list box choose the table you want to use as the lookup table md vl Click the left arrow to move the table name to the Lookup table column 7 Inthe Lookup type area enable one of the following options e Current fields only the current field gets its value from the lookup table even if the current table and the lookup table have other fields in common e Applicable fields all fields of the current table that correspond to fields in the lookup table take their values from the lookup table 8 In the Lookup rights area enable one of the following options e Fillonly does not allow
254. file folder box S To extract part of a notebook 1 Click Tools Data tools gt Extract to file 2 Inthe Cell s field type the cell name or coordinates to be saved You can specify noncontiguous selections by separating the selections with commas 3 Enable one of the following Formulas saves the cells exactly as they are e Values saves the resulting values instead of the original formulas 4 Type a filename Getting started 179 Li If the selection includes hidden rows or columns the hidden rows or columns are Da saved in the new file and remain hidden when you open the file Some cell names and charts saved in the extracted file may not be meaningful if they refer to cells that were not also extracted You can delete them reassign them or ignore them To close a notebook e Click File gt Close op If you have made any changes to the notebook you are prompted to save your work PS You can close all open notebooks at once using Close all To exit Quattro Pro e Click File Exit Pai If you have changed any files you are prompted to save your work From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Customizing menus Customizing keyboards Saving a notebook group Setting multiple workspaces menus customizing keyboards customizing notebook group workspaces 180 Quarrro Pro 10 CREATING A SPREAdSHEET Quattro Pro contains spreadsheets in a notebook
255. font properties and other chart characteristics for other organization charts To CREATE AN ORGANIZATION CharT 1 Click Insert Organization chart 2 Drag diagonally to define a chart area 3 Click a chart layout To save AN ORGANIZATION Chart style 1 Double click an organization chart 2 Click Chart gt Save style 3 Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the chart style 4 Type a filename in the Filename box 5 Click Save Sia The filename extension of a chart style file is Chs Adding and editing TEXT iN ORGANIZATION CHARTS You can type text in each of the boxes in an organization chart and include names titles and other information You can also edit this text To add TEXT TO AN ORGANIZATION CharT 1 Double click an organization chart 2 Double click one of the following fields in a box Name e Title 3 Type the text in the field To edit TEXT IN AN ORGANIZATION Chart 1 Double click an organization chart 2 Click a box 3 Click Edit Edit text 4 Edit the text Adding and replacing positions in ORGANIZATION CHARTS In organization charts manager positions are represented by the highest boxes in the chart subordinate and staff positions by the next level of boxes and coworker positions by the lowest level of boxes You can add staff and subordinate positions to an organization chart and you can add coworker positions to a chart You can also add and replace managers in an organization cha
256. formation about cutting copying and pasting see Cutting copying and pasting text and graphics in the online Help For more information about different methods of importing text and objects see Linking and embedding in the online Help To import an object by copying and pasting 1 In any Windows application select an object 2 Click Edit Copy 3 Start WordPerfect 4 Click Edit gt Paste FORMATTING PAGES 49 DS You can choose how an object is imported into a document by clicking Edit Paste SN special For example you can choose to paste it in an unformatted text format or in Rich Text Format Creating and deleting columns You can use columns to divide text vertically on a page There are four types of columns for use in documents such as newsletters glossaries scripts or inventory lists Newspaper Balanced newspaper Parallel and Parallel with block protect The following picture shows newspaper columns Text in newspaper columns flows down the column to the bottom of a page or column break and starts again at the top of the next column The following picture shows balanced newspaper columns Balanced newspaper columns are similar to regular newspaper columns but each column is adjusted on the page so they are equal in length I il ll The following picture shows parallel columns and illustrates that text in parallel columns is 50 WordPerfect 10 grouped across the page in a row The n
257. formats 75 adding to columns 116 endnotes numbering methods 76 adding to graphics boxes 115 endnotes to footnotes 74 adding to pages 116 font colors 60 adding to paragraphs 116 font relative sizes 60 applying to tables 109 font sizes 60 editing 116 font styles 60 removing 117 fonts n RE S 60 boxes fonts with Corel RealTime Preview 60 adding borders 115 footnote location 4 75 applying gradient fills 118 footnotes number formats 75 editing borders 117 footnotes numbering methods 76 removing borders 117 footnotes to endnotes 74 browsing the Web highlighting color 62 from WordPerfect 131 line height to a fixed size 70 bulleted lists spaces between endnotes 75 applying to text 79 spaces between footnotes 75 creating i 78 table cell fills 108 creating custom symbols 78 table cell line color 108 using QuickBullets 78 table cell line styles 108 chapter numbers inserting 82 C setting 83 charts calculating 3 Corel Presentations 111 formulas 110 Index WordPerfect 10 135 creating creating from tables creating organization organization using clipart inserting closing documents color adjusting image attributes applying to tables changing highlight color creating creating using models previewing color models creating colors working with color columns adding borders applying applying gradient fill balanced newspaper creating deleting editing borders newspaper par
258. g boxes Left e Right e Top Bottom 4 Click one of the following Equal lets you set all four margin settings equal to the last margin size used Minimum lets you set all four margin settings to the minimum value the current printer settings allow 5 Click the Layout tab In the Two sided printing area enable one of the following options Book side to side lets you print the document for binding the long edge of a page e Tablet top to bottom lets you print the document for binding the short edge of a page 7 Enable one of the following options Inside lets you change the amount of space for binding on the inside margin e Outside lets you change the amount of space for binding on the outside margin 8 In the Binding area type a value in the Increase margin for box Importing TEXT ANd ObjECTS ONTO A PAGE WordPerfect lets you import an object An object can be text graphics sound clips media clips or spreadsheet cells anything that you can copy from one application to another Pasting copies the object from one application to another with no connection You can use this method when you do not plan to make changes to the object When you cut or copy an object it is stored in the Clipboard You can then paste the object elsewhere in that same document or in another Windows application You can select a specific format when you paste information from the Clipboard into WordPerfect For in
259. g documents 123 a henalss Pupeloenyar Soe At the top of the document window WordPerfect inserts the Merge toolbar to give you greater control over a merge For more information about the Merge toolbar see Using the Merge toolbar in the online Help You can also create labels and you can merge text that is oriented sideways To create a form document for A MERGE 1 2 Click Tools Merge Click Form document gt Create form document If you have typed in the active document enable one of the following options Use file in active window uses the active document e New document window creates a new document Click OK Enable one of the following e Associate a data file specifies the path and filename for the file e Associate an address book specifies an address book e Associate an ODBC data source lets you select the ODBC source to use e No association associates no data file Type text and insert merge commands in the form document Insert fields in the form document K For information about inserting merge commands see To insert merge commands GM os in the online Help 124 WordPerfect 10 To insert A field in a form document for A MERGE 1 Click Insert field on the Merge toolbar 2 Click where you want data to be filled in from a data source 3 In the Field box specify the field 4 Click Insert To create labels for a MERGE 1 Click Tools Merge 2 Click Form
260. g in Draft view is often faster than working in Page view Page displays your notebook pages the way they will look when printed Page view displays elements such as fonts and appearance features headers footers footnotes page breaks and margins Page View offers more WYSIWYG What You See Is What You Get editing such as dragging margins and page breaks You can also get to the Page setup dialog by double clicking or right clicking in a margin Page breaks displays soft and hard page breaks You can use this view to edit these page breaks Objects displays the Objects sheet the last sheet in the notebook You can view your charts maps and dialog boxes from this sheet NM Me The view that is currently selected when you exit Quattro Pro is the view that will lt appear when you open Quattro Pro again QS oy You can drag graphics or charts while in Draft view or Page view To see multiple pages while in Page view click View Zoom and choose 50 percent or less To change margins while in Page view drag a blue margin line to set the current margin for a column or row of pages To display formulas instead of formula results e Click View gt Formulas To display spreadsheet COMMENTS e Click View Comments To display a new view of a notebook window e Click Window gt New view Ne Os S The New view feature allows you to drag and drop cells between spreadsheets When you change border or
261. gridline properties the change does not display in duplicate views When you lock titles split panes or zoom data the change does not display in duplicate views S To view different areas of open windows resize them to see a part of each Scroll S Y windows or select different sheets as desired To remove an extra view click the Close window xj button at the top right corner of the window If you click File Close all views are closed because all views of the notebook are saved as the same file E Getting started 175 To split a window into TWO PANES 1 Move the mouse pointer to the lower right corner of the window over the pane splitter fm s The pointer changes to a black double arrow Depending on where you position the mouse pointer the double arrow points horizontally or vertically 2 Do one ofthe following To create horizontal panes drag the vertical double arrow upward Release the mouse button where you want to split the panes e To create vertical panes drag the horizontal double arrow to the left Release the mouse button where you want to split the panes PS You can also split a window into panes using View Split window The window is ey split at the position of the selector or when there is not enough room to split the window at the current position the window is split in half The second pane can be closed by clicking View Split window and enabling the Clear option To s
262. gt WordPerfect Office 2002 gt Utilities CorelCENTRAL Calendar To ovit CoreLCENTRAL Calendar In the CorelCENTRAL Calendar application window click File gt Exit Using CoreLCENTRAL Admin TO create and open Calendars When you start CorelCENTRAL Calendar for the first time an expert also starts to guide you through the process of creating a new personal calendar Using Corel CENTRAL calendar 409 In a corporate environment you can use Corel CENTRAL Admin to create a shared corporate calendar database for each user and to maintain users resources and groups for each calendar You can use a shared calendar to schedule work related events and tasks with other users You can also assign the appropriate rights user name and password for each user When you start Corel CENTRAL Calendar again the default calendar displays in the application window In a corporate environment the default calendar is the groupware calendar created by the network administrator Ifyou are a home user the first calendar you create when you start CorelCENTRAL for the first time is the default calendar To create a calendar when starting Corel CENTRAL Calendar for the first T ME 1 Click Start on the Windows taskbar 2 Click Programs gt WordPerfect Office 2002 CorelCENTRAL Applications Corel CENTRAL Calendar 3 In the CorelCENTRAL Calendar dialog box enable the Create a new personal calendar option 4 Follow the instructions on your scree
263. h for queries e SQL lets you search for SQL Click Browse la Choose the drive and folder where the object is stored Click OK Hold down CTRL and select more than one object from the list Click Add Click Close CREATE A link Click the field in the parent table from which you want to create a link Drag the chosen field to the field you want to link to in the child table If referential integrity exists between the tables the links will appear If referential integrity does not already exist the Link property dialog box will open In the Link property dialog box choose the parent table from the Parent tables list box Choose a parent field from the Parent fields list Click the right arrow Choose the child table from the Child tables list box Choose a child field from the Child index list Click the left arrow to add it to the Child fields list REMOVE A link Click the link Click Edit Links Choose the link from the Links box Click Unlink Working with forms 367 Adding objects to a form You can enhance the appearance and functionality of your form by adding design objects You can add boxes ellipses or lines to physically divide groups of buttons or fields into separate areas and add text objects to label the areas To view data in a table field that is not currently included on your form you can add a field object To make navigation and editing of table fields easier you can add button objects To
264. h mm ss or as specified in your operating system s preferences Contains both time and date values Contains character strings too long for an Alpha field Up to 240 characters display in the table Allows you to set the text typeface style color and size of the character string Up to 240 characters display in the table Contains files in BMP PCX TIF GIF and EPS file formats Contains files or objects from other applications Stores values representing True or False Begins with the number 1 and adds one number for subsequent records Stores data that ObjectPAL can access Stores data that ObjectPAL can access To create A Table STRUCTURE nau FWN Click File New gt Table Click Blank Select a table type from the Select type list box Click OK Click the first row in the Field name column and type a name for the first field Press TAB and choose a field type Based on the field type you select a field size may be automatically assigned by Paradox You can change the number in some cases Click the space between the record number and the name of the field you want to define as your primary key field Click Create 374 Paradox 10 La There are a few rules to follow when creating the field names for a table Field names Sr must be unique within the table they must be less than 26 characters in length and they cannot contain spaces or special characters such as O
265. he Alignment tab 4 Enable the Wrap text check box in the Cell options area aia Wrapping text works only on text not on numeric data You can include up to 4096 characters 4KB in a single cell DS You can also wrap text by clicking the Property button on the toolbar 202 Quattro Pro 10 To enter short lines of text in one cell 1 Click a cell 2 Type a line of text 3 Press ALT ENTER 4 Continue typing 5 Press ENTER To redistribute text over multiple rows or columns 1 Select the first cell to redistribute 2 Click Format gt Text reformat 3 Select the cells in which you want the redistributed text to appear using the Range picker i tool in the Cells box The first cell you selected to reformat will be the upper left cell Li If you specify both columns and rows as the destination cells for the redistributed i text Quattro Pro redistributes the text within those cells if enough space exists If you include blank cells between the cells to redistribute the cells following a blank cell are not redistributed Joining cells Quattro Pro lets you join cells to create a title across multiple cells or a vertical side bar In joined cells you can center and align text and numbers as you would in a single cell You can join cells in rows columns or rows and columns You can also perform calculations and use formulas in a joined cell as you would in a regular cell To join cells 1 Drag across the cells you want t
266. he application bar ww ee 161 Navigating in spreadsheets and notebooks 163 Selecting cells rows and columns 2 we 165 Adding and deleting cells rows and columns weet 167 Adding deleting moving and copying spreadsheets 169 Naming spreadsheets LEE A A AAA A A aA 170 Specifying Quattro Pro settings 2 ee a 170 Displaying arranging resizing and hiding windows o 173 Zooming data and hiding and displaying screen components ss 176 Saving and closing notebooks 2 178 Creating A spreadsheet f y f 181 Creating and opening notebooks a a a a 181 Entering labels and special characters 0000 a ww 182 Entering values aa a 184 Filling cells and spreadsheet tabs automatically 186 Creating simple equations we 187 Performing running calculations 2 ee 188 Editing and formatting A spreadsheet y f 191 Protecting data 191 Editing cell content 2 o 192 Undoing actions 194 Editing grouped data A a O ee ae e e A 195 Moving selected cells by dragging 2 2 196 Moving cells rows and columns i i 197 Resizing rows and Columns aa 198 Resizing rows and columns to fit a specific cell 200 Table of contents Quattro Pro 10 147 Hiding rows and columns Using formatting tools to format a spreadsheet Wrapping text Joining cells Changing text font and appearance Working with fil
267. he relevant sheet 2 Click File Save as 3 Type the filename with the extension txt in the Filename box 4 Choose ASCII Text tab delimited or comma delimited from the File type list box Ate Only the contents of the current sheet or if it is empty the first non empty sheet of a notebook are saved 222 Quarrro Pro 10 To 1 uk WN To _ import UNFORMATTEd TEXT In the source application select the data to paste into Quattro Pro Click Edit Copy In Quattro Pro click Edit Paste special Choose Unformatted text from the As box Enable the Paste option combine files by using math operations Click File Open Choose the drive and folder where the destination notebook is stored Double click the filename This notebook contains the existing values data in this notebook will be altered Click Tools Data tools Combine files Click Browse and select the source notebook This notebook contains the incoming values no changes are made to this notebook In the Source area enable one of the following options Entire file combines all data in the two files e Cell s combines only data in the cells which you specify In the Operation area enable one of the following options e Copy inserts the exact contents of the source notebook e Add adds the incoming values to the existing values Subtract subtracts the incoming values from the existing values e Multiply mul
268. hip the results will be more accurate if the data closely matches a linear model To help you determine accuracy of results the regression table includes two standard error estimates To perform regression analysis 1 Click Tools Numeric tools Regression 2 Click the Range picker HE in the Dependent box and select the column of dependent data 3 Click the Range picker in the Independent box and select the column of independent data 4 Click the Range picker in the Output box and select the upper left cell of the output cells where you want to write the regression information Ifyou want to force the y intercept to zero enable the Zero option in the Y intercept area Li The data cells you compare in regression analysis must have an equal number of rows Regression tables are not automatically updated PerfORMING MATRIX OPERATIONS A matrix is a rectangular array of numbers Each column in a matrix corresponds to one variable and each row corresponds to a linear constraint Quattro Pro lets you multiply two matrices and invert a matrix Matrix operations can help you solve sets of linear formulas and equations For example suppose you have these four unique equations using variables w x y and z lw 1x 2y 3z 10 3w 2x 2y 1z 20 lw 0x 3y 4z 15 lw 1x 0y 1z 6 You can express the coefficients the numbers multiplying the variables w x y and z of these equations in this 4 by 4 coefficient matrix
269. hoose a template for creating a personal business or corporate database e Paradox Experts lets you choose an Expert which provides easy to follow steps that help you quickly perform common tasks such as creating tables reports or mailing labels e Tutorial opens the Paradox online tutorial From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Project viewer Project Viewer using File extensions file extensions database objects Exploring Paradox 349 Planning your database A good plan is the key to creating an efficient highly flexible database and to maintaining the integrity of your data By following a few basic steps you ll save time and eliminate the problems that could arise from a poorly planned database When you plan a database you must identify all the information you want to retrieve From this you define and organize the data you want to store and maintain When your plan is complete you can start to build your database using the tools offered in Paradox Identify the information Make a list of all of the information you want to retrieve from your database Do you want to generate monthly reports mailing labels or invoices What information do you want these documents to display Identify all the information that each list document or report will contain Be as specific as possible Consider making a sample of any document you want produced Consider also where your information wi
270. ick File Properties 2 Click the Summary tab 3 Record the appropriate information in any of the following boxes e Title Getting started 171 To uk WN PWN e Subject e Author e Keywords e Comments Ds You can also access the Statistics and Summary tabs by clicking Format Notebook NW properties change compatibility options Click Tools Settings Click Compatibility change the default file save type Click Tools Settings Click Compatibility Choose a file extension from the Default file type list change the default file open type Click Tools Settings Click Compatibility Choose a file extension from the Default open file types list change the notebook size Click Tools Settings Click Compatibility Type the number of sheets you want in the Sheets box Type the number of columns you want in the Columns box Type the number of rows you want in the Rows box change the currency symbol Click Tools Settings Click International Enable the Currency option Enable the Quattro Pro option and click the country whose currency symbol you want to use Enable one of the following options e Signed precedes negative values with a minus sign e Parens encloses negative values in parentheses 172 Quattro Pro 10 To CHANGE PUNCTUATION SETTINGS 1 Click Tools gt Settings 2 Click International 3 Enable the Punctuation option 4 Select a punctuation option
271. ick in a paragraph 2 Click Format gt Line gt Spacing 3 Type a value in the Spacing box PS You can also change the line spacing of selected text FORMATTING TEXT 69 To change the line height to a fixed size 1 Click in a paragraph 2 Click Format gt Line gt Height 3 Enable the Fixed option and type a value in the box A Line height is determined by multiplying the current line height by the number you specify PS You can also change the line height of selected text To change the space between paragraphs 1 Click in a paragraph 2 Click Format gt Paragraph gt Format 3 In the Spacing between paragraphs area enable one of the following options Number of lines inserts the number of lines you specify Distance in points inserts the spacing you specify measured in points Ne There are 72 points in 1 inch SA Hyphenating TEXT Hyphenation divides words that span the hyphenation zone You can enable automatic hyphenation You can also change the width of the hyphenation zone a narrow area that surrounds the right margin of a document Increasing the hyphenation zone hyphenates fewer words and decreasing the hyphenation zone hyphenates more words As well you can create a nonbreaking hyphen To enable automatic hyphenation 1 Click in a document 2 Click Tools Language gt Hyphenation 3 Enable the Turn hyphenation on check box To change the width of the hyphenation zone 1 Click in
272. ield names are right aligned Updating and refreshing CrossTab report data CrossTab reports are dynamic meaning that changes in the source data are reflected in the CrossTab report You can set Quattro Pro to automatically check the source data when you open the report and update the report if the source data has changed To update CrossTab report data 1 Click Tools Data tools CrossTab gt Options 2 Enable the Update data on open check box To refresh a CrossTab report 1 Click a cell in a CrossTab report 2 Click Tools Data tools CrossTab Refresh From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Customizing CrossTab report fields field names Hiding field items and details hiding field items Calculating field summaries in CrossTab reports calculating CrossTab report field summaries Performing field data comparisons in CrossTab field data comparing reports Expanding filtering and removing OLAP CrossTab expanding OLAP CrossTab report field elements report field elements Making static copies of CrossTab reports CrossTab reports copying Expanding CrossTab reports expanding CrossTab reports Moving and deleting CrossTab reports moving CrossTab reports 236 Quattro Pro 10 Index Quattro Pro 10 moving average 213 QIF 220 random number 213 QPX 224 rank and percentile 213 XLS 178 sampling 213 3 D blocks 165 t test 213 range syntax 165 using 213 selecting 165
273. ight colors print as white on some printers To chANGE TEXT APPEARANCE 1 Select the cells with text to format 2 Click Format Selection properties 3 Click the Cell font tab 4 Enable any of the following check boxes in the Appearance area Bold e Italics e Underline Strikeout pe You can also change the text appearance by clicking the Bold Italic Underline or SN Strikeout buttons on the property bar To ser TEXT TO SUPERSCRIPT OR subscript 1 Double click a cell 2 Select the data to change 3 Click one of the following buttons on the property bar e Superscript e Subscript Working with fills patterns and borders Quattro Pro lets you fill the cell backgrounds with colors and patterns You can also use colors to identify data ranges and change the color of specific types of data such as values above or below a specified range and ERR values You can also color code spreadsheet tabs For example you can make all tabs for expenses one color and all tabs for revenue another color Quattro Pro also lets you add borders to cells setting the style thickness and color of the border lines You can also add lines for total and grand total columns in a spreadsheet 204 Quattro Pro 10 To fill rhe cell background Select a cell Click Format Selection properties Click the Fill pattern tab Click a pattern button on the pattern palette Open the Pattern color picker and click a color nu WN Open the Backg
274. in place e Animate object across screen If you are publishing the slide show using Flash enable the Show only Flash enabled transitions check box Choose an animation effect from the Effects list Choose an animation direction from the Direction list In the Speed area enable one of the following options e Fast Medium e Slow Enable any of the following check boxes Display one at a time displays main level list items and subordinate level list items one at a time during a slide show Highlight current bullet selects one list item at a time and greys all other list items on the slide Display in reverse order begins the cascade effect with the last item in the list and progresses to the first list item apply sound to a bulleted animation Click a bulleted list Click Format gt Bulleted list properties Click the Bullet animation tab In the Sound area click Browse In the Open file dialog box choose the drive and folder where the sound file is stored Type a filename in the Filename box Click Open On the Bullet animation page move the slider to adjust the volume of the sound file From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Applying fills to bulleted lists bulleted lists applying fills Adding boxes to bulleted lists bulleted lists adding boxes Saving bulleted list styles bulleted list styles saving Applying bulleted list styles bulleted list styles
275. in their task list and monitor their progress on the task You can assign Delegate access to a corporate calendar You can also search for check for conflicts and book an available resource such as a conference room or projector 404 Corel CENTRAL 10 CorelCENTRAL Address Book groupware functionality lets you assign individual and group access rights to address books Corel CENTRAL Admin You can use CorelCENTRAL Admin to create databases on local and remote Paradox databases and SQL servers You can also create and maintain users groups and resources within databases Virtually seamless compatibility Corel is committed to providing applications that have a high level of compatibility with other applications Therefore CorelCENTRAL includes support for a wide variety of open standards including e ICAP a group scheduling and calendaring application e POP3 support for managing multiple Internet email accounts e IMAP4 server based email messaging and storage protocol with support for multiple email accounts e SMTP support for transferring email over the Internet e LDAP support for multiple email accounts and for accessing and searching multiple address directories e HTML support for formatted email from simple text to intricate Web pages S MIME support for 128 bit encryption and for sending and receiving signed and encrypted email messages e MAPI an industry wide standard for information sh
276. ing a chapter heading a title a date a person s name or a company name at the top or bottom of each page or on alternating pages of a document In this section you ll learn about e inserting and viewing headers and footers e formatting headers and footers e inserting items into headers and footers INSERTING ANd viewing headers and footers Headers and footers can contain text numbering date time and filenames The following image shows that 1 a header prints just below the top margin and 2 a footer prints just below the bottom margin m Bap pl ar Pro Boa Pio FEAR ram an r a You can insert headers and footers in a document and then you can view them in Page view Working with headers and footers 73 To insert a header or footer 1 Click Insert Header footer 2 Enable one of the following options e Header A e Header B Footer A Footer B 3 Click Create 4 Type the header or footer text 5 Click File Close document You can have several headers and footers in a document but only two headers and two footers can be active on a page A You can use two different headers and two different footers at any place in a OS Only a header or footer of the same kind can replace an existing header or footer For example only a new Header A can replace an existing Header A Similarly only a Footer A can replace another Footer A To view a header or Footer e Click View and click one of the foll
277. ing lists 78 page orientation 47 QuickCorrect page size deleting words 87 deleting definition 47 48 enabling 87 editing 47 listing words 87 editing definition 47 QuickNumbers preset definition 47 creating lists 80 select 47 QuickSelect 103 pages QuickSplit adding borders 116 Column y 105 applying gradient fills 119 Columns and Rows 105 doublesided 48 Rows 105 editing borders 117 QuickSum formatting 45 adding values in a table 111 numbering 81 quitting removing borders 118 WordPerfect 43 setting page definitions 47 singlesided 48 paragraphs R applying gradient fills 119 recorde adding borders 116 finding 128 editing borders 117 in data table files 121 indenting 65 in data text files 121 removing borders 118 marking for a merge 128 pasting selecting for merge 128 table components 103 setting merge conditions 129 PDF sorting 128 publishing 132 viewing 128 pictures reducing drawing ae 92 images 97 editing in draw picture window 92 removing inserting from CDs 92 highlighting 62 on CD 91 borders 117 previewing capitalization exceptions 68 Index WordPerfect 10 141 drop caps 63 modifying using glyphs 94 indents 65 skewing 94 resizing sizing graphics 94 graphics proportionally 94 restarting skewing endnote numbers at 1 76 shapes 94 restoring table cells 106 images to original 98 sorting Ros Col indicators data files 128 selecting columns 103 records in data files 1
278. ing slide show layouts and backgrounds 270 Working with text 275 Creating text objects 273 Setting text attributes 274 Formatting text in text objects 274 Working with bulleted lists 277 Creating bulleted lists TE 277 Modifying bulleted list text attributes 278 Formatting bulleted lists 278 Changing line spacing in bulleted lists 279 Animating bulleted lists 279 Table of contents Corel Presentations 10 275 Working with titles and subtitles A i a f 281 Formatting the appearance of titles and subtitles 281 Changing the line spacing in titles and subtitles 282 Working with objects f A 287 Selecting Objects we 283 Resizing objects 6 we 283 Flipping rotating and skewing objects 284 Applying color and outlines to objects 284 Applying effects to objects ee 285 Animating Objects ee 285 Playing slide shows y 7 y 289 Playing slide shows www 289 Drawing and editing shapes E 291 Drawing shapes 0a a a a 290 Editing shapes 0 we 292 Working with bitmapped images z i 297 Creating and saving bitmapped images 00 aaa 295 Modifying bitmapped images aaa 296 Creating original artwork wwe 297 Using special effects ww 299 Adding multimedia effects 301 Working with sounds in slide shows S820 Working with movies in slide shows e302 Working with data charts
279. is section you ll learn about e selecting objects e resizing objects e flipping rotating and skewing objects e applying color and outlines to objects e applying effects to objects Selecting objects You must select an object before you can arrange edit or move it You can select one object or you can select multiple objects simultaneously You can also optimize Corel Presentations so that any object you draw is automatically selected To select an object To select Do the following An object Click an object using the Selection tool i Multiple objects Hold down CTRL and click the objects using the Selection tool kk All objects in a window or slide Click Edit Select gt All Objects automatically when they are created Click View Auto select Xi A check mark beside the Auto select menu command indicates that it is enabled Resizing objects You can resize objects in slides or drawings by sizing and stretching them You can size an object while keeping its original proportions intact and stretching an object lets you extend it horizontally or vertically Working with objects 283 To size an object proportionately 1 Click an object 2 Drag a corner handle until the object is the size you want PS You can also size an object proportionately by holding down ALT while dragging any S handle until the object is the size you want To stretch an object 1 Click an object 2 Drag a side handle until you achieve
280. ise values to change the image size click Edit attributes gt Scale image and specify a value for X width and Y height Using Graphics 97 To crop AN image 1 Right click an image and click Image tools 2 Open the Zoom flyout and click the Crop image tool E 3 Point to the image until the pointer changes to a magnifying glass 4 Using the magnifying glass pointer marquee select the part of the image that you want to crop The area you select fills the graphics box DS Click the Zoom actual size tool m in the Zoom flyout to restore the image to its SN original size To adjust color attributes for AN MAGE To Do the following Adjust the contrast Right click an image and click Image tools Open the Contrast picker and select a contrast level Adjust the brightness Right click an image and click Image tools Open the Brightness picker and select a brightness level Invert colors Right click an image and click Image tools Click the Invert colors button J lt To specify a precise value for brightness or contrast click Edit attributes gt Color attributes and specify a value between 1 and 1 for each Click Invert colors again to return the colors to their original values To RESTORE AN MAGE TO iTS ORIGINAL APPEARANCE 1 Right click an image and click Image tools 2 Click Reset attributes Moving images WordPerfect allows you to move an image inside a graphics box You can flip an image so
281. ishing as HTML documents 325 working with 281 publishing to the Web 325 surface charts 305 removing 263 switching selecting all objects 283 between views in slide shows 261 sorting 264 turning off transitions 265 smooth effect 299 T sorting tables 305 slides 264 text sound animation 257 adding to organization charts 316 sounds changing appearance in bulleted lists 278 adding entire CD tracks to slides 302 changing font colors 274 adding parts of CD tracks to slides 302 changing font sizes 274 adding to slide shows 301 changing fonts 274 applying to bulleted animations 280 deleting i teh gh 275 applying to object animations 286 editing in organization charts 316 inserting MIDI files into slides 301 formatting in text objects 274 inserting Wave files into slides 301 indenting 275 speaker notes inserting boxes 273 printing 322 inserting lines 273 special effects justifying 275 applying to bitmapped images 299 moving 275 using 299 outlining 274 specific areas setting attributes 274 painting bitmapped images 297 setting line spacing 275 spike removal effect 299 using in slide shows and drawings 273 spreadsheet data text attributes exporting from datasheets 310 modifying bulleted lists 278 importing data to datasheets 310 text boxes staff positions inserting 273 adding to organization charts 317 text lines star shapes inserting 273 drawing 292 text objects stereogram effect 299 creating 27
282. ize gt Toolbar item 2 Enable one of the following display options Image only e Caption only e Caption below image e Caption to right of image PS You can revert the toolbar button to its original display setting by right clicking on the button and clicking Customize Toolbar item Default 160 Quarrro Pro 10 To display text under all toolbar buttons e Right click a button on a toolbar and click Customize Notebook toolbar Caption below image To add a toolbar button that launches an application OR dOCUMENT Click Tools Customize Open the Customization menu Click Commands and choose Programs from the list box Click the Program command category tab Click Add In the Target list box choose the file or application for which you want to create a button In the Parameters list box specify any command line options o N AU FWN In the Working folder list box specify the working directory Leave the Working folder list box blank if you want to use the Quattro Pro startup folder 9 Click Apply and drag the new button to a toolbar You can change the appearance and associated tooltip for the new button by clicking o lt SY on the Appearance and General tabs You can delete a toolbar button by selecting the command from the list and clicking Remove To add a toolbar button that plays a macro Click Tools Customize Open the Customization menu Click Commands and choose Macros fr
283. izontally and vertically in a cell The default alignment setting for numbers and formula results is right aligned the default setting for labels and dates is left aligned You can change the default alignment of all labels 206 Quarrro Pro 10 You can also center data across multiple cells for example you can center a title across columns C D and E You can also change the orientation of text in a cell by rotating it horizontally vertically or by a specific degree To align data in a cell 1 Select a cell 2 Click Format gt Selection properties 3 Click the Alignment tab 4 Inthe Horizontal alignment area enable one of the following options e General right aligns values and left aligns labels e Left left aligns all types of data e Right right aligns all types of data e Center centers cell data e Indent moves data in from the edge of a cell 5 Inthe Vertical alignment area enable one of the following options e Top e Center Bottom Os You can also click the Alignment M3 button on the property bar to change i horizontal cell alignment To set the default alignment of all labels 1 Click Format Define styles 2 Choose Normal from the Define style for list box 3 Click Alignment 4 Inthe Alignment dialog box modify the alignment settings To center Text across multiple cells 1 In the left most cell type the text to be centered Select the cells over which to center the text starting with the ce
284. k Insert Object Enable the Create from file option Click Browse Choose the drive and folder where the object is stored Double click the filename Enable the Link check box If you want to display the object as an icon enable the Display as icon check box YOU BWN To embed an object Select the cell where you want to embed an object Click Insert Object Enable the Create from file option Click Browse Choose the drive and folder where the object is stored nau RW N Double click the filename If you want to display the object as an icon enable the Display as icon check box A If you choose Create new a new blank object displays If the source application supports in place editing the object is activated for in place editing otherwise a new window opens and the source application runs in the new window Use the source application s editing commands and tools to create and manipulate data To drag an object to another application 1 Select an object in Quattro Pro 2 Drag the object into the other application using one of the following methods 226 Quarrro Pro 10 Press SHIFT while dragging embeds the object Press CTRL while dragging links the object To copy an object to another application 1 Select an object in Quattro Pro 2 Click Edit gt Copy 3 Open the destination application 4 Inthe destination application select the Paste special option and choose a Quattro Pro form
285. kground layers deleting background layers applying colors and fills layout layers editing layout layers renaming layout layers deleting Master Gallery adding masters Working with the Master Gallery 271 Working with TEXT You can customize the appearance of slides with a variety of text objects In this section you ll learn about e creating text objects e setting text attributes e formatting text in text objects Creating TEXT objects You can create text objects by inserting text boxes text lines and TextArt Text boxes expand in length and text lines expand in width to contain text as you type For information about TextArt see Working with TextArt images in the online Help To insert A TEXT box 1 Click Insert Text box 2 Drag to define the text box 3 Type text in the text box DS You can also define the text box by clicking in the slide show or drawing window SY To insert A TEXT Line 1 Click Insert gt Text line 2 Click in the slide show or drawing window 3 Type text To insert TextArt 1 Click Insert Graphics gt TextArt 2 Click the General tab 3 Click a shape on the Shapes palette 4 Choose a font from the Font list box Choose a font style from the Font style list box Open the Justification picker and click a text justification N O U Choose a smoothness level from the Smoothness list box Working with text 273 8 Type any text in the Type here box
286. l e Fill out the electronic form which displays when the WordPerfect Office 2002 installation is completed You will need access to the Internet to use this method e Visit Corel on the World Wide Web and complete the registration form at www corel com support onlineregistration htm Adding deleting and updating WordPerfect Office 2002 COMPONENTS After installing WordPerfect Office 2002 you can add components to the installation For example after using the Typical installation option you may discover that you need additional import file filters for Corel Presentations or you want to use Data Maps with Quattro Pro or want access to detailed Macro Help for WordPerfect You can delete WordPerfect Office 2002 components to free up disk space You can also update components to refresh their configuration settings Updating components also repairs WordPerfect Office 2002 if you have accidentally deleted application files To add components to a WordPerfect Office 2002 installation I Close any open WordPerfect Office 2002 applications 2 On the Windows taskbar click Start WordPerfect Office 2002 gt Setup and notes gt WordPerfect Office 2002 Setup Enable the Add New Components button 4 Click the Next button and follow the installation instructions in the Setup Wizard To delete installed WordPerfect Office 2002 components I Close any open WordPerfect Office 2002 applications 2 On the Windows taskbar click Start Word
287. l address To insert a hyperlink 1 Select a cell on the active spreadsheet 2 Click Tools gt Hyperlink 3 Type a text description of the link in the Text to link box 4 Type a link source in one of the following boxes e Linkto file or URL allows you to link to a file or URL e Specific location cell address or bookmark allows you to link to a cell address or bookmark in the same notebook DS If you want Quattro Pro to use a relative path to the file you ve linked to enable the gt Use relative path check box Ifyou move a file that contains a hyperlink to a different directory Quattro Pro will use the relative path to find the link From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Editing and updating objects and links OLE linking Editing and updating notebook links notebook links updating Managing files and dara 229 PRESENTING SPREAdSHEET CATA IN A CHART Quattro Pro lets you present data graphically by plotting it in a chart In this section you ll learn about e creating charts e adding titles to charts Creating charts Creating a chart lets you represent spreadsheet data graphically You can create a chart automatically and have all the chart options chosen for you or you can create a chart by using the Chart Expert which guides you through the steps of creating a chart that best suits a data set You can also create a custom chart which allows you to specify all of
288. l effects Corel Presentations includes a variety of special effects that you can add to bitmapped images You can apply the following special effects to enhance an entire bitmapped image or a specific area that you have selected Blur Brightness Contrast Emboss Equalize Mosaic Rain Saturation Sharpen Smooth Spike removal Stereogram Trace contours and Wind To apply a special effect to a bitmapped image 1 Double click a bitmapped image Click Edit Select area Drag to select an area of the bitmapped image Click Tools Special effects uk WN Enable one of the following options Full image applies the special effect to the entire bitmapped image Inside area applies the special effect inside the selected area e Outside area applies the special effect outside the selected area 6 Choose a special effect from the Effects list If you want to preview the effect click Apply and view the effect in the After preview window op If you increase the Mosaic effect by more than 10 the bitmapped image will disappear From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Scanning bitmapped images bitmapped images scanning Resampling bitmapped images bitmapped images resampling Working with bitmapped images 299 e jf Adding multimedia effects You can add sounds and movies to slide shows in Corel Presentations 10 In this section you ll learn about e working with
289. le you can animate list items so that they move across the screen or animate them in place Bulleted lists inserted on an unformatted slide and bulleted lists on a bulleted list slide have different properties If you create a bulleted list on an unformatted slide the list is treated as an object therefore you can animate the entire list but not individual list items For information about animating objects see Animating objects on page 285 In Corel Presentations you can animate each individual list item when you work with a list on a bulleted list slide When animating list items you can choose from a wide variety of options such as animation type effect direction and speed For example you can make list items bounce across the screen fly in curve in or display one at a time You can also show only Flash enabled transitions if you are publishing a slide show using Flash For more information about Flash see Publishing slides and drawings as HTML documents on page 325 As well you can add sound to a bulleted animation To animate A bulleted list on a bulleted list slide 1 Click Insert New slide Working with bulleted lists 279 uk WN 3 ON A UU BWN Click the Bulleted list layout on the Layout palette and click OK Create the bulleted list and click Format gt Bulleted list properties Click the Bullet animation tab In the Animation type area enable one of the following options e Animate object
290. le platforms You can save WordPerfect and Corel Presentations documents as PDF files Bitstream Font Navigator Bitstream Font Navigator 4 0 is a font manager It lets you find and install fonts organize fonts into manageable groups and view and print font samples To start Bitstream Font Navigator From the Windows taskbar click Start WordPerfect Office 2002 gt Utilities Bitstream Font Navigator CoreLMEMO CorelMEMO is an electronic notepad that allows you to add comments to documents you create with any program that supports Object Linking and Embedding OLE Use Corel MEMO 10 Introduction when you want to leave a reminder note a change in a document or make a remark about a document Desktop Application Director The Desktop Application Director DAD lets you access the major applications in WordPerfect Office 2002 from the Windows taskbar which eliminates the need to create shortcuts You can can customize DAD to include any application or executable file which reduces the need to navigate through the Windows Start menu start Gp wordrerfect 10 Doam TATAD O rmm Dragon NaturallySpeaking Dragon NaturallySpeaking 5 x is powerful voice dictation application software that lets you create and format text by using a number of pre defined commands or by accessing various menu and dialog options by voice You can use the program to dictate into popular e mail applications and to browse the W
291. lick Help Corel Connector S You can also click the Corel Connector button on the toolbar LEN SON You can click a hyperlink to launch your default browser For information about using hyperlinks see Using hyperlinks in the online Help To preview a Web document e Click View gt Preview in browser Publishinq Web documents 131 To convert a Graphic to GIF 1 Right click the graphic and click HTML properties 2 Click the Publish tab 3 Enable the GIF button 4 Enable any of the following check boxes Interlaced lets the image appear interlaced Transparency lets you choose a transparency color le If you enable the Transparency box you can choose a transparency color by clicking the Transparent color button 4 and clicking a transparency color on the color palette To convert a Graphic to JPEG 1 Right click the graphic and click HTML properties 2 Click the Publish tab 3 Enable the JPEG button Publishing to PDF WordPerfect lets you publish documents to PDF Adobe Acrobat Reader allows you to print view and share PDF files You can install Adobe Acrobat Reader from the WordPerfect Office 2002 CD To install Adobe Acrobat Reader 1 Insert the WordPerfect Office 2002 CD into the CD drive If the Setup wizard does not start automatically proceed to step 2 otherwise proceed to step 4 On the Windows taskbar click the Start button and click Run Type D SETUP where D is the letter that
292. lick View gt Range highlighter Enable the View highlighted ranges check box Open the Legend picker and click a color Open the Labels picker and click a color nau FBWN Open the Data picker and click a color To move to a cell 1 Click a datasheet 2 Click Edit gt Go to cell 3 Type a column letter and a row number in the Cell box Working with rows and columns in datasheets You can insert or delete rows and columns in a datasheet When you insert a row it is placed above the selected cell When you insert a column it is inserted to the left of the selected cell To insert A ROW OR column 1 Click a datasheet cell 2 Click Edit gt Insert 3 Enable one of the following options e Row e Column 4 Type a value in the Number to insert box Working with datasheets 311 To delere a row or column 1 Click a datasheet cell 2 Click Edit gt Delete 3 Enable one of the following options e Row Column 4 Type a value in the Number to delete box Using formulas and number Fills in datasheets You can apply formulas while working in a datasheet You can perform several functions that are found in spreadsheet programs such as Quattro Pro For a list of the available formulas see Reference Working with datasheets in the online Help The results are reflected in the data chart For example you can use functions to calculate cumulative totals and averages and to project future data values When creating data char
293. lick a shape 2 Drag a glyph until the shape is the size you want To change the shape of a line or polyline 1 Click a line or polyline 2 Click Edit Edit points 3 Drag the edit points until the shape is the size you want Xi Edit points are specific to lines and polylines If you want to access the edit points of a shape other than a line or polyline you must first convert the shape to a polygon For information about converting a shape to a polygon see To convert a shape to a polygon in the online Help From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Drawing closed curves closed curves drawing Drawing Bezier curves Bezier curves drawing Converting shapes to polygons shapes converting to polygons Changing polygon shapes polygons changing the shape Drawing and editing shapes 293 Working with birmapped images You can create bitmapped images and add them to slide shows and drawings In this section you ll learn about e creating and saving bitmapped images e modifying bitmapped images e creating original artwork e using special effects Creating and saving bitmapped images You can create new original bitmapped images using the Bitmap Editor You can also save a new bitmapped image To create a bitmapped image 1 Click Insert Graphics gt Bitmap 2 Drag to define the bitmap frame 3 Use the bitmap tools in the Bitmap Editor to create a bitmap 4 Click File Close Bit
294. line Help Graphics Graphics include shapes drawings pictures and clipart A shape is any object created using WordPerfect drawing tools A drawing is created using Corel Presentations menus and tools A picture is a bitmapped or graphic image that has been imported into a WordPerfect document Pictures can be imported using a scanner or CD or from paint programs such as Corel PHOTO PAINT Clipart images are images that can be brought into Corel applications and edited or used as they are Corel offers a large selection of clipart in many formats You can purchase additional images including some in bitmap format from commercial suppliers For more information about adding graphics to a document see Inserting graphics in the online Help Styles A style is a collection of formatting attributes applied to characters paragraphs or documents By formatting items with styles you ensure consistent formatting throughout a document Whenever you change the formatting in a style you change the appearance of all items that use that style For more information about formatting with styles see Creating and applying text styles in the online Help Working with documents 39 Templates A template is a preformatted document that can be used as a guide for creating a new document Every document created in WordPerfect is based on a template or a project template When you open WordPerfect the blank document you see is based on the d
295. ll come from and how you are going to enter it into your database Identifying the information you want to retrieve helps you decide what data you need to store Define the fields Separate all the information listed into individual pieces of data Each piece of data will become a field in a table For each field you will need to identify a name data type and size The name will become the name of a field so use something meaningful and specific For the data type select the appropriate option from the list available in Paradox such as alphanumeric number money and date For size you need to determine the number of characters you require to store that piece of data in the field Group fields into tables Look for repeating patterns of fields Group related fields into sets one set for each subject For example a set of fields pertaining to authors might include the author s first name last name date of birth nationality and a unique author number Each set of like fields will become a table Choose key fields Identifying key fields early in the planning process helps you create individual tables faster These may also be the fields you will use when you want to retrieve information from your database Choose unique identifiers as your key fields Planning your database 371 Link the tables Decide which fields are going to link your tables If we use the example of a book collection database the book table would use the
296. ll containing the text Click Format gt Selection properties Click the Alignment tab uk WN In the Horizontal alignment area enable the Center across block option NX Me If you type text in a second cell where text is centered across cells the first entry is centered over cells to the left of the next entry Os To display the centered text in the input line click the cell where the text was S V originally entered Editing and formatting a spreadsheet 207 To ROTATE TEXT 1 Click a cell with text to rotate Click Format Selection properties Click the Alignment tab A UN In the Orientation area enable one of the following options Horizontal orients text horizontally e Vertical orients text vertically Rotated rotates text to the degree you specify DS If you enable the Rotated option specifying 90 or 90 rotates the text vertically SN Working with numeric formats Quattro Pro uses two types of numeric formats number formats and date time formats Numeric formats do not change cell values they change only the way values display When you type numbers Quattro Pro by default rounds off fractional numbers as necessary to fit in the cell You can change the numeric format of a cell to accommodate for example scientific currency decimal and percent formats Quattro Pro lets you hide all values that equal zero on a spreadsheet Hiding zeros does not remove zero values from the sheet
297. lleted list 2 Click at the beginning of a list item 3 Press SHIFT TAB Modifying bulleted list text attributes You can customize the appearance of text and bullets within a bulleted list including the font size color and attributes of text and the outline of font To change the appearance of text in A bulleted list level 1 Click a bulleted list 2 Click Format gt Bulleted list properties 3 Click the Fonts tab 4 Choose a list level from the list 5 Choose a font from the Font face list box 6 Type a value in the Size box 7 Inthe Appearance area enable any of the following check boxes Bold e Underline e Italic 00 In the Color area open the Foreground picker and click a color Ne Open the Background picker and click a color Wen The background color is visible only if a font fill style other than the default is selected For information about changing the font fill see To change the font fill in a bulleted list level in the online Help To change the Font outline in a bulleted List level Click a bulleted list Click Format gt Bulleted list properties Click the Fonts tab Choose a list level from the list In the Font properties dialog box click the Outline tab Open the Color picker and click a color 1 2 3 4 5 In the Appearance area click Font properties 6 7 8 Open the Style picker and click a line style 9 Open the Width picker and click a line width Fo
298. ls patterns and borders Aligning data Working with numeric formats Working with page breaks Creating headers and footers Customizing margins Analyzing data Using statistical analysis tools Creating frequency distribution tables Performing regression analysis Performing matrix operations Creating scenarios Manaaing files and data Opening and saving files Sending files Inserting importing and combining files Importing text into columns Linking and embedding objects Creating notebook links Presenting spreadsheet data in A CHART Creating charts Adding titles to charts Summarizing data using CrossTab reports Creating CrossTab reports Creating CrossTab reports using OLAP data sources Naming CrossTab reports Formatting CrossTab reports do ai Updating and refreshing CrossTab report data 203 204 206 208 209 210 211 215 213 214 215 215 216 237 233 234 235 235 236 148 Table of contents Quattro Pro 10 Welcome to Quattro Pro 10 Quattro Pro lets you create professional spreadsheet based documents to help you manage data It provides all the tools you need to produce tables financial forms lists databases charts reports or any other type of data oriented document With Quattro Pro you can create a notebook that contains a single spreadsheet or an entire project complete with spreadsheets reports and charts A notebook is saved as a single file that you can publish to paper
299. lso be deleted from the QuickCorrect list To enable QuickCorrect 1 Click Tools gt QuickCorrect 2 Click the QuickCorrect tab 3 Enable the Replace words as you type check box You can also Disable QuickCorrect Disable the Replace words as you type check box Enable automatic correction Enable the Correct other mistyped words when possible check box Disable automatic correction Disable the Correct other mistyped words when possible check box SA When the Correct other mistyped words when possible check box is enabled Xi WordPerfect replaces typographical errors that have only one possible correction without notifying you of the change Use the Correct other mistyped words when possible check box only if you are confident that a document uses words found in a standard word list Unusual spellings and proper nouns might be changed automatically when you enable this option QuickCorrect is automatically disabled when you edit a macro To add a word to the QuickCorrect list Click Tools QuickCorrect Click the QuickCorrect tab _ In the With box type the correctly spelled word 2 3 In the Replace box type the misspelled word 4 5 Click Add entry NT You can also add abbreviations to the QuickCorrect list QuickCorrect abbreviations are case sensitive For example if you add wm for William and then you type WM QuickCorrect inserts WILLIAM to the document To delete a word from the Q
300. m document and choose the location of the form file to merge Click Data source and choose the location of the data file to merge Click Output gt Email Choose the field containing the email address from the Select field name of email address list box Merging documents 127 6 In the Subject line box type the subject line for the merged email message 7 Click OK 8 Click Merge Sorting viewing ANd Finding data in data files You can sort a data file Using the Quick Data Entry feature in WordPerfect you can scroll through the records and fields in a data file to view them You can also find records that contain specific text For more information about finding text see Finding and replacing text in the online Help To sort a data File 1 On the Merge toolbar click Options and choose Sort 2 Choose a criteria from the Sort by box 3 Click Sort The table is sorted alphabetically or numerically in ascending order based on the first cell in each row aia For more information about sorting records see Working with records in the online Help Selecting specific data for MERGES When you merge documents you produce copies of the form document Each copy contains specific information from a record in the data source If you do not want to merge all the records in a data source you can limit a merge to certain records in the data file by marking a range of records that you want to merge or by specifying condi
301. make the addition of text field and button objects easier an Expert is launched when the object is added to the form To add a box ellipse or line 1 Click File Open Form Choose the drive and folder where the form is stored Double click a form Click View Design form uk WN Click one of the following tools Box O e Ellipse Line 6 Click and drag over the form where you want draw the object To add a text object Click File gt Open Form Choose the drive and folder where the form is stored Double click a form 1 2 3 4 Click View Design form 5 Click the Text tool 6 Click the position on the form where you want to place the text 7 Follow the steps of the Expert MN We If the Text Expert is not launched automatically click Tools Settings gt Preferences Click the Expert tab and enable the Run experts when creating objects on a document check box To add a field object Click File Open Form Choose the drive and folder where the form is stored Double click a form 1 2 3 4 Click View gt Design form 5 Click the Field tool 1 6 Follow the steps of the Expert X pp If the Field Expert is not launched automatically click Tools Settings Preferences XA Click the Expert tab and enable the Run experts when creating objects on a document check box 366 Paradox 10 To add a button object Click File Open Form Choose the drive and fold
302. map Editor To save a bitmapped image 1 Click a bitmapped image 2 Click File Save 3 Enable the Selected items option 4 Click OK 5 In the Save as dialog box choose the drive and folder where you want to save the bitmapped image an Type a filename in the Filename box 7 Click Save aia Wpg WordPerfect graphic is the default bitmapped image format Working with bitmapped images 297 Modifying birmapped images Modifying bitmapped images in Corel Presentations can be done with precision You can refine small details make drastic changes and intensify effects on the bitmapped image as a whole You can select a specific area of the bitmapped image to modify You can size the frame around the graphic which is useful if you want to eliminate white space around a bitmapped image The following image shows that 1 dragging the corner handle lets you size the frame 2 dragging the side handle lets you size the frame and 3 changing the size of the frame does not change the size of the bitmapped image Zooming in on a bitmapped image lets you perform editing tasks at a precise level of magnification You can then zoom out to view the entire image and the changes that you have made The following image shows that you can view bitmapped images in 1 full size 2 actual size and 3 zoomed view To select an area of a bitmapped image 1 Double click a bitmapped image 2 Click Edit gt Select area
303. mbedding objects in the online Help You can adjust the properties of your scanner You can scan an image such as a picture or drawing directly into WordPerfect as a bitmapped image Using Graphics 91 To insert a clipart IMAGE 1 Click where you want to insert an image 2 Click Insert gt Graphics gt Clipart The Scrapbook opens 3 Browse through the folders in the Scrapbook until you find the image you want to insert 4 Select the clipart image 5 Click Insert Os You can also insert a clipart image by dragging the image from the Scrapbook into a SV document To insert a picture from the WordPerfect Office 2002 CD 1 Insert the WordPerfect Office 2002 CD into your CD drive 2 Click where you want to insert a picture 3 Click Insert Graphics gt From file 4 Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored Pictures have a jpg filename extension 5 Double click a filename A The folder can be found on the CD drive at Corel WPO2002 Graphics Photos folder PS You can also insert a picture by dragging Enable the Shadow cursor drag across the WAY x s area of the document in which you want the picture and click Image from file in the QuickMenu For information about dragging to create graphics see To enable the drag to create option in the online Help To preview a picture before you insert it click Toggle preview E and click the picture filename Working in the draw picture window WordP
304. mns together across page breaks gt lt You can also apply columns to a page by clicking the Columns button EE on the To delete a column 1 Click in a column 2 Click Format gt Columns 3 Click Discontinue NW toolbar to specify the number of columns and other options Ds You can also delete columns by dragging the COL DEF code out of the Reveal Codes window From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Setting styles for binding Setting margins for binding Forcing a new page Using hard returns Using soft returns Changing the line height Adding a vertical line to columns Changing spacing in and between columns Adding tab stops Changing the alignment of tab stops Changing the position of tab stops Removing tab stops Restoring tab stops Inserting and changing leader characters Inserting hard tabs using codes Formatting documents automatically Inserting and editing delay codes binding styles binding margins forcing new page hard returns soft returns line height changing columns adding vertical lines columns changing spacing tab stops adding tab stops alignment tab stops position tab stops removing tab stops restoring leader characters hard tabs inserting documents formatting automatically delay codes 72 WordPerfect 10 Working with headers and footers You can use headers and footers to display information such as number
305. more information about In the online Help Index type Creating reports reports creating Creating mailing labels mailing labels experts Design objects design objects Charts charts creating Printing printing forms 316 Paradox 10 Working with QUERIES Paradox lets you use queries to retrieve data from your tables You control how much information you want to retrieve by specifying fields and records that meet conditions you define For example you could design a simple query that finds all of the customers that made purchases of more than 1000 dollars in the past three months The data retrieved by the query is presented in a temporary table The data displayed in this table is a copy of the data from the original table You can specify the order in which records are displayed By default this table is stored in the Private working directory which is located in the Paradox folder on your hard drive It is automatically overwritten the next time you run a query unless you rename the table and save it to another directory You can also use queries with your data to perform basic calculations and to change insert or delete certain values in records You can run a query on an individual table or on several linked tables Paradox offers three methods for creating a query Query By Example BE lets you create a query based on one or more tables by providing an example of the information you want to retrieve e The Query Ex
306. n gt You can also start CorelCENTRAL Admin from the Windows taskbar Click Start gt S yN WordPerfect Office 2002 gt Utilities CorelCENTRAL Admin To create a calendar from the Corel CENTRAL Calendar application window 1 Click File New 2 Type a name in the Calendar name box 3 In the Location box click the Browse button E and choose the drive and folder where you want to save the calendar 4 Type a name in the Database name box 5 Click Finish To open a calendar 1 File Open 2 Inthe Calendar type area enable one of the following options Personal opens a calendar on a local Paradox database Shared with others opens a corporate calendar on a remote Paradox database or SQL server 3 Choose a database format from the Database storage format list box 4 Follow the instructions on your screen You can also Rename a calendar Click a calendar tab Click File Rename Close a calendar Click a calendar tab Click File Close Setting default calendars You can set a default calendar 410 CorelLCENTRAL 10 To ser a defaulr calendar 1 Click a calendar tab 2 Click File Set default calendar A check mark beside Set default calendar indicates that the default calendar is displayed A If you want to close the default calendar you must first disable the Set default calendar command and set another calendar as the default Selecting dates and times in A calendar There are s
307. n10 Card File where X represents the drive where CorelCENTRAL is installed 4 Type a filename in the Filename box Creating card files You use card files to store and organize individual cards You can create as many card files as you need You can close a card file so that it does not display the next time you start CorelCENTRAL Card File You can move a card file You can also delete a card file To create a card file 1 Click File New 2 Type text in the Name to display on tab box 3 In the Filename for card file box click the Browse button E and choose a drive and folder in which to store the card file To close a card file 1 Clicka card file tab 2 Click File gt Close 3 Choose a card file from the Available card files list To move a card file 1 Click View gt Reorder card files 2 Choose a card file from the card files list 3 Click one of the following e Move up to move the card file up one place in the list e Move down to move the card file down one place in the list 416 CorelLCENTRAL 10 To delere a card file 1 Click a card file tab 2 Click File Delete 3 Choose a card file from the Available card files list Using fields ro organize card file data Fields are categories of information that you can use to record information in card files You can create fields specific to the type of card file you are using For example in a card file of business clients you can create fields t
308. nager that allows you to browse through folders and to set the path where your files are located as your current working directory The Project Viewer window is divided into two panes The left pane lists the objects available in Paradox The right panel displays the names of the files for the selected object type Each object is represented by an icon and each has its own file extension Object Type File Extension Tables DB Listing of related table files FAM Memo field tables MB Primary indexes PX Table view settings TV Validity checks VAL Secondary single field indexes XNN YNN Composite secondary indexes XGN YGN Saved forms FSL Delivered forms FDL Query By Example queries BE Structured Query Language queries SQL Saved reports RSL Delivered reports RDL Saved scripts SSL Delivered scripts SDL Saved libraries LSL Delivered libraries LDL Data models DM Configuration files INI String lists PXR Files relating to tables with extensions FAM MB PX TV VAL XNN YNN XGN YGN are generated by Paradox and should not be opened or edited directly 348 Paradox 10 The Welcome screen The Welcome screen displays when you start Paradox You can choose from six options e New Database lets you view a completed database in the Visual Database Designer e Open Database lets you choose an existing database Database Templates opens the Paradox Database Expert from which you can c
309. nc PalmPilot and CorelCENTRAL you must first enable the SN required Corel CENTRAL PalmPilot conduits For more information see To enable CorelCENTRAL PalmPilot conduits on page 426 To HotSync PalmPilot and an address book Place the PalmPilot in its cradle Right click an address book and click Set as default Click Tools gt Pilot conduits In the Enable disable Pilot conduits dialog box enable the Address Book option Exit and restart HotSync manager nau FWN Press the HotSync button on the PalmPilot cradle To map a COM port To Windows Terminal server from Citrix From the Citrix server shell start a DOS shell 2 At the DOS command prompt type net use comx client comz where x represents the COM port number on the server and z represents the COM port number on the client system 3 Press ENTER Type net use at the DOS command prompt 5 Press ENTER A list of all COM ports mapped on the client system will display HorSyncinq com PalmPilot and CorelCENTRAL 427 Index Corel CENTRAL 10 moving 416 3Com PalmPilot storing 415 Citrix ee RA 427 using 415 CorelCENTRAL Address Book 425 using fields 417 CorelCENTRAL conduits s 425 categorizing HotSyncing with CorelCENTRAL 425 427 memos 422 Windows Terminal server 427 closing card files 416 comment fields A card files 418 alarm sounds creating 418 custom 424 copying alarms memo text 422 Advanced 424 Cor
310. nd fonts Enhanced Portable Document Format PDF support Corel Presentations supports enhanced PDF features including preset PDF styles and the ability to create custom styles author and keyword information hyperlinks and bookmarks on start display options optimization for the Web and text and line art compression You can also include embedded files within PDF files As well compatibility with PDF versions 1 2 and 1 3 and Binary and ASCII 85 encoding control are now available VBA version update Corel Presentations now uses version 6 2 of Visual Basic for Applications VBA Print engine Corel Presentations supports enhanced print features New print dialog boxes have been designed for each application in WordPerfect Office 2002 and Corel Presentations now includes a Print preview button that allows you to view how a print option will affect a slide show or drawing before you actually print it Keyboard shortcuts e F10 Macro pause SHIFT F10 Display popup menu Fonts and macros online e Fonts online moves to Help Corel on the Web gt Fonts online e Macros online moves to Help Corel on the Web gt Macros online Removed features e Version control Ask the PerfectExpert AnswerWorks From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Corel Corportation Corel Corportation about Using Corel Presentations documentation Corel Presentations documentation using Exploring th
311. nd crosshairs to help you place objects precisely on slides or drawings In this section you ll learn about e setting up rulers e setting up grid lines e setting up alignment guides Setting up rulers You can display or hide rulers on the horizontal and vertical axes in a slide show or drawing Using these horizontal and vertical rulers allows you to move and align objects precisely and to adjust indents and tabs in text To display or hide the ruler e Click View gt Ruler A check mark beside the Ruler menu command indicates that the ruler is displayed SETT NG up Gridlines By displaying the grid in Corel Presentations you can use a series of horizontal and vertical gridlines to align objects You can also hide these gridlines To display or hide qridlines e Click View gt Grid guides snap gt Display grid A check mark beside the Display grid menu command indicates that the grid is displayed Setting up alignment Guides Displaying alignment guides allows you to line up objects within a slide show or drawing You can also hide these alignment guides You can create an alignment guide by dragging it from the horizontal or vertical ruler Setting up rulers qrids and quidelines 267 To display or hide alignment quides e Click View gt Grid guides snap gt Display guides A check mark beside the Display guides menu command indicates that the alignment guides are displayed To CREATE AN alignment Guide 1 Cli
312. nd the INTERNET 389 To publish a report to HTML 1 Click File Open gt Report Choose the drive and folder where the table is stored Double click a report Click File Publish as HTML Follow the steps of the Expert uk WN Importing HTML information From the INTERNET The HTML Import Expert helps you import tables or lists from HTML files into an existing Paradox table or a new table that you create If you create a new table you can define the name type and size of each field directly from the Expert To import an HTML file 1 Click File Import 2 Click HTML Expert 3 Follow the steps of the Expert From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Publishing tables to HTML publish to HTML tables Publishing forms to HTML publish to HTML forms Publishing reports to HTML publish to HTML reports Importing HTML files HTML Import Expert 390 Paradox 10 Comparibiliry O with other applications Paradox files can be made compatible with a variety of applications with little formatting or modification required to the data You can publish reports to text HTML and word processor formats import data from Microsoft Excel or other applications into Paradox tables export data from Paradox to other applications copy data from a Paradox table and paste it into a Quattro Pro spreadsheet and insert Paradox table data into a text document You can also open files created in previous versio
313. new page From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Adjusting the separator line between document separator line between text and footnotes text and footnotes adjusting Formatting headers headers formatting Formatting footers footers formatting Formatting text text formatting 76 WordPerfect 10 Using lists and outlines You can organize text by using bullets numbers or outlines Bullets help to differentiate items in a list or add emphasis to selected paragraphs You can use bullets to mark list items that have no particular order Numbered lists and outlines help you organize and display information and are used to show the relationship between ideas Bulleted lists numbered lists and outlines can include several levels of numbering For example you can number first level items 1 2 3 and second level items a b c You can also use outline or legal styles such as 1 a i or 1 1 1 or 1 1 1 In this section you ll learn about e creating and applying bulleted lists e numbering lists and outlines e creating outlines with headings Creating and applying bulleted Lists You can create bulleted lists by applying one of the preset formats provided with WordPerfect 10 or you can enable QuickBullets and use them to create lists as you type You can replace a bullet with a custom symbol such as a heart star or check mark You can also apply a bullet format to existing text Th
314. nformation your form will include and which tables it will draw information from you can choose from one of three methods to create your form e Quick Form the fastest way to create a form based on one table It displays all the fields for a single record in a table e Data model a data model serves as the reference for creating a form based on two or more linked tables You must create the data model beforehand See Creating a data model on page 364 e The Form Expert guides you through the process of creating a form based on one or more tables If you are using more than two tables you must create a data model first See Creating a data model on page 364 Working with forms 363 The following image illustrates an example of a Quick Form To create a Quick form 1 Click File Open gt Table 2 Choose the drive and folder where the table is stored 3 Double click a table 4 Click Tools gt Quick design gt Quick form To create A form using a data model Click File New gt Form Click Data model Choose lt Data models gt from the list box at the bottom of Data model dialog box Double click a Data model Click OK Choose Field layout and Style options Click OK Click View View data ON AU FWN To create A form using The Form Expert Click Tools Experts Click Form Click Run expert PWN Follow the steps of the Expert Creating A data model A data model is the graphical
315. ng dates ee Da 56 applying double 65 inserting horizontal graphics line 56 double 65 inserting items 56 removing 65 inserting numbering 57 single 65 inserting the document filename 56 initial caps inserting time 56 automatically correcting 68 suppressing 55 inserting viewing 54 chapter numbers 82 highlighting columns in tables 104 hiding 62 dates ihe h 41 removing 62 fields in form documents 125 text 62 footers 53 54 HTML headers ie bah Se wes op 53 54 publishing 131 132 horizontal graphics lines in footers 56 hyphenating horizontal graphics lines in headers 56 automatic 70 items in footers 56 changing options 71 items in headers 56 changing position 71 page numbers 82 changing zone width 70 pictures 92 choosing options 71 rows in tables 104 inserting nonbreaking 70 table columns 104 setting notifications 71 table rows 104 setting prompts 71 time 41 text 70 volume numbers 82 hyphens inserting nonbreaking 70 nonbreaking 70 J positioning in words 72 joining table cells 104 tables 105 justifying ignoring text 65 66 table cells during calculations 111 images adjusting brightness 98 K adjusting color attributes 98 keyboard merge adjusting contrast 98 stopping 127 cropping 98 enlarging 97 flipping 99 L inverting colors eos 98 ere y labels moving within graphics boxes 98 reducing 97 creating for a merge 125 restoring original 98 layout document 48 49 rotating 99
316. ng it to a different folder or with a different filename If you are using an unusual font or if you want to ensure that the font you are using displays properly you can embed the font Embedding ensures that the information for all of the fonts used in a document is saved with the document To save a document for the first time 1 Click File Save 2 Choose the drive and folder where you want to store the document 3 Type a name for the document in the File name box 4 Click Save DS You can also save a document by pressing F3 which displays the Save dialog box SN To save chanqes TO A dOCUMENT e Click File Save DS You can also save a document by clicking the Save button on the toolbar l oy To save a document TO A NEW location or with A NEW NAME Click File Save as Choose the drive and folder where you want to store the document from the Save in list box Type a name for the document in the File name box A U N e Click Save PR NT NG A dOCUMENT You can print a document or part of a document For more information about printing documents see Printing in the online Help To print A dOCUMENT 1 Click File gt Print 2 Choose a printer from the Current printer list box 3 Inthe Print area enable one of the following options Full document prints the entire document e Current page prints the page in which the cursor is positioned e Pages prints a range of pages Selected text p
317. ning and saving Files Using Quattro Pro you can open files from other applications For example if you use Microsoft Excel or Lotus 1 2 3 you can open these files in Quattro Pro You can also open files from the Internet Quattro Pro can open a Quicken Interchange Format qif file You can also open files that contain startup macros and because such macros may contain viruses you can choose to open these files without launching their macros You can save Quattro Pro data as database files in dBASE or Paradox file format The field names are based on the data in the first row of the first sheet If the first row contains data that is invalid as a database field name for example containing numbers spaces symbol characters or duplicate labels Quattro Pro uses the spreadsheet column letters to represent the field names You can save Quattro Pro files in other formats as well To open a file from another application 1 Click File Open 2 Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored 3 Choose the filename extension from the File type list box 4 Double click the filename XT If the drive you require is not displayed in the Look in list box you may have to map the drive Ifthe drive will not map to the path you specify you may not have access to that location Managing files and dara 219 To open a file from the Internet 1 Click File Open 2 Type a URL in the Filename box 3 Click Open Ne Quattro Pro makes
318. ns of Paradox Publishing reports Paradox lets you publish your reports to text TXT HTML HTM WordPerfect WPD Rich Text Format RTF Microsoft Word 97 DOC and AmiPro document file formats To publish a report 1 Click File Open Report 2 Choose the drive and folder where the report is stored 3 Double click a report 4 Click File Publish as and choose one of the following e Text e HTML e WPD e RTF e DOC AmiPro Document 5 Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the file Type the filename in the File name box ImporTiNG ANd EXPORTING dATA Paradox allows you to import data into your tables from another application You can choose to import data from a text file an HTML file another database application or a spreadsheet program such as Quattro Pro Lotus 1 2 3 or Microsoft Excel Three methods are available Import Text Expert and HTML Import Expert For more information on the HTML Import Expert see Importing HTML information from the Internet on page 390 Compatibility with other applications 391 The Export feature allows you to move data from your Paradox tables to a text file a WordPerfect document a dBase table or a table created in an earlier version of Paradox You can also export data to a spreadsheet program such as Quattro Pro Lotus 1 2 3 or Microsoft Excel In the case of text files Paradox can import and export text in delimited or fixed length formats A delimi
319. ntered label Type before a value Type before a value Type before a value PS You can also type an alignment character before a backslash if you want a label to begin with a backslash but don t want to repeat the character after it Creating A spreadsheet 183 To insert special characters and symbols Click a cell 2 Click Insert Symbol 3 Choose a character set from the Set list box 4 Choose a character from the Symbols list 5 Click Insert Mas Ds You can also insert special characters and symbols by clicking the WP characters S button on the property bar To repeat A CHARACTER 1 Click a cell 2 Type backslash character and type a character 3 Press ENTER To REPEAT A series OF CHARACTERS IN A PATTERN 1 Click a cell 2 Type backslash character and type the set of characters to be repeated For example abc Entering values A value is a number formula date or time Quattro Pro determines that data is a value from the characters you type The data type displays in the application bar Numbers entered in cells can consist only of the following e numerals 0 to 9 minus sign for negative numbers plus sign for positive numbers currency symbols for example e one decimal point e atrailing e an E for scientific notation When entering numbers be aware of the following restrictions e Use a minus sign not parentheses to indicate a n
320. nts clipart and photos can be installed on a network to give multiple users access without installing them on individual systems Welcome to WordPerfect Office 2002 11 Install As You Go Install As You Go lets you minimize the hard disk space required by WordPerfect Office 2002 applications If you try to use an item that is not installed Install As You Go asks if you would like to install it You can install only the applications and utilities you need as you need them Macros and PerfectScript Macros are time saving programming scripts that automate routine tasks Macros let you reproduce the behavior of keyboard commands some mouse actions and menu commands For example you can create a macro that retrieves a file gives it a new name and saves it in another format Then at any time you can play the macro to repeat the action PerfectScript is the macro language for WordPerfect Quattro Pro and Corel Presentations It is a command based language that lets you record the results of keystrokes or mouse selections instead of recording the keystrokes themselves For example instead of recording each keystroke involved in changing the top margin of a document to 2 inches you can use PerfectScript to record the command MarginTop MarginWidth 2 0 PerfectScript includes programming commands that direct the function of a macro These commands let you create macros that can prompt user input make decisions and access syst
321. ny changes to the report after it has been saved and named No record information appears in this view Run Report allows you to see and print your records The following image illustrates a sample report Meira abe ae Linting of Coria Deve Boos ETTEI Acida a Peewee CREATING A REPORT Paradox offers three methods for creating a report e Quick Report the fastest way to create a report based on one table It displays all the records for a single table e Data Model a data model serves as the reference for creating a report based on two or more linked tables You must create the data model beforehand See Creating a data model on page 364 e The Report Expert guides you through the process of creating a report based on one or more tables If you are using more than two tables you must create a data model first See Creating a data model on page 364 Working with reports 371 To 1 2 3 4 To ON AU FWN To uN CREATE A Quick Report Click File Open Table Choose the drive and folder where the table is stored Double click a table Click Tools Quick design Quick report CREATE A REPORT USING A data model Click File gt New gt Report Click Data model Choose Data models from the list box at the bottom of Data model dialog box Double click a data model Click OK Enable the Multi record option Click OK Click View Run report CREATE A REPORT USING The Repor
322. o join 2 Click Format Selection properties 3 Click the Alignment tab 4 Enable the Join cells check box in the Cell options area Os You can also join cells by selecting the cells to join and clicking the Join cells gt W button on the toolbar The data in cells joined with this method is automatically centered Changing text Font and APpEARANCE You can change the text in one or more cells by adjusting its font face font size or text color Changing the color of text does not affect cell color or shading Custom colors can also be used to color text You can also change the appearance of text For example you can underline and italicize text or you can set text to superscript or subscript Editing and formatting a spreadsheet 203 To change text Font and style 1 Select the cells with text to format 2 Click Format Selection properties 3 Click the Cell font tab 4 Choose a font face from the Face list 5 Choose a font size from the Size list box 6 Open the Color picker and click a color Liz If a font face has a TrueType TT or Adobe Type Manager a symbol beside it text 7 displays in print as it does on the screen Font faces with a printer symbol beside them print but may not display in the correct font face on the screen Font faces without a symbol display accurately on the screen but may not display in the correct font when printed If text does not appear on your printout choose a darker color l
323. o record the client name company telephone number average size of order and any other pertinent information Global and local fields You can create global and local fields Global fields display on every card in a card file When you change the properties of a global field the changes are applied to every card that contains that field Local fields display on selected cards and are used for information that is unique to one or a few cards but not all Comment fields You can create comment fields to record details about another field For example if you have two copies of a book in a card file inventory of your book collection you can use a comment field to specify which is copy one and which is copy two The illustration below shows a comment field in the Corel CENTRAL Card File application window ELA Ele Edb fer ai Toa ii GOGO ae Fa E a m cope To create a Global field 1 Click a card file tab 2 Click Cards gt New global field 3 Type a field name You can also Duplicate a field Click a field Click Cards Duplicate field Undo changes to a field Click Edit Undo field changes Delete a field Click a field Click Cards Delete field Using Corel CENTRAL Card File 417 To create A local field 1 Click a card file tab 2 Click a card 3 Click Cards gt New local field 4 Typea field name You can also Duplicate a field Click a field Click Cards Duplicate field
324. o the last page of the report Go To Page ul Open the Go To Page dialog box where you can specify the page you want to display To preview A REPORT e Click View gt Run report PRINTING A REPORT A report can be viewed as a screen document or it can be printed When you are ready to print your report there are several items to consider regarding the look of your final document To pRINT A REPORT 1 Click File Open gt Report 2 Double click a report 3 Click File gt Print 4 Inthe Print Range area enable one of the following options Full file will print the entire file e Pages will print only specific pages from the file Enter a range In the Copies area type the number of copies you want to print in the Number of copies box Click the Advanced tab In the Overflow handling area select one of the following options for printing data that is too wide to fit the page o N OQ U e Create horizontal overflow pages as needed prints report data on multiple pages if the data exceeds the page s dimensions e Clip to page width cuts off any report data that exceeds the page s dimensions Working with reports 317 To print with Landscape paper ORIENTATION Click File Open Report 2 Choose the drive and folder where the report is stored 3 Double click a report 4 Click File Print 5 Click Properties 6 Inthe Orientation area enable the Landscape option from 7 Click OK From here For
325. of shadows within the Type values in the Horizontal and Vertical offset gradient boxes From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Changing border space borders changing space Changing the drop shadow drop shadows changing Applying borders and fills Merging documents When you perform a merge you combine a form document and a data source to form a new series of documents The merge reproduces copies of the form document with each copy containing information from a specific record in the data source In this section you ll learn about e creating data for a merge e working with form documents for a merge e associating merge files e performing a merge e sorting data files e selecting specific data for merges Creating data For A MERGE When you merge documents you produce copies of a form document Each copy contains specific information from a record in a data source such as a data file an address book or keyboard input When you use a WordPerfect data file as the data source you can create either a data text file or a data table file In both types of data files information is organized into records and fields For example a record may include a name address telephone number and other contact information Each item within the record for example name and address is recognized as a field When you create a data text file each field is marked by the ENDFIELD code and each reco
326. of the arc Drawing and editing shapes 291 To dr nu FWN To dr AW A CURVE Click Insert Shape gt Line Shapes gt Curve Click once in the drawing or slide show window Drag to start the curved line Click to create the first section of the curve Drag to continue the curve Double click to complete the curve aw A shape 1 Click Insert Shape and click a shape in one of the following categories Basic shapes Arrow shapes Flowchart shapes Star shapes Callout shapes Action shapes If you want to draw a shape from the center hold down ALT and click where you want to create the center of the shape 2 Drag diagonally to draw the shape A For more information about creating action shapes see Creating SpeedLink objects in the online Help Os You can also create a shape with equal horizontal and vertical dimensions by holding down ALT SHIFT as you draw the shape Editing shapes You can edit the shapes you add to slides and drawings With a click of the mouse you can selectively place nodes that can be pulled to add precise lines and curves to shapes You can also size a shape using the glyphs and you can change the form angle or direction of a line or polylin e by using the edit points The following image shows how you can edit a shape by dragging 1 a glyph 2 a corner handle and 3 a side handle 292 Corel Presentations 10 To size a shape by using a glyph 1 C
327. of transparent color over text which is useful for editing documents or for distinguishing words and paragraphs You can highlight and remove the highlighting from part or all of a document and you can change the highlight color You can also hide highlighting in a document FORMATTING TEXT 61 To highlight text 1 Click Tools Highlight On The cursor changes to a highlighting pen 2 Select the text 3 Click Tools gt Highlight On Highlighting is disabled when no check mark displays beside the On menu command PS You can also highlight text by selecting text and clicking the Highlight button s To remove highlighting from text 1 Select the highlighted text 2 Click Tools Highlight Remove iD You can also remove highlighting by clicking anywhere in the highlighted text and So clicking the Highlight button Highlighting is removed from the entire highlighted section To change the highlight color 1 Click Tools Highlight Color 2 Open the Color picker and click a color 3 Type a value in the Shading box Higher values darken the highlight color Lower values lighten it Ne The color change does not apply to text that has already been highlighted To change the color of highlighted text you must first select the text Os You can also change the highlight color by opening the Highlight picker and S clicking a color To hide highlighting e Click Tools Highlight gt Print show No check ma
328. om fields in an OLAP server by selecting an OLAP server as the data source You can also import CrossTab reports created with OLAP software into Quattro Pro To select an OLAP data source for a CrossTab report 1 Click Tools Data tools CrossTab Report Enable the OLAP report option Click OK In the CrossTab data sources dialog box select the server you want uk WN In the Connect to provider dialog box type a user ID and password 234 Quattro Pro 10 To import OLAP CrossTab reports Click Tools Data tools CrossTab Report Enable the OLAP report option Click OK In the CrossTab data sources dialog box select the server you want In the Connect to provider dialog box type a user ID and password Select a data source In the CrossTab report dialog box click Import report In the Import templates dialog box choose a report type OmAnN DU FWN In the Import report dialog box choose a report Ne You must have an OLAP provider running in the background before you can connect to the server Naming CrossTab reports After you create a CrossTab report you can change its name from the default If you generate several CrossTab reports from data you have to assign a unique name to each report To name a CrossTab report 1 Click a cell in a CrossTab report 2 Click Tools Data tools CrossTab Options 3 Type a name for the report in the Name box Formatting CrossTab reports Once you summa
329. om the list box Click the Macro command category tab Click Add Perform one of the following actions nau FWN e Click Quattro Pro macro and type the macro command in the Enter macro box e Click PerfectScript macro and specify the macro file wcm 7 Click Apply and drag the new button to a toolbar yz You can change the appearance and associated tooltip for the new button by clicking LY on the Appearance and General tabs You can delete a toolbar button by selecting the command from the list and clicking Remove Working with the application bar The application bar displays mode and status indicators For example if you press CAPS LOCK the application bar lets you know that CAPS LOCK is on You can customize the application bar to record and maintain your personal preferences The application bar is usually located at the bottom of the Quattro Pro desktop However you can change the position of the application bar You can also change the height of the application bar Getting started 161 The QuickCell feature is also displayed on the application bar With QuickCell you can view a selected cell on the application bar to see its updated value as you change other cells elsewhere in the spreadsheet To customize the application bar 1 Right click the application bar and click Customize gt Application bar Add new command 2 Select View from the Commands list box 3 Select a command from the list 4 Dr
330. ommands that can alter remove or corrupt data or files on your system This type of macro is often referred to as a virus For your convenience Quattro Pro displays a message alerting you that the file contains this kind of macro Entering labels and special characters You can create labels in a spreadsheet which unlike other cell data cannot be calculated in formulas A label can be text address text with numbers 145 Howard Street or numbers seen 182 Quattro Pro 10 as text 202 555 1212 a phone number A label can begin with any letter punctuation mark or symbol except the following characters Character Description forward slash plus minus dollar sign opening parenthesis number sign period equals If you type one of these characters Quattro Pro treats the information as a formula or value You can force Quattro Pro to read values as labels by typing an alignment character before the value For example to enter Before Taxes you would type Before Taxes You can insert special characters and symbols that are not on your keyboard such as icons phonetic characters and characters in other languages Quattro Pro also lets you repeat characters or a series of characters in a cell To create A label 1 Click a cell 2 Type alphanumeric characters 3 Press ENTER To create A label from a value To create Do the following Left aligned label Right aligned label Ce
331. on you ll learn about e starting and quitting CorelCENTRAL Memos e working with memos e categorizing memos STARTING ANd QuiTTING Corel CENTRAL Memos You can start Corel CENTRAL Memos from the Windows taskbar You can also quit Corel CENTRAL Memos To start Corel CENTRAL Memos 1 Click Start on the Windows taskbar 2 Click Programs WordPerfect Office 2002 CorelCENTRAL Applications CorelCENTRAL Memos To ouvir CoreLCENTRAL Memos e Click File Exit Working with memos You can create as many memos as you need You can rename and view the contents of a memo You can also find a memo by using a text search and copy or move text between memos To CREATE A MEMO 1 Click File New 2 Type a name for the memo below the memo icon and press ENTER 3 Type text in the Type in the memo text here box To RENAME A MEMO 1 Select a memo 2 Click File Rename 3 Type a new name for the memo below the memo icon and press ENTER Using Corel CENTRAL Memos 421 To view The CONTENTS of a memo e Select a memo The contents of the memo display in the Type in the memo text here box To find a memo by using a TexT search 1 Click Edit gt Find 2 Type text in the Find box 3 Click Find now To copy OR MOVE MEMO TEXT 1 Select a memo from which you want to copy or move text 2 Select text from the Type in the memo text here box 3 Click Edit and click one of the following e Cut removes the selected text from th
332. on page 358 for a description of parent child table relationships available in Paradox From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Creating forms Data models forms data model 372 Paradox 10 Working with tables and records In a database information is stored in tables There are three aspects to every database table e Table structure the arrangement of fields data types and sizes By carefully designing your table fields you build a solid framework to house your data in an orderly fashion e Special table properties the rules that dictate what and how data can be entered This aspect of table creation is critical to ensuring that the data you enter into your table is correct complete and complies with a prescribed format e Table records the groups of values or data that make up your table Creating A table STRUCTURE The basic aspects of a table structure are field names types and sizes It is important to plan your table structure carefully from the outset so that you don t run into problems later on as you add data You can create your table from scratch defining each field to suit your needs exactly or you can create a table based on a predefined template using the Table Expert With either approach you can restructure your table after it is created Choose your field sizes according to the number of characters in the longest entry you expect to make for ea
333. onger useful you can easily delete cells rows columns or multiple rows and columns You can prevent other users from adding rows and columns to a spreadsheet by entering data in the last cell of the spreadsheet Since this cell can t be pushed down or to the right no extra cells can be added to the spreadsheet To insert a cell 1 Select a cell in the location where you want to insert a new cell 2 Click Insert gt Insert cells 3 Enable the Partial option in the Span area 4 Enable one of the following options in the Dimension area Rows the selected cell will shift down and out of the way e Columns the selected cell will shift to the right Sheets the selected cell will shift to the next spreadsheet Ds You can also insert multiple cells Make sure the upper left corner of the cells you S WY select contains the first cell entry you want shifted right down or back The cells you select should be the same size as the amount of space you want to insert To INSERT A ROW 1 Select the row heading just below where you want the row inserted 2 Click Insert Insert row Getting started 167 MMe When you insert a row within the boundaries of a named area or a cell referenced by i a formula the cell references expand to include the new row OS You can insert multiple rows by selecting multiple row headings then clicking Insert so gt Insert row To insert a column 1 Select the column heading to the right of where yo
334. ons 317 text Eob g 275 adding positions 316 to cells in datasheets 311 adding staff positions 317 MP3 adding subordinate positions 317 support 257 adding text E 316 multimedia changing branch orientation 319 adding effects to slide shows 301 changing branch structures Tee 319 multiple objects changing branch structures and orientation 318 selecting 283 creating Gs 315 316 displaying subordinate positions 318 editing text E 4 316 N hiding subordinate positions 318 new replacing manager positions 317 opening slideshows 2 262 replacing positions 316 opening slide shows from predefined projects 262 saving 315 new levels saving styles 316 creating for existing bulleted list items 277 viewing 317 creating within bulleted lists 277 viewing entire 317 number fills viewing selected branches 317 using in datasheets 312 working with 315 numbers orientation filling cells automatically 312 changing organization chart branches 318 original artwork creating 297 O outlines TOEN applying to objects 284 object animations o changing title and subtitle font 282 applying sounds 286 creating in slide shows 263 objects Ba animating 285 286 Se applying color 284 objects 285 d text IS 274 applying custom COINS 20D Oxford Pocket Dictionary 257 applying effects 285 334 Index Corel Presentations 10 speaker notes 322 P specific objects in slides and drawings 322 paint brush tool
335. oose a bar shape from the Bar shape list Line Line and marker Marker click a marker shape in the Marker shape area and type a value in the Marker size box 7 Inthe Axis area enable one of the following options Primary y1 e Secondary y2 A a It is recommended that you use no more than eight series when you create a bar chart Sizing and moving data charts You can change the size of a data chart proportionally and you can stretch or shrink a data chart You can also move a data chart to a new location in the drawing window To size a data chart To Do the following Size a data chart proportionally Click a data chart and drag a corner handle inward or outward Stretch or shrink the data chart Double click a data chart and drag a corner or side handle inward or outward To move A data chart 1 Click a data chart 2 Drag the data chart to a new location in the drawing window Adding legends to data charts To further identify a data chart you can add a legend that can be displayed and positioned inside a data chart To add a legend to a data chart 1 Double click a chart 2 Click Chart Legend 3 Click the Type position tab 4 Inthe Legend type area click one of the following e Horizontal e Vertical 5 Inthe Position area enable a legend position option You can also Display the legend Enable the Display legend check box 306 Corel Presentations 10 Display the legend insid
336. ooter dotted area 3 Make any change 4 Click outside the header or footer PS You can also edit headers or footers by click File Page setup clicking the Header footer tab and typing the appropriate changes in either the Header or Footer box CusTomiziNG MARGINS Quattro Pro lets you display all margins on a page You can also change margin settings to best present data To display all marqins ON A page 1 Click View gt Page 2 Click View gt Zoom 3 Enable the 50 option PS You can also display all margins on a page by clicking the Zoom E button on the NW toolbar and choosing 50 from the list Editing and formatting a spreadsheet 211 To chanqe MARGIN SETTINGS 1 Click File Page setup 2 Click the Print margins tab 3 Type the margin measurements in the following boxes e Top the distance between the top of the page and the header Bottom the distance between the bottom of the page and the footer Right the distance between the right edge of the paper and the data Left the distance between the left edge of the paper and the data NM Me If in displays next to the default margin settings the measurements you type are recorded in inches If cm displays the measurements are recorded in centimeters Using decimals indicates partial inches or centimeters for example 0 5 centimeters DS You can also change a margin by clicking View gt Page and dragging a dotted margin amp
337. or columns Vertically split panes scroll together vertically and horizontally split panes scroll together horizontally If you unsynchronize the panes you can scroll the panes independently to display different parts of the notebook You can also resize the panes To select a notebook window e On the application bar click the button that displays the window s name NM Me The window with the highlighted title bar is active See DS You can toggle back and forth between Quattro Pro and a non spreadsheet window SN such as the Spell Checker by pressing ALT F6 To arrange notebook windows e Choose one of the following menu items e To show all windows on the screen at the same time click Window gt Tile top to bottom or click Window gt Tile side by side as appropriate When possible the windows are all given equal room on the screen e To rearrange all open windows in overlapping layers click Window Cascade The top line of each window is revealed to show the name of the notebook chart or dialog box it contains To hide a notebook window 1 Click the window 2 Click Window gt Hide Ds To show a hidden notebook window click Window Show SY 174 Quarrro Pro 10 To select a notebook view 1 Click View 2 Click one of the following views Draft does not display some document elements such as footers page breaks and margins although they may exist in the notebook Because not all features display workin
338. orel products Registering Corel products is important Registration provides you with timely access to the latest product updates valuable information about product releases and access to free downloads articles tips and tricks and special offers For more information about registering a Corel product see the online Help for the product or see http www corel com support register on the Internet Technical support The Web address for Corel is http www corel com on the Internet A list of localized Corel Web sites is available at http www corel com international country htm on the Internet Corel LINUX information is available at http linux corel com on the Internet Self serve technical support options Several self serve tools are available to address technical questions 24 hours a day seven days a week Self serve option How to access Support newsgroups http www corel com support newsgroup htm Knowledge Base http kb corel com FAQs http www corel com support faq AnswerPerfect http www corel com support answerperfect htm File Transfer Protocol FTP ftp ftp corel com Corel support and services 27 Self serve option How to access FTP information http www corel com support ftpsite ftpindex ht m Online Help Type keyword Technical Support Interactive Voice Answering Network IVAN 1 877 42 COREL Automated Fax on Demand 1 877 42 COREL IVAN and Fax on Demand are available only in North Ameri
339. orner arrow Ds You can also select rows columns and tables by clicking Table Row col indicators SN To copy table components 1 Select a range of cells a row or a column 2 Click Edit gt Copy 3 Enable one of the following options e Selection copies only the selected cells e Row copies the selected row e Column copies the selected column e Cell copies the selected cell to the Clipboard or down or to the right a specified number of times 4 Click where you want to paste the cells row or column 5 Click Edit gt Paste Using tables and charts 103 lt Ifyou want to move a selected range of cells a row or a column click Edit Cut l oY You can also copy table components by selecting a range of cells a row or a column right clicking and clicking Copy SETTING ANd iNSERTING ROWS ANd columns in Tables You can set the number of rows and columns in a table You can also insert columns or rows in a table New columns or rows have the same formatting as the column or row in which the cursor is positioned To set the number of rows and columns in a table 1 Select a table 2 Click Table Format 3 Click the Table tab 4 Inthe Table size area type values in the following boxes e Columns e Rows Ds If you add columns and you want all the columns to be the same width select a row S WY and click Table Equal column widths To insert a column or ROW in A Table 1
340. os Macros are computer scripts that automate complex or repetitive command sequences A macro is a sequence of commands that Quattro Pro runs automatically Macros can perform keystrokes mouse actions and menu commands You can use macros to automate tasks such as printing a standard report enter frequently used labels with a keystroke or build complete applications to simplify Quattro Pro tasks for other users Working with Quattro Pro Experts Quattro Pro Experts quickly and simply guide you step by step through many spreadsheet tasks You can access Quattro Pro Experts from a toolbar or from a menu The following Experts are available e PerfectExpert helps you quickly perform many common Quattro Pro tasks e Analysis Expert helps you make many analysis calculations such as advanced regression correlation covariance exponential smoothing F test moving average sampling T test and Z test Budget Expert guides you in creating five different budget templates for both home and business use e Consolidate Expert lets you combine cells using statistical operators SUM AVG COUNT MIN MAX STD STDS VAR VARS after which you can sort the combined data External Data Expert lets you easily import data from a database such as a Paradox or dBASE database It also supports Query By Example QBE and Open Database Connectivity ODBC e Map Expert builds a map from selected cells of data Scenario
341. osition of a drop cap 1 Click before a drop cap 2 Click the Drop cap position button Al on the property bar 3 In the Position area type a value in the Position drop cap in margin box PS You can also specify the position of a drop cap by moving the slider in the Position area Ss You can also change the position of a drop cap by clicking the Drop cap position picker on the property bar and clicking a drop cap position To change the style of a drop cap 1 Click before a drop cap 2 Click the Drop cap style button l on the property bar 3 In the Style area click one of the following e No drop cap Drop cap in margin e 50 in margin Drop cap in text You can also Change the font of a drop cap Click before a drop cap Click the Drop cap font button A on the property bar Choose a font from the Face list In the Appearance area enable any of the attribute check boxes Change the color of a drop cap Click before a drop cap Click the Drop cap font button A on the property bar Open the Color picker and click a color Type a percentage in the Shading box Ds You can also change the style of a drop cap by clicking the Drop cap style picker NW on the property bar and clicking a drop cap style INdENTING TEXT Indenting arranges text on a page by moving one or more lines to the left or the right of the paragraph margin You can indent a line or paragraph manually or you can indent lines or paragraphs automatic
342. ou can print continued messages for footnotes or endnotes that span a page break and you can change the numbering method for footnotes and endnotes 74 WordPerfect 10 Starting new numbers for footnotes and endnotes is another option which is useful when you want each chapter or section of a document to have its own footnotes or endnotes In addition you can adjust the separator line that displays between document text and footnotes or endnotes To change the Format of a Footnote OR endnote number 1 Click Insert gt Footnote endnote 2 Enable one of the following options Footnote number Endnote number 3 Click Options and click Advanced 4 Inthe Edit numbering style area click one of the following In text lets you specify a format for all endnote or footnote numbers in the document text In note lets you specify a format for endnote or footnote numbers in their sections 5 In the Styles editor dialog box modify any attributes To change the location of Footnotes ON A PAGE Click Insert Footnote endnote Enable the Footnote number option Click Options and click Advanced rPWN In the Position area enable one of the following options e Place notes below text e Place notes at bottom of page To change the amount of space between FOOTNOTES OR endnotes 1 Click Insert Footnote endnote 2 Enable one of the following options Footnote number Endnote number 3 Click Options and cli
343. ou manage time tasks appointments and email and facilitate communication in a corporate environment Corel CENTRAL Mail CorelCENTRAL Mail is a secure email client that lets you manage multiple IMAP and POP3 accounts in a single profile CorelCENTRAL Mail supports S MIME encryption and authentication technology which lets you use digital signatures and digital certificates to ensure the authenticity of email messages that you send and receive You can also set general security defaults in your user profile and individual security settings on CorelCENTRAL Address Book entries You can apply a selected template or stationery style background to an email message use writing tools to edit an email message and set a priority level You can also save email messages in HTML format for publishing to the World Wide Web or to an intranet You can filter email messages that you send and receive and flag email messages that you receive The Quick view tool lets you view attachments in over 225 file formats without opening a separate application Groupware The CorelCENTRAL Calendar groupware functionality facilitates communication and collaboration in a corporate environment by allowing you to manage people projects and resources You can schedule events with other users add an event to another user s calendar and send them an email notification of the event You can assign a task or subtask to a colleague or a group add a due date put the task
344. ound card you will see a visual reminder when the alarm is set to sound In this section you ll learn about e starting CorelCENTRAL Alarms e setting alarms e editing and deleting alarms Starting Corel CENTRAL Alarms There are several ways to start CorelCENTRAL Alarms By default CorelCENTRAL Alarms starts automatically when you start Windows You can also start CorelCENTRAL Alarms from the Start menu and the Desktop Application Director DAD both located on the Windows taskbar To start Corel CENTRAL Alarms from the Windows Start MENU 1 Click Start on the Windows taskbar 2 Click Programs WordPerfect Office 2002 CorelCENTRAL Applications CorelCENTRAL Alarms To start Corel CENTRAL Alarms from the DAD e Click the CorelCENTRAL Alarms icon on the DAD Setting alarms Quick alarms sound after a period of time such as one minute or two days Advanced alarms sound at a specific date and time and they can be customized with sounds from wav mp3 and CD multimedia sources CorelCENTRAL Alarms uses the date and time properties from your computer and recognizes weeks days hours and minutes in the following formats e 366 hours e 15 days 6 hours e 15d6h Using Corel CENTRAL Alarms 423 e 12 hours 1 minute e 3 days 3 hours 1 minute You can set a Quick alarm You can also set an Advanced alarm and apply a custom sound to it If you do not apply a custom sound to an Advanced alarm CorelCENTRAL Alarms uses the s
345. owing e Page Two pages oe Headers and footers do not display in Draft view Formatting headers and footers You can edit the information contained in headers and footers and you can adjust the distance below a header or above a footer As well you can suppress headers and footers so that they do not display on a page and do not print Discontinuing a header or footer removes it from the remainder of the document To edit a header or footer 1 Click Insert Header footer 2 Enable one of the following options Header A e Header B Footer A Footer B 3 Click Edit Make any changes to the text 5 Click File Close 54 WordPerfect 10 PI If the Page view command or the Two pages view command is displayed you can S WY also edit the header or footer by clicking anywhere inside the header or footer To adjust the distance below a header or above a footer 1 Click Insert Header footer 2 Enable one of the following options e Header A e Header B e Footer A e Footer B 3 Drag the header or footer guidelines up or down P2 lt You can also adjust the distance above a footer or below a header by clicking the SN Header Footer distance button El on the property bar and typing a value in the Distance between text and header footer box To suppress a header or Footer 1 Click Format gt Page gt Suppress 2 Enable any of the following check boxes e Header A e Header B e Footer A e Footer B LS You can al
346. page number 1 Click Format gt Page Suppress 2 Enable the Page numbering check box To discontinue page numbers 1 Click Format gt Page Numbering 2 From the Position list box choose No page numbering From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Numbering lines in a document numbering lines Numbering 83 From here For more information about Changing the appearance of line numbering Changing the positions of line numbers Numbering paragraphs in a document Changing the appearance of page numbers Inserting and resetting the total pages number format Customizing page numbering formats Forcing page numbers Using counters In the online Help Index type line numbers changing appearance line numbers changing position numbering paragraphs pages changing number appearance inserting total pages number format customizing page number formats forcing page numbers counters 84 WordPerfect 10 Editing documents WordPerfect 10 provides automatic editing features that help save you time when editing documents In this section you ll learn about e marking misspelled words and grammatical errors as you type e correcting misspelled words automatically Marking misspelled words and Grammatical ERRORS AS YOU TYPE Correcting spelling You can use Spell As You Go to check and correct spelling Spell As You Go underlines misspelled words in red so that yo
347. pe a number in the box beside it Speakers notes and type a number in the box beside it e Audience notes and type a number in the box beside it e Handouts and type a number in the box beside it Choose a compatible PDF application from the Compatibility list box Type the author s name in the Author box Type any keywords in the Keywords box Choose a PDF style from the PDF style list box o N O U Sending slide shows ro orher applications Using your email program you can email a slide show You can also send slide shows and speaker notes to the installed WordPerfect application choosing page layout and speaker note positions prior to sending the slide show To email a slide show 1 Click File Send to Mail 2 Enable one of the following options Current slide only Entire slide show 3 Click OK 4 Select a profile by using your email client or set email options according to your email system 5 Send the email Ne If you do not have an email program properly installed on your computer you cannot email slide shows 726 Corel Presentations 10 To send a slide show to WordPerfect 1 Click File Send to WordPerfect 2 Inthe Page layout area enable one of the following options e One slide per page e Multiple slides per page e Outline 3 In the Page options area enable one of the following check boxes Header information and type text in the box beside it Page numbering 4 Inthe Notes options
348. people and positions For example you can use organization charts to create family trees show a chain of command diagram a process or illustrate a workflow In this section you ll learn about e creating and saving organization charts e adding and editing text in organization charts e adding and replacing positions in organization charts e viewing organization charts e changing organization chart branch structures and orientation CREATING ANd SAVING ORGANIZATION CHARTS The following image shows 1 a box and 2 a branch in an organization chart Lorem Iprem sag tree iin ber Ferrit svat japon tet FR Hida Tir Breij il La ong Diria Pee Tam Sanat Pit TN i yet kk eli PERT Grim ty Maibrit Midt tact Hirik ori funy Geter Alla st Miagertol Yabba Before you begin creating an organization chart here are some suggestions for presenting information effectively e Try to avoid showing too much information on one chart break up large complex charts into separate ones Working with organization charts 315 e Try to start each box the same way for example with either a position title or a person s name There are many different pre defined organization chart layouts to choose from when you create an organization chart The layout determines the structure and orientation of an organization chart You can save an organization chart style so that you can use the same box options and attributes
349. pert guides you through the process of creating basic queries e The Visual Query Builder VQB lets you use a graphical interface to select tables fields and any other option you need to build a query in Structured Query Language SQL For more information on the VQB and Structured Query Language see Creating SQL queries in the online Help Using Query By Example When using the Query By Example method you can create a single table query Queries are used to retrieve only specific values from your table You can also use the Query Expert to create a query In the query window a check box under each field name is used to include it in the Answer table You determine how you want the field displayed by choosing one of five options Button Action Blank F Do not include this field Check Fe Display only unique values for this field Working with oueries 317 Button Action Check Plus Fe Display all values for this field Check Descending F Display only unique values for this field in descending order Check Group Fr Specifies a group for set operations To create a single table query 1 Click File New gt Query 2 Choose the drive and folder where the table is stored 3 Double click a table 4 Click the check boxes for each of the fields you want to include in the Answer table 5 Click Query Run query To RETRIEVE records CONTAINING specific values 1 Click File New gt Query 2 Choose the drive and fol
350. phic and click Border fill 2 Click the Fill tab 3 Click a color on any of the following palettes Foreground Background 4 Click the Advanced tab 5 Choose a type of fill from the Gradient list box You can also Rotate the gradient Type a value in the Rotation angle box Change the placement of shadows within the Type values in the Horizontal and Vertical offset gradient boxes To add gradient fills for a column 1 Click Format Columns 2 Click Border fill 3 Inthe Column border fill dialog box click the Fill tab 4 Click a color on any of the following palettes Foreground Background 5 Click the Advanced tab Choose a type of fill from the Gradient list box 118 WordPerfect 10 You can also Rotate the gradient Type a value in the Rotation angle box Change the placement of shadows within the Type values in the Horizontal and Vertical offset gradient boxes To add gradient fills for a paragraph or page 1 5 Click Format and click one of the following e Paragraph gt Border fill lets you change gradient fill options for a paragraph Page gt Border fill lets you change gradient fill options for a page Click the Fill tab Click a color on any of the following palettes Foreground Background Click the Advanced tab Choose a type of fill from the Gradient list box You can also Rotate the gradient Type a value in the Rotation angle box Change the placement
351. port digital camera 343 Q scanner 343 Quattro Pro importing from 391 linking and copying to 392 T queries 377 table definition 345 advanced 380 tables creating 377 379 creating 353 multi table 379 designing 351 saving 379 expert 353 single table 377 field names 353 query field size 353 expert 377 field type 353 operators 380 linking 352 query by example 377 lookup 356 quick forms 363 navigation 359 quick report 371 password protection 357 structure 353 text R adding to reports 372 record definition 345 expert 343 391 records filters 343 adding 368 deleting 368 editing 359 368 y locating 360 validity checks 355 navigation 359 visual query builder 377 referential integrity 352 358 relational databases introduction 344 W relationships 352 364 web pages 389 report expert 371 welcome screen 349 reports 371 WordPerfect adding a chart 374 merging data with 393 creating 371 publishing 391 merging data with 393 navigating 375 previewing 375 printing A 375 publishing to RTF 391 reverse compatibility 393 rows resizing 361 RTF file format 391 S secondary indexes 356 static HTML publishing 389 Index Paradox 10 397 Section 6 Corel CENTRAL 10 Table of contents Corel CENTRAL 10 Welcome to Corel CENTRAL 10 405 What s new in CorelCENTRAL 10 404 Getting started with Corel CENTRAL 407 Starting and quitting CorelCENTRAL 407 Exploring the CorelCENTR
352. preadsheet columns The intersection of the labels Salesperson A and Products shows the total number of products that Salesperson A sold Summarizing data using CrossTab reports 233 To build a CrossTab report 1 Click a spreadsheet cell containing data 2 Click Tools Data tools CrossTab Report 3 Drag any fields from the list in the Fields area into any of the following positions of the Layout area e Rows e Columns Data e Pages 4 Type the report destination in the Destination box Unless you select a destination the CrossTab report will be placed in A1 of the next available unprotected spreadsheet To connect multiple spreadsheets to produce a CrossTab report 1 Click a spreadsheet cell containing data 2 Click Tools Data tools CrossTab Report 3 Click the Range picker He in the Source data box 4 Press SHIFT and click the tabs of the spreadsheets where the data is stored You must click the spreadsheet tabs in ascending order 5 Click Maximize on the CrossTab report title bar MMe After you connect multiple spreadsheets of data the first field in the list in the Fields area of the CrossTab report dialog box is SHEET You can drag this field to the Pages Rows or Columns positions of the Layout area Creating CrossTab reports using OLAP data sources CrossTab reports are particularly suited to displaying and exploring data contained in OLAP servers You can create CrossTab reports fr
353. r From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Inserting delay codes delay codes inserting Editing delay codes delay codes editing Displaying Reveal Codes Reveal Codes displaying Working with headers and footers 21 FORMATTING TEXT In WordPerfect you can use a variety of formatting tools to control the design and arrangement of text In this section you ll learn about e modifying font settings e copying the format of text highlighting text e working with drop caps e indenting text e justifying text e keeping text together e correcting capitalization making text fit a specific number of pages e hyphenating text Modifying font settings You can apply formatting to text to change the font and its attributes such as style size and color Using Corel RealTime Preview lets you view text fonts and sizes before you apply them For example you can view text as it will display in various fonts before choosing which is the most suitable If you do not want to preview fonts and their sizes you can disable Corel RealTime Preview WordPerfect lets you format text using recent font settings including the font and its size You can also change the default font and font size for the active document or for all documents FORMATTING TEXT 79 The following image displays examples of different fonts and font styles Arial EdimonnD Eras Contour Exile meregenE Firenze
354. r callout and action In this section you ll learn about e drawing shapes e editing shapes Drawing shapes Line shapes can be everything from a simple line to a polyline You can draw lines and polylines and you can draw curves Other shapes that you can draw include basic shapes such as rectangles and diamonds arrow shapes flowchart shapes such as connectors and processes star shapes callout shapes and action shapes such as volume buttons and transition buttons As well you can draw these shapes from the center Certain shapes have more complex properties that you can modify to enhance a slide show For example action shapes can be linked to assigned actions that you initiate when displaying the slide show For more information about assigning actions to objects see Creating SpeedLink objects in the online Help To draw a line 1 Click Insert Shape gt Line shapes and click a line shape 2 Drag to draw the line shape Os lt You can also draw a precise horizontal vertical or diagonal line shape by holding S N down SHIFT while dragging to draw the line You can also draw freehand shapes in the same manner as line shapes To draw a polyline 1 Click Insert Shape gt Line shapes and click a polyline shape 2 Drag to draw the polyline 3 Double click to complete the shape PS You can transform an elliptical arc polyline shape into a circle by clicking the shape and moving an edit point to the inside
355. r blue and click a suggestion YF ca Words not included in any of the WordPerfect dictionaries are underlined in red only if Spell As You Go is enabled Spell As You Go is enabled by default To use Prompt As You Go 1 Click Tools Proofread Prompt As You Go 2 Click an underlined word or phrase in your document 3 Choose the replacement text from the Prompt As You Go list box on the property bar When you use Prompt As You Go words are underlined only if Spell As You Go and Grammar As You Go are enabled If Spell As You Go and Grammar As You Go are disabled replacement words still display in the Prompt As You Go list box on the property bar but they are not underlined The Prompt As You Go list box will be empty if there are no spelling errors grammar errors or thesaurus synonyms You can also use the spelling checker and the thesaurus to check for spelling errors and synonyms For information see Using the spelling checker and Using the thesaurus in the online Help 86 WordPerfect 10 Correcting misspelled words automatically You can enable QuickCorrect to automatically correct common typing mistakes QuickCorrect provides a list of commonly misspelled words and their correct spellings For example QuickCorrect can automatically replace adn with and You can add words to the QuickCorrect list including a pair of words For example you can replace byt he with by the Words can a
356. rd by the ENDRECORD code Merging documents 121 The following graphic shows a data text file containing 1 ENDFIELD codes and 2 ENDRECORD codes When you create a data table file fields and records are arranged in columns and rows Each column contains a field Each row contains a record The following graphic shows a data table file containing 1 records 2 fields and 3 field names You can retrieve data from other file formats and use them as data files in WordPerfect For example you can retrieve and convert a database file a spreadsheet file an ODBC data source or a text file For information about converting files see Opening and inserting files in the online Help You can also use an address book as a merge data source For information see Merging with address books in the online Help When you create a data file WordPerfect automatically inserts a Merge toolbar into the merge data file For more information about the Merge toolbar see Using the Merge toolbar in the online Help 122 WordPerfect 10 To create a data file for a MERGE 1 Click Tools Merge 2 Click Data source gt Create data file If you have typed in the active document enable one of the following options in the Data File Source dialog box Use file in the active window uses the active document e New document window creates a new document 3 Click OK 4 Type the name of a field in the Name a field box
357. readsheet Before those columns can be affected by a change in the default width of the active spreadsheet you must reset the column width of the active cell You can also return row heights to the active cell default size which is determined by the largest font used in the row To change row height 1 Select a cell in each row you want to resize or select the row borders Click Format gt Selection properties Click the Row column tab In the Row options area enable the Set height option and type a value in the box uk WN Enable one of the following options Points e Inches e Centimeters You can also change row height by moving the pointer to the bottom edge of a row border until it changes to a double arrow and dragging the double arrow to resize the row a oy You can select noncontiguous rows by pressing CTRL before selecting the rows To change column width Select a cell in each column you want to resize or select the column borders Click Format gt Selection properties Click the Row column tab In the Column options area enable the Set width option and type a value in the box ur WN Enable one of the following options e Characters e Inches e Centimeters PS You can also change column width by moving the pointer to the right edge of a SAY column border until it changes to a double arrow and dragging the double arrow to resize the column You can select noncontiguous columns by pressing CTRL
358. rints selected text Document summary prints a document summary 42 WordPerfect 10 Specify any other print options 5 Click Print DS You can also print a document by clicking the Print button on the toolbar x Closing documents and guitting WordPerfect You can close the active document or all documents and leave WordPerfect open When you quit WordPerfect the application closes along with all of the documents you have open You are prompted to save any modified documents before closing or quitting To close and ouvir WordPerfect To Do the following Close a document Click File Close Close all open documents Click Tools Macro Play Choose closeall wcm from the Look in list box Click Play Quit WordPerfect Click File gt Exit DS To close a document you can also click the Close button in the menu bar SN From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Exploring the work area work area exploring Using the property bar property bar Using the application bar application bar Entering text entering text Inserting text inserting text Selecting text selecting text Deselecting text deselecting text Inserting graphics inserting graphics Working with documents 43 FORMATTING PAGES When you change the format of a document you change the physical arrangement of information on a page and the general appearance of the finished document WordPerfect 10 le
359. rize data in a CrossTab report you can align data fields by row or column You can also display the totals and grand totals for both column and row data Showing column and row totals is useful because it gives you a better understanding of how each field relates to the total and can help you see an overall picture of the data You can also change the appearance of a CrossTab report by changing formatting options such as the numeric format and the alignment of labels To align data fields in a CrossTab report 1 Click a cell in a CrossTab report 2 Click Tools Data tools CrossTab Report 3 Enable one of the following options By row data appears vertically in the report By columns data appears horizontally in the report To show column summaries in A CrossTab report 1 Click a cell in a CrossTab report 2 Click Tools Data tools CrossTab Options 3 Enable the Show column summaries check box Summarizing data using CrossTab reports 277 To customize the appearance of a CrossTab REPORT 1 Click Tools Data tools CrossTab gt Options 2 Enable any of the following check boxes Format CrossTab report applies a preset format to the fields and data making the report easier to read Preserve data formatting maintains the numeric format of the source data such as currency Center labels across blocks of cells centers the field names labels across the column of data By default f
360. rk beside the Print show menu command indicates that highlighting is hidden za Highlighting is displayed by default Si Working with drop caps Drop caps are letters that you can use to decorate text at the beginning of a line or paragraph You can add and remove drop caps from a document and you can edit their size position and style 62 WordPerfect 10 The following image shows a paragraph without a drop cap on the left and a paragraph with a drop cap on the right Ut Wisi Ue Wisi Enim Winim Enim Minim To add or remove A drop cap To Do the following Add a drop cap to a blank line Click in a document Click Format gt Paragraph gt Drop cap Type a letter Add a drop cap to an existing paragraph Click at the beginning of a paragraph Click Format gt Paragraph gt Drop cap Remove a drop ca Click before a drop cap Click the Drop cap style p cap button Ag on the property bar In the Style area click No drop cap AE gt lt You can also remove a drop cap by clicking the Drop cap style picker Ms and oN clicking the No drop cap style To change the size of a drop cap 1 Click before a drop cap 2 Click the Drop cap size button Al on the property bar 3 In the Height area type a value in the Lines box lt You can also change the size of a drop cap by clicking the Drop cap size picker W on the property bar and clicking a drop cap size S FORMATTING TEXT 63 To change the p
361. rmation is transferred to the corresponding fields in your Web document You can create or edit notebooks in a format compatible with other programs by changing Quattro Pro s compatibility options Changes can be made to the default file save and file open types as well as to notebook sizes These changes become the program s default settings You can change international settings for currency and punctuation from within Quattro Pro You can also change number date and time formats in individual cells Finally Quattro Pro s language option allows you to have your interface display in the language you select from a list of languages You must have another language version installed to be able to change the interface language To change application settings e Click Tools gt Settings To change the properties of an item e You can change the properties of an item by clicking the following menu items Menu item Properties Format gt Selection properties Active cell properties Format gt Sheet properties Active sheet properties Format gt Notebook properties Active notebook properties DS You can also change properties by right clicking an item and selecting Selection SN properties To view statistics ON A notebook 1 Click File Properties 2 Click the Statistics tab Os You can also access the Statistics and Summary tabs by clicking Format Notebook S Y properties To record summary information About a notebook 1 Cl
362. rmatting a spreadsheet 191 You can also set protection for individual objects However if you disable the sheet protection for objects Quattro Pro ignores the status of unprotected objects To protect all spreadsheet cells 1 Click Format gt Sheet properties 2 Click the Protection tab 3 Enable the Enable cell locking check box To unlock a cell in a protected spreadsheet 1 Select a cell 2 Click Format Selection properties 3 Click the Constraints tab 4 Inthe Cell protection area enable the Unprotect option Qs You can also unlock a cell by right clicking the cell and clicking Selection properties You can select multiple noncontiguous cells by holding down CTRL and selecting the cells To protect all spreadsheet objects 1 Click Format gt Sheet properties 2 Click the Protection tab 3 Enable the Enable object locking check box Editing cell content You can insert data in a cell or overwrite existing data Cell entries can be changed in two ways You can replace the entire content of a cell or you can modify only part of the data inside a cell You can also clear the values in a range of cells without clearing the formulas Quattro Pro lets you quickly find a cell and automatically replace the data it contains You can look for data in cell formulas or cell values You can also set conditions for the search criteria For example in an expenses spreadsheet you can look only for expenses greater than 300
363. rmatting bulleted lists You can change the justification of a bulleted list level and the shape of a bullet To change the justification of a bulleted list level 1 Double click a bulleted list 278 Corel Presentations 10 Click Format Bulleted list properties Click the Bullets tab Choose a list level from the list uk WN Choose a position from the Justification list box To change the shape of a bullet 1 Click a bulleted list 2 Click Format gt Bulleted list properties 3 Click the Bullets tab 4 Choose a list level from the list 5 Choose a bullet shape from the Bullet shape list box Changing line spacing in bulleted lists You can change the amount of line spacing in a bulleted list Spacing can be adjusted between the text on the same level between each main bullet level and between subordinate bullet levels To change the line spacing in a bulleted list 1 Click a bulleted list 2 Click Format gt Bulleted list properties 3 Click the Spacing tab 4 Type a value in any of the following boxes Line spacing determines the amount of space between text on the same level Main spacing determines the amount of space between each main bullet level Subordinate determines the amount of space between subordinate bullet levels Animating bulleted lists You can use animation as a special effect to capture your audience s attention and reinforce the points in your presentations For examp
364. rough the process of creating tables forms reports charts mailing lists and queries Or if you prefer you can create these objects on your own Paradox also features ObjectPAL an object based event driven development language that you can use to create customized database applications Paradox contains tools which you can use to easily convert your tables and reports to HTML documents so that they can be displayed within a Web page on the Internet Paradox files can be made compatible with a variety of applications What s new in Paradox 10 Paradox 10 provides a dramatic increase in product stability as well as many new and enhanced features Printing enhancements Enhancements to the print engine provide printouts that accurately reproduce the screen display Print preview functionality has also been added for reports HTML publishing enhancements To provide a more accurate rendering of reports into HTML Paradox 10 utilizes the more advanced capabilities of enhanced HTML and cascading style sheets Scanner and Digital Camera support Paradox 10 adds additional support for scanners and digital cameras through the use of TWAIN Images can now be acquired from TWAIN devices directly into graphic fields or objects on a form and the new ObjectPAL class allows for the automation of this process Graphics and text filters Paradox 10 can import an increased number of file formats including Corel PHOTO PAINT cpt Windows
365. round color picker and click a background color LJ B EEE Bae na Zan m naa a To add color TO A RANGE Of data 1 Click Format gt Sheet properties 2 Click the Conditional color tab 3 In the Smallest normal value box type the smallest value to which you want to apply conditional color 4 Inthe Greatest normal value box type the largest value to which you want to apply conditional color 5 In the Options area enable one of the following options Below normal color sets the color of cells whose values are below the smallest normal value e Normal color sets the color of cells whose values fall within the range set in the Smallest normal value and Greatest normal value boxes Above normal color sets the color of cells whose values are above the greatest normal value ERR color sets the color to use for ERR and NA values generated by formula errors Click a color on the color palette 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to enable a different color for as many options as you want to color code 8 Enable the Enable check box gt Z You can also add color to a range of data by right clicking a spreadsheet tab and S V clicking Sheet properties Editing and formatting a spreadsheet 207 To color code a spreadsheet tab 1 Click Format gt Sheet properties 2 Click the Tab color tab 3 Disable the Use system color check box 4 Open the color picker and click a color on the color palette 1
366. rred to as a record and all records are stored in a table In a relational database data is separated into individual tables that are related or linked to one another For example if you store data about your personal library the book title author publisher and publication date are individual fields All the fields relating to one book form a record and all book records are stored in a table All the data pertaining to one book is still considered to be one record even though it may be divided across many tables By separating different types of data into separate tables you keep the repetition of data to a minimum For example if your library includes several books written by the same author it would be a waste of disk space to enter all the information about the author name birth date etc for each book record Instead you place the information relating to authors in one table and the information relating to books in another These two tables are linked under a field that is common to both of them so that information about the author can be referenced when viewing information about a book 344 Paradox 10 The following image illustrates a database structure Fields Tablas Record Database terminology The following terms will give you a better understanding of database concepts and the features of Paradox Term Definition Data The values words or numbers that are stored in your database Record A horizon
367. rs are renamed and still others are found in a new location The following table shows the items that have changed in WordPerfect 10 Feature What s different Application bar Comments Corel RealTime Preview Merge Navigation Publish to PDF Ruler You can now add the current language to the application bar You can also change the language by accessing the application bar The enhanced comment bubble is less intrusive fitting the length of the text only and leaving no empty space in the bubble You can also apply formatting to text as well as insert a graphic a table and so on within the comment bubble Has been extended to include QuickFonts underline drop caps and other formatting features The Merge feature now allows more fields for each record and an improved keyboard merge dialog The Go to feature now includes bookmarks hyperlinks redlined text equations graphics and other items The Browse by feature has been expanded and a flyout allows you to select a browse method more quickly Supports hyperlinks and watermarks Elements for example left margin adjust have been redesigned and enlarged 36 WordPerfect 10 Feature Tables Text selection What s different A Table menu has been added to the menu bar Cells containing formulas are marked with a colored indicator You can also copy cell formulas by dragging The QuickSplit columns and rows button
368. rs that follows a linear radial conical or square path You can apply an alternating fill to a table to create contrast between cells rows and columns The following image shows a table with an alternating fill applied Te Cause laser swal as rel crs sunur a a T a aj ej a CE A RO RT AR C EE ED ED CD E E E E O E E O E E E euu el aef is is aaf tel as eee a af ef saf asl A E ef ef af A CAE A line style can include several lines together such as a double line or triple line and the lines can vary in thickness and style A line style consists of lines that surround the selection outside lines and lines within the selection inside lines You can edit the two types of lines separately To change the fill of a table cell 1 Select a cell 2 Click Table gt Borders fill 3 Click the Cell tab If you want to change the fill of a group of table cells enable one of the following options in the Apply lines to area e Outside of current selection lets you change attributes for the group of cells as if it were one cell Each cell in selection lets you change attributes for each selected cell in the group of cells 108 WordPerfect 10 4 Click a fill style on the Fill palette 5 Click a fill color on the Foreground or Background palettes You can also Change the line style of a table cell Click a line style on the Left Right Top Bottom or Outside line palettes Change the line
369. rt Gallery and choose a chart type In the Datasheet click or double click cells to edit their contents Click Chart Layout type In the Layout type properties dialog box choose style and appearance options Click Chart Series In the Series properties dialog box choose line and fill colors OMAN DU FWN o Click outside the chart to return to the document window To import data from a spreadsheet or file click Data Import after Corel NY Presentations menus and tools display and specify the filename of the document you want to import S You can use this procedure to create a chart from a table Create a table with the data to include in a chart and click in the table To CREATE AN ORGANIZATION CharT Click where you want to insert the organization chart 2 Click Insert Graphics Draw picture Corel Presentations menus and tools display and a drawing frame displays in the document window 112 WordPerfect 10 Click Insert Organization chart Click in the drawing frame Click a chart type Click OK ON DU a y Double click a box in the chart and type a name and title to replace the placeholder name Click outside the chart to return to the document window ty lt You can also create an organization chart by playing the wp_org wcm macro Click Tools Macro gt Play and double click wp_org wcm For information about macros see Playing macros in the online Help From here
370. rt When you replace a manager with a subordinate the contents of the subordinate box replace all previous information in the manager box 316 Corel Presentations 10 To add a staff or subordinate position TO AN ORGANIZATION ChaRT 1 Double click an organization chart 2 Click a box 3 Click Insert and click one of the following e Staff Subordinate s 4 Type a value in the Number to insert box To add a coworker position TO AN ORGANIZATION CHART 1 Double click an organization chart 2 Click a box 3 Click Insert gt Coworkers 4 Type a value in the Number of coworkers to insert box 5 Enable one of the following options Left adds a coworker position to the left of the selected box Right adds a coworker position to the right of the selected box To add A MANAGER POSITION TO AN ORGANIZATION CharT 1 Double click an organization chart 2 Click a box 3 Click Insert Manager To replace a MANAGER position with a subordinate position 1 Double click an organization chart 2 Click a manager position box 3 Click Edit Replace manager Viewing ORGANIZATION Charts You can view a selected branch of an organization chart or the entire organization chart You can also display or hide subordinate positions in an organization chart Hiding subordinate positions is useful when an organization chart is large or complex To view AN ORGANIZATION ChaRT To Do the following A branch of an organization chart Double
371. rt images included with WordPerfect Clipart images are images that can be brought into a WordPerfect document and edited or used as is You can insert pictures from the WordPerfect Office 2002 CD When you insert a picture from a CD you have the choice of linking the picture to its source or embedding it into a document For more information about linking and embedding images see Linking and embedding images on disk and video in the online Help You can link to an image on disk When you link to an image on disk the location of the image not the image itself is inserted into the document This way you can considerably reduce the size of the file especially if the image is used in several places throughout the document Inserting Object Linking and Embedding OLE objects into a document lets Windows applications exchange information with each other You can link or embed a picture that was created in another program in a WordPerfect document If you link the picture the same information exists in two files the application where the picture was created the source application and the application where it was copied the client application When you change the information in the source application the information is updated in the client application as well When you embed a picture the picture becomes part of the document You can edit the picture directly For more information about Object Linking and Embedding see Linking and e
372. rulers 267 setting 275 subordinate positions 318 lines high low charts 305 changing the shape 293 highlighting drawing 291 ranges of datasheet cells 311 HTML 325 HTML documents M publishing drawings 325 inactos online 259 publishing slide shows 325 main bulleted levels publishing slides 325 changing spacing 279 manager positions adding to organization charts 317 replacing with subordinate positions 317 image tools manipulating Index Corel Presentations 10 333 datasheets 309 applying outlines 284 manually creating text 273 playing slide shows 289 flipping 284 Master Gallery outlining 285 using masters 270 printing 322 masters resizing 283 applying to slides 269 rotating 284 using Ai 270 rotating copies 284 Microsoft PowerPoint filter 259 selecting 283 MIDI sound files selecting all 283 inserting into slides 301 selecting automatically 283 mixed charts 305 sizing proportionately 284 modifying skewing 284 bitmapped images 296 stretching 284 bulleted list text attributes 278 working with in drawings 283 mosaic effect 299 working with in slide shows 283 movies opening adding movie files to slide shows 303 blank slide shows 262 saving within slide shows 303 new slide shows b ded bis an 2 262 working with in slide shows 302 new slide shows from predefined projects 262 moving organization charts bulleted list items up levels 278 adding coworker positions 317 datasheets 309 adding manager positi
373. ry aid or as a refresher course Each section includes information about what s new in each WordPerfect Office 2002 application What s in this user quide This user guide is divided into six sections The first section which you are currently reading introduces WordPerfect Office 2002 and includes information about system requirements installation learning WordPerfect Office 2002 and support options The other five sections document the major WordPerfect Office 2002 applications The documentation for each major application provides basic information about performing the most common tasks and describes the application s tools and functions At the end of each chapter in each section you ll find directions to appropriate topics in the online Help documentation where you can find answers to questions not answered in this user guide What you need to know This user guide assumes that you know how to perform basic operations in Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows 2000 or Windows NT 4 0 If you haven t used these operating systems before you may want to read your Microsoft Windows manual before installing and using WordPerfect Office 2002 Welcome to WordPerfect Office 2002 7 You can find more information about WordPerfect Office 2002 documentation and online Help in Chapter 3 of this section DOCUMENTATION CONVENTIONS Before you start using this user guide and the online Help it s important to understand the documentation con
374. s 2 Inthe Reveal Codes window delete all hard return codes and any other codes or text between the Tbl Off code of the first table and the Tbl Def code of the second table 3 Click in the first table 4 Click Table gt Join gt Table To splir a table cell 1 Click in a cell 2 Click Table gt Split Cell 3 Enable one of the following options and type a value e Columns splits a table cell into columns e Rows splits a table cell into rows DS You can also split table cells by clicking the QuickSplit row button the NY QuickSplit column button M or the QuickSplit columns and rows button E on the property bar and clicking in a table cell When the QuickSplit row button the QuickSplit column button or the QuickSplit columns and rows button appears pressed you can also hold down SHIFT to toggle to the QuickJoin tool S You can toggle back and forth between splitting cells and rows by clicking the QuickSplit row button or the QuickSplit column button Mf and holding down ALT To split a table 1 Click where you want to divide a table 2 Click Table gt Split Table 3 Click View gt Reveal Codes 4 In the Reveal Codes window place the cursor between the Tbl Off code of the first table and the Tbl Def code of the second table and press ENTER a few times to separate the two tables Deleting tables and table components You can delete a row column or an entire table If you want to m
375. s 281 creating 295 restoring text 274 modifying 296 applications painting complete area 298 sending slide shows 326 painting specific areas 297 Index Corel Presentations 10 329 saving selecting areas selecting transparent colors selectively replacing colors sizing frames working with zooming blank opening slide shows blur effect bold applying to text branch orientation bottom to top changing organization charts left to right right to left top to bottom branch structures changing in organization charts left top multiple right bottom single staggered branches changing orientation ER changing structure and orientation changing structures viewing selected brightness effect bubble charts bullet shape changing bulleted animations applying sound bulleted list items creating new levels moving up levels bulleted list slides animating bulleted lists bulleted lists animating eas animating on bulleted list slides changing font outline changing line spacing changing the appearance of text changing the justification changing the shape of bullets creating i 4 creating new levels within formatting 5 modifying text attributes working with 295 296 299 298 297 295 297 262 299 274 319 319 319 319 319 319 319 319 319 319 319 319 318 319 317 299 305 279 280 277 278 279 279 279 278 279 278 278 279 277 277 278 278 277 bull
376. s Setting movies to play automatically Deleting movie files sound files recording sound files turning off movie files changing movies setting to play automatically deleting movies Adding multimedia effects 303 Working with data charts You can use Corel Presentations to create and update various types of data charts In this section you ll learn about e creating data charts e sizing and moving data charts e adding legends to data charts e adding titles to data charts e labeling data charts Creating data charts You can create different types of data charts in Corel Presentations using a collection of predesigned chart templates and color schemes Creating a data series for a chart lets you visually represent a row of data from a datasheet and lets you add additional data to a chart by using a secondary y axis To create A data chart 1 Click Insert Data chart 2 Drag to define a chart area 3 Choose a chart type from the Chart type list If you want to begin with a blank datasheet disable the Use sample data check box 4 Click a chart style 5 Click OK 6 Type data in the datasheet 7 Click outside the chart to close the datasheet To CREATE A dATA series 1 Double click a chart Click Chart Series Click the arrows to select a series Click the Type axis tab uk WN In the Series type area enable one of the following options e Area Working with data charts 307 Bar and ch
377. s 2 1 1 ww eee 184 accessing k G yc ee eee 170 replacing protected cells Cells x ee ae a ye ae a ay aa AOD Unlocking y nera ct a Se oe 192 data ee 192 protecting searchingand 1 ee ee 193 Cells a ge o ae DGD 192 reports data a ee TST CrossTab o o 233 234 graphics 400 moore e ek tas ls a 191 192 resizing Objects 192 notebooks o o 170 182 219 spreadsheets e e mo me ee ee 19 windows ee 173 punctuation restoring international settings 170 173 previous entry 194 restricting Index Quattro Pro 10 247 Columns Eo a a 167 changing cells 217 datas 69 de a Pee ek as Se eee o 7 Creating ee ee 216 217 O data models 216 revealing scientific format 208 COMES Oe o e a e oe ee ZO scroll bars TOWS Du e IA ore 4 ras 201 hiding 176 screen components 176 searching reversing page breaks 209 action as de As e a 194 searching and replacing 193 actions ce ok ae ree Ok Oe 194 195 seed values rotating filling using 187 alignment eee 208 QuickFill 186 cells s a ee e ee Say hee ee Re es Se BOB selecting horizontally 2 2 2 2 2 2 208 OLAP data sources 234 Leto Wis Gee o No See ie oie WSs Sig a oe 208 Send To text vertically e ee ee e we 203 emailing Quattro Pro notebooks 221 vertically we ee 208 Quattro Pro files 221 rotations 206 208 sending row height email 221 a
378. s Formatting includes attributes such as line style line color or fill but does not include cell contents such as text or formulas To select a table 1 Click anywhere in a table 2 Click Edit Select gt Select table 102 WordPerfect 10 To select a table or table components by using QuickSelect To select Do the following A cell In the table move the pointer until it changes to an arrow pointing upward or to the left and click A row In the table move the pointer until it changes to A column The entire table an arrow pointing to the left and double click In the table move the pointer until it changes to an arrow pointing upward and double click In the table move the pointer until it changes to an arrow pointing upward or to the left and triple click PS You can also select a cell by clicking in a cell and pressing SHIFT F8 To select rows columns or tables by using Row column indicators To select Do the following A row A column The entire table Right click in a table and click Row column indicators Click the row indicator next to the row for example 1 2 and so on Right click in a table and click Row column indicators Click the column indicator above the column for example A B and so on Right click in a table and click Row column indicators Click the rectangle in the top left corner of the row and column indicators the cursor becomes a double headed c
379. s to email to envelopes using merge commands viewing records in data files with address books working with form documents modifying shapes moving graphics table components N new features align tool distribute tool printing keyboard lists tables to text text to tables variables zoom tool numbered lists applying to text creating QuickNumbers renumbering numbered outlines creating numbering lists outlines pages text O objects aligning distributing importing ODBC OLE objects opening documents documents created in other applications 128 128 128 126 127 129 127 127 126 127 127 123 121 121 123 93 94 102 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 80 79 80 80 80 79 80 80 81 80 96 96 49 121 125 91 40 41 41 140 Index WordPerfect 10 organization charts colors 97 creating 112 Web documents 131 playing macros 112 printing outlines documents 42 creating 79 merge output 126 renumbering 80 merged documents 127 Prompt As You Go disabling 86 P enabling 86 page borders publishing to HTML adding 116 converting to GIF 132 removing 118 converting to JPEG 132 page margins Web documents 131 changing 46 publishing to PDF using guidelines 46 installing Adobe Acrobat Reader 132 using ruler 46 publishing active documents 132 page numbers discontinuing 83 inserting 82 Q setting 82 QuickBullets suppressing 83 creat
380. s Sek 40 Adding the date and time to a document 41 Saving a document 42 Printing a document A et amp 42 Closing documents and quitting WordPerfect 43 FORMATTING PAGES 47 Setting page margins 45 Setting page size definitions and orientation 47 Editing and deleting page size definitions 47 Setting single sided or double sided pages for a document 48 Choosing a document layout for binding 48 Importing text and objects onto a page 49 Creating and deleting columns 50 Working with headers and footers 7 Inserting and viewing headers and footers 53 Formatting headers and footers 54 Inserting items into headers and footers 56 FORMATTING TEXT 79 Modifying font settings 59 Copying the format of text 61 Highlighting text 61 Working with drop caps 62 Indenting text 64 Justifying text 65 Keeping text together 66 Correcting capitalization 67 Table of contents WordPerfect 10 31 Making text fit a specific number of pages Changing the spacing between lines and paragraphs Hyphenating text Setting hyphenation prompts and notifications Changing hyphen options and position Working with footnotes and endnotes Creating footnotes and endnotes Editing footnotes and endnotes Converting footnotes to endnotes or endnotes to footnotes Formatting footnotes and endnotes Using lists and outlines d Creating and applying bulleted lists Numbering lists and outlines Numbering Numbering pages ere Setting page chapter and volume n
381. s in bitmapped images 298 slide show layouts 325 manager positions with subordinate positions 317 print engine 259 positions in organization charts 316 piintjobs resizing previewing 321 objects i 283 printing restoring audience notes 322 text appearance 214 Cunene pages y 322 totated bitmapped images 297 current slides A ES rotating f drawings ee 321 322 copies OF bj cts 288 handouts 322 object automatically 284 previewing 321 objects 284 previewing print jobs 321 Sie did dis a i i 31 a deleting from datasheets 312 inserting in datasheets 311 Index Corel Presentations 10 337 working with in datasheets 311 skewed bitmapped images 297 rulers skewing displaying 2 ee 267 objects 2 2 1 1 ee ee 284 hiding e Sle Re CO A O E slide layout layers settingup ee 267 footers 2 2 ee 27 Slide Outliner USING 04 ae ee ee we ae we 262 S slide shows saturation effect a 299 adding movie files 2 303 saving adding multimedia effects 301 bitmapped images oe hk Be kp 295 adding slides ee ee 263 drawings o 265 applying transitions 264 drawings for the first time 266 creating ee ee ee 261 movies within slide shows 303 creating backgrounds 270 271 organization chart styles 316 creating layouts 2 270 organization charts wwe 315 creating o
382. s remain selected only until you click elsewhere in the notebook If you want to type a reference to a 3 D block include the spreadsheet references first followed by the cell coordinates Getting started 165 To change 3 D spreadsheet RANGE SYNTAX 1 Click Tools gt Settings 2 Click Compatibility 3 In the 3 D syntax area click one of the following options A B A1 B2 expresses spreadsheet references first followed by a colon and the cell coordinates This syntax makes group references more concise A A1 B B2 refers to each corner of the 3 D selection with the spreadsheet reference included NT When you click a new cell all existing 3 D references in formulas in open notebooks switch to the new syntax To select cells From a dialog box 1 Click the Range picker HE 2 Select the cells you want to appear in the edit field of the dialog box 3 Maximize the dialog box Ds You can also select cells by double clicking the contents of the edit field SN To ouvickly select data on a spreadsheet 1 Select one cell within a block of cells 2 Right click a toolbar and click Data manipulation 3 On the Data manipulation toolbar click Select table FE All the cells are selected To ovickly move to a corner of a block of cells 1 Select one cell within a block of cells 2 Right click a toolbar and click Data manipulation 3 Click one of the following navigation tools gt fe Top left of table button
383. s to slides 264 data to datasheets 309 underlining to text i 274 entire CD tracks to slides e 302 unique colors in bitmapped images 298 formulas to rows and columns in datasheets 312 area charts 305 manager positions to organization charts 317 areas movie files to slide shows 303 selecting bitmapped images 296 multimedia effects to slide shows 301 arrow shapes parts of CD tracks to slides 302 drawing 292 positions to organization charts 316 artwork slides nae 263 creating original 297 sounds to slide shows y 301 attributes staff positions to organization charts 317 setting text 274 subordinate positions to organization charts 317 audience notes text to organization charts 316 printing 322 air brush tool 297 automatically air brushing filling cells with numbers 312 bitmapped images 297 playing slide shows 289 alignment guides rotating objects 284 creating 268 selecting newly created objects 283 displaying 268 hiding 268 setting up 267 B animated GIF support 257 backgrounds animating applying to slides z 270 bulleted lists D Ane See 279 creating for slide shows 270 271 bulleted lists on bulleted list slides LT 3278 bar charts 305 objects 285 286 basic shapes animations drawing 292 applying sounds to bullets 280 Bitmap Editor 295 appearance bitmapped images changing text 274 air brushing 297 changing text in bulleted lists 278 applying special effects 299 formatting titles and subtitle
384. s to uppercase e Initial capitals changes only the first letter of each word to uppercase aia You can add buttons to the toolbar for capitalization For information about toolbars see Customizing toolbars in the online Help PS You can also change the selected text to uppercase or lowercase by pressing CTRL gt K To automatically correct capitalization 1 Click Tools QuickCorrect 2 Click the Format As You Go tab 3 In the Sentence corrections area enable the Capitalize next letter after end of sentence punctuation check box You can also Automatically correct two initial capital letters ina Enable the Correct two irregular capitals make a sentence second letter lowercase check box Automatically correct Caps lock capitalization Enable the CapsFix check box Automatically correct capitalization after a period Click Exceptions In the Do not capitalize next letter after this word box type a word Click Add entry Click Close To add exceptions TO capitalization Exception list 1 Click Tools gt QuickCorrect 2 Click the Format As You Go tab 3 In the Sentence corrections area click Exceptions 4 In the Exceptions list dialog box type a word in the Do not capitalize next letter after this word box Click Add entry 6 Click Close You can also Automatically add exceptions to the exception list Enable the Add exceptions when you correct them in document check box Remove exceptions from
385. save a Notebook with a new Filename 1 Click File Save as 2 Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the file 3 Type a filename in the Filename box 4 Click Save 178 Quarrro Pro 10 To save a notebook with a password Click File Save as Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the file Type a filename in the Filename box Enable the Password protect check box Click Save Type a password N DOU aqu No Type the password again for verification 7 Z To save a file with a password after you have saved it previously click File Save as SN and select Password protect To specify a default Filename EXTENSION 1 Click Tools gt Settings 2 Click Compatibility 3 Enter one to three letters in the Default file type box tr It is useful to specify a different extension if you usually save or open files in a format other than qpw For example if you work mostly with Microsoft Excel files it would be helpful to specify xls as the default extension To specify a default folder 1 Click Tools gt Settings 2 Click File options 3 In the Default folder list box specify the default folder To back up your notebooks automatically 1 Click Tools gt Settings 2 Click File options 3 Enable the Timed backup every check box 4 Inthe Minutes box set a time interval from 1 to 59 minutes Ds You can change the location of your backup file folder by typing a new path into the W Backup
386. so set a transparent color for a bitmapped image To air brush a bitmapped image 1 Double click a bitmapped image 2 Click Insert gt Air brush 3 Click Format gt Brush 4 Inthe Brush attributes dialog box choose a brush shape from the Brush shape list box 5 Type a values in the following boxes Brush width e Air brush density Click OK Open the Foreground fill picker k on the tool palette and click a color on aD Open the Background fill picker on the tool palette and click a color To paint a specific area of a bitmapped image 1 Double click a bitmapped image 2 Click Insert gt Paint brush Working with bitmapped images 297 Click Format Brush In the Brush attributes dialog box choose a brush shape from the Brush shape list box Type a value in the Brush width box Click OK Open the Fill Pattern picker W on the tool palette and click a pattern ON DU a y Open the following pickers on the tool palette and click a color Foreground fill A Background fill a 9 Click the bitmapped image To paint the complete area of a birmapped image Double click a bitmapped image Click Insert gt Flood fill Open the Fill pattern picker Ml on the tool palette and click a pattern 1 2 3 4 Open the Foreground fill picker 4 on the tool palette and click a color 5 Open the Background fill picker on the tool palette and click a color 6 Click the bitmapped image aia The Floo
387. so use delay codes to keep headers or footers from displaying on a title page a copyright page or any other single page in a document For more information about delay codes see Inserting and editing delay codes in the online Help To discontinue a header or Footer 1 Click Insert Header footer 2 Enable one of the following options e Header A Header B e Footer A e Footer B 3 Click Discontinue DS You can also remove a header or footer from the document by dragging the so associated code from the Reveal Codes window For information about Reveal Codes see Displaying Reveal Codes in the online Help Working with headers and footers 77 INSERTING items into headers and footers You can insert a horizontal line into a header or footer to for example create a separation between the information in the header or footer and the document text You can also insert the filename or the path and filename of the active document into headers and footers If the document has never been saved a code will be inserted but the filename or path and filename will not be displayed until you save the document For information about saving files see Saving files in the online Help In addition you can insert the date and time or numbering such as page chapter volume secondary or total pages into a header or footer To insert a horizontal graphics line into a header or Footer 1 Click Insert Header footer 2
388. t Type a name in the Scenario name box Type a value for each changing cell in the Changing cells and their values boxes Click Add scenario Click Next Click Show scenario ON AU FW N To CREATE A SCENARIO GROUP Click Tools Scenario gt Edit Click Settings In the Scenario group settings dialog box click New PWN In the New group dialog box type a name in the New group name box To display a scenario Click Tools gt Scenario Edit _ 2 Choose a scenario group from the Scenario groups list box 3 Choose a scenario from the Scenarios list From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Managing scenarios scenarios managing Creating one variable What If tables What If tables one variable Creating two variable What If tables What If tables two variable Using goal seeking goal seeking Finding optimum solutions for linear and Optimizer non linear problems Analyzing data 217 Managing files and data File management is an important part of any project You can open many different file formats in Quattro Pro and you can import insert or combine data You can also link data between notebooks or between Quattro Pro and another application In this section you ll learn about opening and saving files e sending files e inserting importing and combining files e importing text into columns e linking and embedding objects e creating notebook links Ope
389. t Expert Click Tools Experts Click Report Click Run expert Follow the steps of the Expert Creating mailing labels Paradox helps you create mailing labels from name and address fields in your tables The Label Expert creates a special report that divides address related table records into individual groups The Expert lays out the report to match various types of standard label stock so that you can print your mailing labels directly To 1 2 3 4 start The Label Expert Click Tools Experts Click Mailing label Click Run expert Follow the steps of the Expert Adding text and graphics TO REPORTS You can enhance the appearance of your report by adding text and graphics Add text objects to label different areas of the report Add pre existing graphic objects for example your company logo to give your report a finished professional appearance 372 Paradox 10 To add a text object 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Click File Open Report Choose the drive and folder where the report is stored Double click a report Click View gt Design report Click the Text tool Click the position on the report where you want to place the text Follow the steps of the Expert pn If the Text Expert is not launched automatically click Tools Settings gt Preferences Click the Expert tab and enable the Run experts when creating objects on a document check box To add a Graphic object 1 2 3 4 5 6
390. t Explorer The Object Explorer has two panes the Object Tree on the left visually displays the objects on your form and their relationship to each other the four tabbed pages on the right list attributes for appearance and properties types of methods and events Knowing where to place the code is crucial to the successful execution of the method Where objects are placed on the form determines how the code is processed ObjectPAL uses containership hierarchy which means that code is processed in a specific order depending on how deeply the object is contained For example the highest level of containership on a form is at the form level then the page level then at the object level any boxes fields or buttons that are placed on the form These levels are displayed in the Object Tree 386 Paradox 10 Using The Debugger The debug environment includes the Debugger window the Watches window the Breakpoints window the Tracer window and the Call Stack For example you can choose to have the Debugger open automatically when you are in design mode or when you are running a form Using the Debugger you can set breakpoints so that you can execute instructions up to a certain point then stop and see what has happened you can inspect or watch variables to make sure values are being manipulated as you intended you can execute a method one line at a time called single stepping or step over methods and procedures that you know are bug fre
391. t box uk WN Click a card To link a field to a memo 1 Click a field 2 Click Tools gt Link to Memos 3 In the Link to memos dialog box double click a memo To link a field to a file 1 Click a field 2 Click Tools gt Link to File application 3 Type text in the Link text box 4 In the Filename box click the Browse button B and choose the drive and folder where the file is stored To link a field to a Web site 1 Click a field 2 Click Tools Link to Web site 3 Type a Web site address in the Location URL box To link a field to an email address 1 Click a field 2 Click Tools gt Link to Email address 3 Type an email address in the Enter an email address box From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Working with cards creating cards Working with card groups card groups using Working with card file field columns fields creating in card files Filtering card files filtering card files Exporting card file information in ASCII text format card files exporting in ASCII Publishing card files in HTML HTML publishing card files Using CoreLCENTRAL Card File 419 Usin Corel CENTRAL Memos Corel CENTRAL Memos lets you write and store notes about appointments special events or anything else that you want to record and organize For example you can write yourself a memo to remind you of what you need to accomplish on a given day In this secti
392. t orientation 3 right to left orientation and 4 bottom to top orientation 318 Corel Presentations 10 To change a branch STRUCTURE iN AN ORGANIZATION Chart 1 uk U N PWN Double click an organization chart Click a manager or subordinate box Click Format gt Branch structure Click the Structure tab Click one of the following Single Staggered Left top Right bottom e Multiple and type a value in the Columns box Click Close change a branch ORIENTATION iN AN ORGANIZATION CharT Click a manager or subordinate box Click Format Orientation Click the Orientation tab Click one of the following Top to bottom Left to right Right to left Bottom to top Click Close From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Working with organization chart box fields organization charts working with box fields Working with organization charts 319 From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Selecting organization chart branches organization charts selecting chart branches Selecting organization chart levels organization charts selecting chart levels Formatting organization chart boxes organization charts formatting boxes Changing box connector line properties box connector lines changing properties Copying organization charts organization charts copying 720 Corel Presentations 10 PRINTING IN Corel PRESE
393. taining the notebook This is necessary only when the notebook is not in the same folder as the primary notebook e Filename is the name of the notebook Extension is a three letter suffix separated from the filename by a period It is necessary only when the notebook has a different extension from the primary notebook Sheet is any valid sheet name sheet range or group name such as C Sales D F or YearToDate Cell reference is any valid cell address pair of coordinates or cell name However cell coordinates are valid only when the link contains a spreadsheet function to operate on the cells Managing files and dara 227 A Because link statements are not case sensitive you can type all parts of the link in either uppercase or lowercase Do not include blank spaces in any part of the reference To link notebooks by selecting cells Click File Open Choose the drive and folder where the notebook is stored Double click the filename Select a cell Type a plus sign in the cell On the application bar click the name of the supporting file N OU aun Click the cell that contains the link you want to place in the primary notebook If the formula is incomplete finish typing it 8 Press ENTER RS You can also activate the target notebook by clicking Window and choosing the window from the numbered list at the bottom of the menu To link norebooks by using wildcards 1 Click File Op
394. tal row in a table that contains a group of related fields of data Field A column of information in a table A collection of related fields makes up one record Table An arrangement of cells in rows and columns used to store data From here For more information about What s new in Paradox 10 Databases Getting started In the online Help Index type Paradox what s new relational database understanding Paradox getting started Welcome To Paradox 10 347 This chapter guides you through the main windows used in Paradox and identifies the various features you can use to create and maintain your database The deskrop The following image illustrates the components of the Paradox desktop J J e A l a A Imire Bh 1 menu bar appears directly below the title bar and displays Paradox menus Clicking a menu name displays a list of commands 2 toolbars appears below the menu bar and displays the main set of Paradox tools 3 Project Viewer opens automatically when you start Paradox The Project viewer displays the contents tables forms reports etc of the current working directory 4 status bar appears at the bottom of the desktop and provides information about the actions you perform Exploring Paradox 347 Using the Project Viewer Paradox treats each database as a project and organizes the files that make up a project into folders The Project Viewer is a file ma
395. tar AZT online analytical processing OLAP 234 opening database files 220 file formats 219 Internet files e220 notebooks 181 182 project templates 181 182 start options 181 182 orientation aligning data 206 rotating 208 overtype mode 192 overwriting cell content 192 data 192 p page breaks converting to hard 210 converting to soft 210 deleting 209 deleting hard 210 dragging 209 finding 209 inserting 209 inserting hard 209 searching 209 viewing 209 Page Breaks View selecting 173 page numbers 210 Page View selecting 173 panes resizing 173 splitting notebook 173 synchronizing scrolling 173 parsing 244 Index Quattro Pro 10 COMS o aaaea a 223 customizing e hec n 224 Q delimited text aaa 224 Quattro Pro fixed widthtext aaa 224 new features gy ce Oe a ee ee te TAD loading settings 224 QuickCel s 2 o o 0 0 161 TOWS e Wa a AA USINE e mo a ar e Ae ot cp TBR saving settings 224 QuickColumns text files Cora Ge sr a Bone 2 222 importing text 2 2 a 223 Paste special 193 197 198 importing text files 223 225 pasting QuickFil 2 2 2 186 187 ella ls Si pee A pO Sw aa 197198 QuickFinder ww eee 170 in group mode 196 QuickFormat 2 2 ee ee 2001 notebook links 228 229 QuickFunction Quattro Pro o
396. te Click Tools gt Align and distribute Click the Distribute tab Enable any of the check boxes that correspond to the horizontal and vertical distribution you want PWN 5 In the Distribute to area enable an option that corresponds to the distribution area you want Working with color You can create colors to use when working with fonts highlighting and graphics in WordPerfect You can also use color models to create colors Three color models are available RGB HLS and CMYK WordPerfect lets you view color changes to a selection before the changes actually take place You can apply the colors you created to graphics To create a color 1 Click Format gt Font 2 Click the Font tab 3 Open the Color picker A and click More 4 Drag the pointer on the color wheel until the color you want displays in the Current color box 5 Drag the pointer on the luminosity bar until the shade you want displays in the Current color box 96 WordPerfect 10 To create a color by using color models 1 Click Format gt Font 2 Click the Font tab 3 Open the Color picker A and click More 4 Choose a color model from the Color model list box 5 Inthe Color values area type values in the boxes until the color you want displays in the Current color box MMe The color model you select determines the options available in the Color values boxes Os You can open the Select color dialog box from any color palette in Wor
397. ted text file encloses character data using quotation marks separates its fields with commas and ends each record using a carriage return By defining the data in this fashion Paradox is able to read and separate the imported information into individual fields in the table A fixed length text file generally uses tab stops to separate its data so that each field has a specified starting position and length To import data Click File Import Click Import From the From Type list box choose the file extension of the file you want to import Click the Browse button E beside the From list box Double click the file that contains the data you want to import OUA UN e If you are importing data into an existing table click the To table tab and enable one of the following options e Overwrite existing table imports data over existing table data Append to existing table imports data without affecting existing records 7 Click Import To import data using the Text Expert 1 Click File Import 2 Click Text expert 3 Follow the steps of the Expert To export data 1 Click File Export 2 From the From type list box choose the file extension of the file from which you want to export data 3 Click the Browse button al beside the From list box Double click the table from which you want to export data 5 If you are exporting data into an existing table click the To table tab and enable one of the following options
398. tes to footnotes formatting footnotes and endnotes Creating Footnotes and ENdNOTES A footnote provides more information about a topic and is found below text or at the bottom of a page An endnote refers to a reference at the end of a document You can create footnotes and endnotes by inserting a reference number in the text of a document That number is linked to the corresponding text in the endnote or footnote To CREATE A FOOTNOTE OR ENCNOTE 1 2 3 Click in a document Click Insert Footnote endnote Enable one of the following options and type a value in the box beside it Footnote number Endnote number Click Create Type footnote or endnote text Click File Close Ne While working with a footnote or an endnote you cannot access all available WordPerfect functions until you return to the body of the text lt You can also close the footnote or endnote and return to the document by clicking S N the Close button If you delete a footnote or endnote number you can restore it by clicking the Note number button iF on the property bar Working with footnotes and endnotes 73 Editing footnotes and endnotes You can edit the text of footnotes or endnotes To edit a Footnote OR ENdNOTE 1 Click Insert Footnote endnote 2 Enable one of the following options and type a value in the box beside it Footnote number Endnote number 3 Click Edit Edit the footnote or endnote text 5 Click
399. textiles 2 ara 3 04 ete ROA skipping scenario groups first characters 224 Creating Sil o Rs el hay Be gt DIT lines 224 ESMAS Se ag A a e TG PS 223 225 246 Index Quarrro Pro 10 soft page breaks 209 startup switches 181 182 solving statistics 170 equations 213 strikeout 204 source data strikeout text 203 creating 233 styles CrossTab reports 233 changing 204 spacing subscript 203 204 footers 210 subtitles headers 210 adding to charts 232 special characters summary 170 accessing A 182 sums copyright symbol 182 Calc As You Go 188 iconic symbols 182 QuickSum 188 icons 182 superscript 203 204 inserting 182 184 switching languages 182 columns and rows 197 198 phonetic characters 182 rows and columns 197 repeat characters 182 symbols WordPerfect characters 182 copyright symbols 182 SpeedFormat 201 202 icons 182 SpeedSelect inserting 184 selecting data 165 trademarks 182 spreadsheet functions WordPerfect characters 182 date 186 spreadsheet groups copying to 196 T creating 195 tables 233 deleting 195 196 tabs editing 195 color coding 206 naming 196 dragging 169 spreadsheet tabs filling 187 color coding 204 setting number of 182 coloring 206 templates filling 186 187 project 155 hiding 176 text spreadsheets angled 203 adding i 169 appearance 204 automatically scrolling 163 bold 203 copying 169 170 italics 203 creating 181 orientation 20
400. the 3Com PalmPilot Desktop software on Windows Terminal Server Then you can map a COM port to the server from within the Citrix application server shell on the client system To enable Corel CENTRAL PalmPilot conduits 1 Click Tools gt Pilot conduits 2 Inthe Enable disable Pilot conduits dialog box enable any of the following options Address Book to HotSync PalmPilot Address Book and CorelCENTRAL Address Book Date Book to HotSync PalmPilot Date Book and CorelCENTRAL Calendar and CorelCENTRAL Day Planner events e To Do to HotSync PalmPilot To Do List and CorelCENTRAL Calendar and CorelCENTRAL Day Planner tasks e Memos to HotSync PalmPilot Memo and CorelCENTRAL Memos 3 Exit and restart HotSync Manager gt lt You can disable CorelCENTRAL PalmPilot conduits Click Tools gt Pilot conduits and SN disable any of the check boxes 426 CorelLCENTRAL 10 Li PalmPilot only supports complete or incomplete tasks A task that is less than E complete in CorelCENTRAL will be considered incomplete in PalmPilot PalmPilot To Do List items become CorelCENTRAL tasks when you HotSync and CorelCENTRAL subtasks and tasks become To Do List items that are not subordinate to other tasks To HotSync PalmPilot and Corel CENTRAL 1 Place the PalmPilot in its cradle 2 Click Start on the Windows taskbar 3 Click PalmPilot desktop HotSync Manager 4 Click the HotSync button on the PalmPilot gt a If you want to HotSy
401. the Name tab 3 Type a descriptive name Ni The Objects sheet the last sheet in the notebook cannot be renamed When you rename a spreadsheet formulas that refer to the renamed spreadsheet adjust to use the new name PS To reassign the original name to a spreadsheet click Reset DN You can also name a spreadsheet by double clicking on its tab To rename a spreadsheet using Microsoft Excel conventions 1 Click Tools gt Settings 2 Click Compatibility 3 Enable the Display as numbers check box NM To change spreadsheet tabs back to letters disable the Display as numbers check l box Specifying Quattro Pro SETTINGS Application settings affect the overall functioning of Quattro Pro Changes you make to these settings remain in effect until you change them again even after you exit and restart Quattro 170 Quarrro Pro 10 Pro Property settings allow you to see at a glance all changes that can be made to individual items in the notebook You can view statistical information about a Quattro Pro notebook This includes the filename directory path date it was created date it was last saved and by whom and the revision number The notebook summary feature lets you record information such as a file s title subject author and keywords You can also record comments pertaining to the file Summary information is useful when searching for a file using QuickFinder If you publish a notebook to the Internet the summary info
402. the chart options When you create a custom chart it is placed on its own page To create a chart automatically 1 Select the cells you want to plot If the surrounding cells contain explanatory labels you can include them in the selection for use as the chart axis labels or the chart legend 2 Click the QuickChart button on the toolbar 3 On the spreadsheet click where you want to insert the chart DS If you want to customize the size of the chart click and drag diagonally on the spreadsheet To create a chart by using the Chart Expert 1 Click Insert Chart 2 Follow the steps of the Expert Adding titles to charts You can customize a chart by adding titles You can add titles to the chart or to a specific axis You can add a title for any numeric chart type Presenting spreadsheet data in a chart 231 You can also For more information about In the online Help Index type SUMMARIZING GATA USING CrossIAb REPORTS CrossTab reports let you summarize large amounts of data from both spreadsheets created in Quattro Pro and external databases In this section you ll learn about e creating CrossTab reports e creating CrossTab reports using OLAP data sources e naming CrossTab reports e formatting CrossTab reports e updating and refreshing CrossTab report data Creating CrossTab reports You can use CrossTab reports to analyze and organize data located in notebooks and databases For example
403. the data is placed To change the column format for imported TEXT 1 Click Tools Data tools QuickColumns 2 Click Format 3 In the preview pane select a column to adjust 4 Choose options for alignment and style in the format boxes immediately above the pane PS You can right click in the preview pane to select column delimiters To change the row formar for imported TEXT 1 Click Tools Data tools QuickColumns 2 Click Format 3 Enable one of the following options e Parse parses the row e Skip skips the row e Label copies the row as an unparsed label to the destination cells 4 Enable any of the following options Break data flow inserts a row column or spreadsheet into the parsed text file Merge data control no removes the delimiter and therefore the column break e Transpose data control f switches columns with rows pial e Delimiter to text ii removes columns and moves the selected text into the first cell selected However the delimiter remains to separate text Os You can right click in the preview pane to select column delimiters SN Linking and embedding objects Quattro Pro lets you use Object Linking and Embedding OLE to import and export projects and objects Object linking and embedding works through two client server protocols OLE and Dynamic Data Exchange DDE DDE allows two applications running simultaneously to interact Managing files and data 225
404. the tool palette Foreground fill Background fill ay 3 Click More 4 In the Select color dialog box choose a color model from the Color model list box 5 Click a color on the color wheel 6 Click a color on the color swatch DS You can also choose a color by typing values in the Red Green and Blue boxes in the Color values area To outline an object 1 Click an object 2 Click Format Object properties gt Outline 3 In the Outline style area open the Color picker and click a color 4 Open the Style picker and click a line style 5 Open the Width picker and click a line width If you want to specify the line width type a value in the box beside the Width picker 6 Open the Joints picker and click a line angle Applying effects to objects Applying effects to objects creates a different look in a slide show or drawing There are many effects to choose from including watermarking inverting colors and outlining every part of the object To apply an effect to an object 1 Click an object 2 Click Tools Image tools gt and click one of the following e Watermark lightens the colors of a selected object so that it looks like a watermark e Grayscale changes the color attributes of a selected object to shades of gray Invert colors inverts the colors of the selected object Silhouette changes the color of the selected object to black Outline displays the selected object as a line drawing
405. the user to view the lookup table when editing a table and informs the user when the value is invalid This option is useful when you want to keep values in your lookup table secure An authorized user will know the correct value e Fill and view allows the user to display and select values from the lookup table while editing a table 9 Click Save Li When you create a lookup table its fields must have identical attributes field name type and size to the fields in the table to which values will be copied Creating Passwords Passwords let you control who has access to your data You can assign a master password for your table and you can assign auxiliary passwords to give access at the table and field levels You must create a master password before you can assign an auxiliary password To Assign A MASTER password 1 Click Format gt Restructure table Click the Passwords tab Click Define Type a password in the Password box uk WN Type the same password again in the Verify password box To assign An Auxiliary password Click Format gt Restructure table Click the Passwords tab Click Add Type a name in the Auxiliary passwords area In the Table rights area enable the check box for the appropriate table level access rights nau FWN Click one or more of the following check boxes Working with tables and records 377 e All gives full rights to all table functions including the ability to change and delete
406. ther more up to date table or report With dynamic publishing Paradox loads a table or report template onto your Web page and stores information about the table or report in the Web Server Repository In a document dynamically generated by the Corel Web Server each time the user accesses your Web page the Corel Web Server Control sends a request to the Web Server Repository The request launches a series of procedures that retrieves the data in your current table or report and displays it on the Web page The dynamic publishing features work with any Web browser In addition to publishing your data you can also import HTML documents The HTML Import Expert lets you import tables or lists from Web pages into Paradox tables Publishing a table to the INTERNET You can use the HTML Table Expert to publish your tables as either static or dynamic HTML documents The Expert lets you choose which fields you want to include text color and background color To publish a table ro HTML 1 Click File Open gt Table Choose the drive and folder where the table is stored Double click a table Click File Publish to HTML Follow the steps of the Expert uk WN Publishing a Report TO ThE INTERNET You can use the HTML Report Expert to publish your reports to the Internet as either static or dynamic HTML documents The Expert lets you choose a title the background color the text color and how you want your data to appear Paradox a
407. tion you ll learn about e creating graphics e inserting graphics e working in the draw picture window e modifying shapes e manipulating graphics e arranging graphics e aligning and distributing objects e working with color e changing the appearance of images moving images Creating graphics You can create shapes in a WordPerfect document A shape is any object created using WordPerfect drawing tools The following image is an example of a picture created using WordPerfect basic shapes LI ALI D DA 1 You can create basic shapes such as triangles circles or rectangles as well as lines arrows stars and more You can also create polylines Using Graphics 89 The following image shows examples of preset shapes 1 basic shapes and 2 flowchart shapes WordPerfect lets you save a graphic as a separate file which you can insert into other documents For information about exporting files see Import and export file formats for WordPerfect 10 in the online Help You can delete graphics from a document WordPerfect also allows you to hide or display graphics To create a shape 1 Click Insert Shapes 2 Enable one of the following options Lines lets you create shapes such as straight or curved lines e Basic lets you create shapes such as circles rectangles or cubes Arrows lets you create various types of arrows Flowchart lets you create shapes used in a flowchart
408. tions for records To mark records for A MERGE Click Tools Merge Click Form document and choose the location of the form file Click Data source and choose the location of the data file Click Records Enable the Mark records option in the Selection method area Type the range of records to display in the Display records from boxes Choose the first field to display in the First field to display box Click Update record list Click OK OANA UU Bb WN You can also Mark individual records Enable the records in the Record list box Select all records Click Mark all records in list Clear all marked records Click Unmark all records in list 128 WordPerfect 10 To specify conditions for A MERGE Click Tools gt Merge 2 Click Perform merge 3 Click Form document and choose the location of the form file 4 Click Data source and choose the location of the data file 5 Click Records 6 Enable the Specify conditions option in the Selection method area 7 Select a field from the Field list box 8 Type the selection criteria in the Condition text boxes If you want to see examples of selection criteria click Example 9 Click OK You can also Choose a range of records Reset conditions Enable the Record number range check box In the From box type the first record in the range In the To box type the last record number in the range Click Clear all From here For more information about Con
409. tiplies the incoming values by the existing values Divide divides the existing values by the incoming values Importing TEXT into columns You can import a text file and rearrange the text into columns at the same time As well you can customize how delimited and fixed width text files are parsed You can adjust the widths of imported columns and change their formatting options You can also change the format of imported rows even skipping rows of your choice To 1 2 3 4 iMpORT TEXT INTO columns Click Tools Data tools QuickColumns Click the Range picker he in the Text source box and select the source cells Click the Range picker in the Destination box and select a location for the imported data From the Parse settings list box choose one of the following e Automatic automatically determines how best to parse the imported text file Delimited auto automatically parses imported delimited text files Fixed width auto automatically parses imported fixed width text files If you want to view how data displays in the spreadsheet click Format Managing files and data 223 e eS y lt You can import all the text in a file by clicking Browse 2 on the Text source box and selecting an entire file The Destination box lists the active cell in the spreadsheet Instead of specifying all the destination cells you can specify one cell in which to begin inserting the parsed cells To customi
410. tles and subtitles 281 To change the Font outline of a title or subtitle 1 Click a title or subtitle 2 Click Format and click one of the following e Title properties Subtitle properties Click the Fonts tab In the Appearance area click Font properties In the Font properties dialog box click the Outline tab Open the Color picker and click a color Open the Style picker and click a line style Open the Width picker and click a line width ON DA U a WwW Changing the line spacing in titles and subtitles You can specify the amount of space between the lines of text in a title or subtitle To change the line spacing in a title or subtitle 1 Click a title or subtitle 2 Click Format and click one of the following e Title properties Subtitle properties 3 Click the Spacing tab 4 Type a value in the Line spacing box From here For more information about In the online Help Index type Adding boxes to titles and subtitles boxes adding to titles and subtitles Adding fills to titles and subtitles fills adding to titles and subtitles Saving title and subtitle text styles text styles saving title and subtitle Applying title and subtitle text styles text styles applying title and subtitle 282 Corel Presentations 10 Working with objects All of the elements that you add to slides including text clipart shapes charts and bitmapped images are treated as objects in Corel Presentations 10 In th
411. to other applications 325 326 gridlines 2 ee ee 267 sending to WordPerfect 326 grids 2 ee 267 sorting slides we 264 guidelines 267 switching between views 261 mler hd o ras o cad a cas 267 turning off slide transitions 265 shapes usingviews 261 changing lines and polylines a koe 293 working with movies 301 302 dra 291 292 working with objects 2 20a 283 editing 2 291 292 working with sounds 301 sizing shapes using glyphs fee 293 working with text 6 ee 273 sharpen effect 299 working with the Slide Outliner 262 sizing working with the Slide Sorter 263 datasheets T g 309 Slide Sorter frames around bitmapped images 297 using ee 263 objects proportionately 284 slides shapes using glyphs n 293 adding gt ee ee 263 336 Index Corel Presentations 10 adding entire CD tracks 302 displaying 318 adding parts of CD tracks 302 hiding 318 applying backgrounds 270 replacing manager positions 317 applying layouts 270 subordinates applying masters 269 collapsing 318 applying time delays 289 expanding 318 applying transitions 264 subtitles deleting i T 263 changing font outlines 282 inserting MIDI sound files 301 changing line spacing 282 inserting Wave sound files 301 formatting appearance 281 publ
412. tons Click Toolbar and change the Button and Border settings Delete toolbar buttons Click Commands and drag the toolbar buttons off the toolbar Add a separator between toolbar buttons Click Commands select User menus from the list box and drag the separator to a toolbar Ds If you want to customize a context menu select Context menu from the toolbar list SN To display a toolbar 1 Right click on any toolbar 2 Click the toolbar you want to display To move a toolbar 1 Point to the two vertical gray lines at the beginning of a toolbar 2 Drag the toolbar to a new position Getting started 179 QS To have a toolbar title display on a floating toolbar enable the Show title when toolbar is floating check box in the toolbar customization dialog box To rename a Toolbar Click Tools Customize Open the Customization menu Click Toolbar Select a toolbar Press F2 Type a new name nu FWN A You cannot rename system defined toolbars To delete a toolbar 1 Click Tools Customize Open the Customization menu Click Toolbar Select a toolbar Click Delete uk WN op You cannot delete system defined toolbars To reset a Toolbar 1 Click Tools Customize 2 Open the Customization menu 3 Click Toolbar 4 Select a toolbar 5 Click Reset Xx You can only reset a system defined toolbar To display a qraphic or text on a toolbar button 1 Right click a button on a toolbar and click Custom
413. ts Assigning groups individuals and resources to tasks and events Responding to event invitations Categorizing and sorting task lists Removing tasks and events from calendar databases Displaying agendas Setting calendar display preferences and passwords Importing and exporting calendar data Publishing calendars in HTML calendars tasks tasks assigning groups events responding to invitations task lists sorting tasks removing from calendar databases agendas displaying calendars setting display preferences exporting calendar data calendars publishing in HTML 414 CorelLCENTRAL 10 a Usin Corel CENTRAL Card File Corel CENTRAL Card File is a versatile database application that you can use to store and organize personal information inventories reference material and many other types of data You can customize card files to store only the information that you need to record In this section you ll learn about e starting CorelCENTRAL Card File for the first time e creating card files using fields to organize card file data e creating linked fields Starting Corel CENTRAL Card File for the First time When you start CorelCENTRAL Card File for the first time a card file template displays in the application window Corel CENTRAL Card File includes eight read only card file templates with preset fields and groups The CorelCENTRAL Card File templates include baseball stats
414. ts you change the format for part of a page or for a whole page and you can apply one format to selected text and apply a different format to other text in the same document WordPerfect contains on screen alignment tools such as guidelines rulers and ruler guides to help you as you type Guidelines are horizontal and vertical nonprinting lines that you can use to align frames graphic objects and text on a page They are used to show the margins or measurements of elements in a document such as page margins tables columns headers and footers Guidelines appear as gray dotted lines and can be viewed hidden and moved they can be displayed but they do not print in the document You can use guidelines to quickly change margins size tables or columns or to change the look of headers and footers on a page In this section you ll learn about e setting page margins e setting page size definitions and orientation e editing and deleting page size definitions e setting single sided or double sided pages for a document e choosing a document layout for binding e changing the spacing between paragraphs or lines of text e importing text and objects onto a page e creating and deleting columns SETTING PAGE MARGINS You can set margins for a document by using guidelines Guidelines are vertical or horizontal dotted lines that appear on pages measurements or margin markers found on the ruler Margin markers are the double vertical slashes
415. ts in Corel Presentations you can fit data to a curve and forecast trend lines curves and regression types Forecasting allows you to predict values such as future population growth sales potential and future costs The cells in a datasheet can be filled automatically Each row in the datasheet is one of three series The Date series begins with the start date and is multiplied by the step number For example if the step number is 3 and the date step is a week the interval is 3 weeks The Linear series begins with the start value and adds the step number to create each new number in the series For example if the step number is 3 the difference between each cell in the fill is 3 The Growth series begins with the start number and is multiplied by the step number to create each new number in the series For example if the step number is 3 the interval is a multiple of 3 1 3 9 27 To add a formula to Rows 1 Click a cell that contains data 2 Click Data Formulas 3 In the Use data found in the same area enable the Row option 4 Choose a formula from the Use the function list Ifyou choose Moving average from the Use the function list type a value in the Average before after box 5 Inthe Calculate the area type column letters in the Column s box 6 Inthe Place the results in area type a column letter in the Column box lt Ifyou are working with a scatter chart use 0 as the results row to indicate the SW variable row
416. ts option 5 Enable the Entire option To move a spreadsheet 1 Click the tab of the spreadsheet you want to move 2 Drag the spreadsheet tab in any direction until a sheet icon appears 3 Move the sheet icon by dragging right or left along the row of tabs 4 Release the mouse button when the sheet icon is where you want to place the spreadsheet Getting started 169 NM Me You can also move a spreadsheet by clicking Edit Move Sheets and specifying the i sheets to move To copy a spreadsheet 1 Hold down CTRL and click the tab of the spreadsheet you want to copy 2 Drag the spreadsheet tab in any direction until a sheet icon appears 3 Move the sheet icon by dragging right or left along the row of tabs 4 Release the mouse button when the sheet icon is where you want to place the spreadsheet DS You can also copy a spreadsheet by clicking Edit Select all and clicking Edit gt SN Copy Naming spreadsheets Each spreadsheet in a notebook has a tab at the bottom These tabs display the name of the spreadsheet Spreadsheets are initially named with letters of the alphabet in sequence from A to Z continuing from AA to AZ up to ZZZ You can assign a descriptive name to a spreadsheet using up to 64 characters letters and numbers You can also change the spreadsheet name to reflect the naming conventions used by applications such as Microsoft Excel To rename a spreadsheet 1 Click Format gt Sheet properties 2 Click
417. tton again To cycle through open notebooks e On the application bar click the button that displays the notebook s name You can also move through open notebooks by pressing SHIFT F6 to cycle forward SY or CTRL F6 to cycle backwards If the displayed notebook title begins with a directory path you can click Tools Settings File options and disable the Enable full path titles check box This will allow you to display notebook titles without the full directory path Getting started 163 To access MENU OPTIONS USING The keyboard 1 Press and hold down the ALT key 2 Type the underlined letter for the menu you want to open 3 Use the arrow keys to move from menu to menu and from option to option 4 Press ENTER to choose a highlighted option To access dialog box options using the keyboard e Press the relevant key combination as outlined in the table below To Do the following Select options Hold down ALT and type the underlined letter for the option you want Move from option to option Press TAB Enable disable buttons and check boxes Press the SPACEBAR Select text boxes Press TAB and type information into them Select pop up lists Press TAB and press the SPACEBAR to open them Select buttons Press TAB and press ENTER to activate them To go to a specific cell in a Notebook 1 Click Edit Go to 2 Type the cell address in the Reference box If the cell is on another spreadsheet include th
418. ttro Pro lets you edit and format cells rows or columns or an entire spreadsheet For example you can copy cells to different parts of a notebook change the color of a cell or text within the cell change the text orientation of a cell and resize rows and columns You can also create and edit headers footers and margins in a spreadsheet In this section you ll learn about e protecting data e editing cell content e undoing actions e editing grouped data e moving selected cells by dragging moving cells rows and columns e resizing rows and columns e resizing rows and columns to fit a specific cell e hiding rows and columns using formatting tools to format a spreadsheet e wrapping text e joining cells e changing text font and appearance e working with fills patterns and borders e aligning data e working with numeric formats e working with page breaks e creating headers and footers e customizing margins PROTECTING dATA You can prevent users from changing any data in a spreadsheet by protecting spreadsheet cells You can allow users to edit only specific cells unlocking specific cells in a protected spreadsheet Protecting spreadsheet objects prevents users from moving resizing editing or deleting objects on the active spreadsheet Protected objects include floating charts and graphic objects linked and embedded objects using Dynamic Data Exchange or OLE drawn objects and form controls Editing and fo
419. u can add or delete complete records in your tables or you can edit existing records Some fields for example key fields may have restrictions to the way they can be edited because the change could affect the data in a linked table see Establishing Referential Integrity on page 358 To add records To A table Click File gt Open gt Table Choose the drive and folder where the table is stored Double click a table Click View gt Edit data Click Record gt Insert Enter record data nau WN Az When you add a record it is sorted into the table automatically based on the key field Working with tables and records 379 To edit a record nu FWN Click File Open Table Choose the drive and folder where the table is stored Double click a table Click View Edit data Click the field you want to change Type new data into the field To delete a Record from a table nau FWN Click File gt Open gt Table Choose the drive and folder where the table is stored Double click a table Click View gt Edit data Click the record marker at the left hand end of the record you want to delete Click Record gt Delete oe You cannot retrieve a record once it has been deleted Locating Records Paradox provides you with several ways of finding fields records and values in large tables You can also locate and replace field values To locate a Field 1 2 3 4 5 Click File gt
420. u can spot them and decide whether to correct them You can enable and disable Spell As You Go You can also correct spelling errors using the spelling checker QuickCorrect Grammatik and Prompt As You Go You can check for misspelled words in documents check spelling for a specified number of pages and have WordPerfect skip words in the active document only As you type WordPerfect underlines in red words that are not in WordPerfect dictionaries Correcting grammar You can use Grammar As You Go to correct grammar errors Grammar As You Go underlines in blue words or phrases that might be incorrect You can enable or disable Grammar As You Go Grammar As You Go is similar to Grammatik and includes the checking features of Spell As You Go Replacing incorrect words Prompt As You Go can act as a spelling checker a grammar checker or a thesaurus depending on where the cursor is placed The Prompt As You Go list box displays suggestions as you type If you place the cursor on a misspelled word or a possible grammar error a list of corrections displays in the Prompt As You Go list box on the property bar If you place the cursor on a word that is properly spelled and free of grammar errors a list of possible synonyms displays in the Prompt As You Go list box Prompt As You Go helps you identify errors as you create documents by using a color coding system to identify the type of error it encounters If the text in the Prompt As You
421. u want the column inserted 2 Click Insert Insert column Ne When you insert a column within the boundaries of a named area or a cell referenced by a formula the cell references expand to include the new column PS You can insert multiple columns by selecting multiple columns headings then y clicking Insert Insert column To delere a cell 1 Select the cell you want to delete 2 Click Edit gt Delete cells 3 Enable the Partial option in the Span area 4 Enable one of the following options in the Dimension area e Rows the cell below the selected cell will shift up Columns the cell to the right of the selected cell will shift to the left Sheets the corresponding cell on the next spreadsheet will shift to the current spreadsheet DS You can also delete multiple cells by first selecting a block of cells SN To delere a row or a column 1 Select the row or column heading 2 Click Edit gt Delete cells iD Z You can delete multiple rows or columns by selecting multiple headings then oN clicking Edit Delete cells To restrict The addition of rows and columns 1 Press END and press the DOWN ARROW 2 Press END and press the RIGHT ARROW The cursor is at the last cell in the spreadsheet 3 Type any label or value 4 Press HOME to get back to the first cell in the spreadsheet When you try to add a row or column an out of boundary message displays 168 Quarrro Pro 10 MMe If the spreadsheet contains data
422. ually controlling the display of each slide A slide show can also be played automatically with each slide displayed in succession and where you can control the time delay between the display of each slide To check the appearance transition sound and so on of a slide without playing the entire slide show you can use QuickPlay You can also play portable slide shows which play on any computer that uses the Windows operating system even if it doesn t have Corel Presentations installed For information about creating portable slide shows see Creating portable slide shows on page 265 To play slide shows manually 1 Click View Play slide show 2 Choose a slide from the Beginning slide list box If you want to play the slide show continuously enable the Repeat slide show until you press ESC check box 3 Click Play 4 Click in the slide show window to advance to the next slide or animation If you want to return to the previous slide or animation right click the slide show window and click Previous slide PS You can also advance to the next slide or animation by pressing the spacebar LON SN You can also return to the previous slide or animation by pressing PAGE UP To play a slide show automatically 1 Click Format gt Slide properties Display sequence 2 In the Display next slide area enable the After a delay of option 3 Type a value in the Seconds box 4 Enable the Apply to all slides in slide show ch
423. uattro Pro 10 you cannot use toolbars that you created in earlier versions of Quattro Pro These toolbars must be re created However you can import toolbars that other people have created in Quattro Pro 10 by using the workspace feature You can display toolbars horizontally or vertically around the Quattro Pro window or display a floating toolbar within the spreadsheet window You can hide any toolbar you don t want displayed The following standard toolbars come with Quattro Pro e Notebook provides tools for entering and editing data Selection formatting provides tools for manipulating the current selection e Data manipulation provides tools for working with notebook cells and selections Drawing tools provides tools for drawing or inserting objects in a graphics window and for arranging objects on a layer on top of the notebook e Outlining tools provides tools for grouping data in collapsible and expandable sets of information e Auditing tools provides tools for tracing dependent cells precedents and even errors in large complex notebooks Review provides tools for reviewing shared notebooks Experts and numeric tools provides tools for quickly creating maps charts and budgets and for performing computations e CrossTab report provides tools for manipulating cross tab reports e Visual Basic launches the Visual Basic Editor and Visual Basic Design Mode You can reposition a tool
424. uickCorrect list 1 Click Tools gt QuickCorrect 2 Choose a word from the Misspelled word list box 3 Click Delete entry 4 Inthe Delete selected QuickCorrect entry confirmation box click Yes Editing documents 87 From here For more information about Finding text Replacing text Entering text automatically using QuickWords Changing QuickWords Renaming QuickWords Expanding QuickWords Deleting QuickWords Finding and replacing codes Reviewing documents Comparing documents Changing the settings for document review and compare Adding comments Deleting comments Displaying comments Hiding comments Editing comments Converting text to comments and comments to text Cutting copying and pasting text and graphics Undoing redoing and repeating actions In the online Help Index type finding text replacing text QuickWords entering text automatically QuickWords changing QuickWords renaming QuickWords expanding QuickWords deleting codes replacing documents reviewing documents comparing document review settings changing comments adding comments deleting comments displaying comments hiding comments editing comments converting cutting actions 88 WordPerfect 10 Using graphics Q WordPerfect 10 lets you insert graphics such as shapes drawings and clipart images into documents You can size move and modify graphics to suit your needs In this sec
425. umbers Suppressing and discontinuing page numbers Editing documents Marking misspelled words and grammatical errors as you type Correcting misspelled words automatically Using graphics Creating graphics Inserting graphics Working in the draw picture window Modifying shapes Manipulating graphics Arranging graphics Aligning and distributing object Working with color Changing the appearance of images Moving images Using tables and charts Creating tables 68 69 70 71 71 73 74 74 74 77 79 8l 81 82 83 87 85 87 89 89 91 92 93 94 94 96 96 97 98 101 101 72 Table of contents WordPerfect 10 Selecting and moving table components 102 Setting and inserting rows and columns in tables o 104 Joining and splitting table cells 6 wee 104 Deleting tables and table components a 105 Rotating table cell contents and skewing cells o 106 Adjusting table column widths ae tee A Ma Se A a 107 Creating table header rows and adjusting table rows 107 Applying fills lines and color to tables Sr Sig a RA oer RO 8 108 Applying borders to tables 2 2 0 e 109 Entering formulas in tables 2 2 109 Calculating formulas in tables we 110 Creating charts 111 Applying borders and fills 117 Adding borders a a a 115 Editing borders ww 116 Removing borders 2 a a 117 Applying fills
426. urses to teach you how to get the most out of WordPerfect Office 2002 Corel Approved Curriculum Vendors are independent organizations that carry training curricula for WordPerfect Office 2002 products Corel Training Partners are required to use courseware from Corel Approved Curriculum Vendors which ensures that course participants receive quality training and learning materials If you are looking for the closest Corel Training Partner in your city want to become Corel Certified for WordPerfect Office 2002 or want your organization to be approved as a Corel Training Partner visit our Web site at www corel com learning training index htm Third party manuals and MAGAZINES Third party manuals for WordPerfect Office 2002 applications are available at your local computer store or bookstore You can also find examples of specific tasks for WordPerfect Office 2002 applications in computer magazines 24 Introduction Corel support ANd SERVICES The Corel product you are using is supported by the Corel Client Services team This team is committed to providing quality customer service and support that is easy to access and convenient to use while fostering one to one customer relationships If you have a question about the features and functions of Corel applications or operating systems see the user guide or online Help for the product you are using Updates and technical information are also available in the Release Notes Registering C
427. utlines we 263 O Oe 6 creating portable 265 scatter charts ee ee 305 deleting layouts ee 7 325 selected branches drawing shapes 291 viewing 2 2 BHT editing shapes 2 2 1 291 292 selecting emailing e 6 Ca 204 ck i che e Sie B26 allcellsindatasheets 311 inserting textboxes 1 1 ee 273 all objects in windows or slides 283 inserting text lines 273 areas of bitmapped images 296 openingblank 262 multiple objects noch gl tor ar 2283 opening new o 262 Objects 283 opening new from predefined projects 262 objects automatically 2 2 2 283 Playing 289 transparent colors for bitmapped images 299 playing automatically 289 selective replace tool 298 playing by using QuickPlay 290 selectively replacing playing manually 289 colors in bitmapped images 298 playing portable 290 sending previewing layouts 325 slide shows to other applications 326 printing o 0 ee 321 322 slide shows to WordPerfect 327 publishing as HTML documents 325 setting publishingtoPDF 326 line spacing 2 ee 275 removing slides s so i si a miao iat 263 text attributes aaa 274 O 262 setting up saving movies Within 303 alignment guides 267 sending
428. vailable only when automatic hyphenation is enabled and when the document is set to prompt you when a word needs hyphenation For information about enabling hyphenation see Hyphenating text on page 70 To choose a hyphenation option 1 Type text in a document The Position hyphen dialog box displays when a hyphen is required 2 Click one of the following Insert hyphen inserts a hyphen which displays and prints only when the word spans the hyphenation zone Insert space divides the word by adding a space between the letters you specify e Hyphenation SRt divides the word by putting a soft return between the letters you specify when the word spans the hyphenation zone Ignore word prevents the word from being hyphenated Suspend hyphenation halts hyphenation temporarily xe When the prompt for hyphenation is set to Never the Position hyphen dialog box does not display FORMATTING TEXT 71 To position the hyphen in a word 1 Type text in a document The Position hyphen dialog box displays when a hyphen is required 2 Click in the Use mouse or arrow keys to position hyphen box and press any of the following keys LEFT ARROW moves the hyphen to the left of the displayed word RIGHT ARROW moves the hyphen to the right of the displayed word QS To reposition the hyphen click where you want the hyphen to display in the word in the Use mouse or arrow keys to position hyphen box
429. ve cells 196 Quattro Pro 10 PS You can copy a cell by holding down CTRL as you drag To move cells ro another spreadsheet by dragging Click Window gt New view 2 Click Window gt Tile side to side 3 In the window view that represents the destination spreadsheet click the tab for the spreadsheet to which you want to drag the cell In the window view that represents the source of the cells select a cell or cells 5 Point to an edge of the cells until a four way arrow displays Drag the cells to the destination area To move cells to another notebook by dragging Open the notebook to which you want to drag the selected cells Select the cell or cells that you want to move Point to an edge of the cells until a four way arrow displays PWN Drag the cells onto the notebook name on the application bar that is the notebook you want to move the cells to 5 Hold down the left mouse button until the second notebook displays and drag the cells into the notebook To change the delay time for the Drag and Drop arrow 1 Click Tools gt Settings 2 Inthe list of categories double click Workspaces Application and click General 3 Type a new interval time in the Cell drag and drop delay time box Moving cells rows and columns Quattro Pro lets you copy or move cells You can copy or move cells by selecting the cells directly on a spreadsheet or you can copy cells by specifying the location of the cell You can control wh
430. ventions The following are conventions related to using the mouse When you see this Do the following Click File gt New Click Edit gt Select Sentence Enable a check box Disable a check box Select text Click a paragraph Click a frame Right click and click Paste Click the File menu with the mouse and click the word New in the menu Click the Edit menu click Select and click Sentence from the submenu that appears Click the check box to place a check mark or an X in the box Click the check box to remove the check mark or nyt Click and drag to highlight text Click to plant the cursor in the paragraph Click anywhere in a frame or click the border of the frame Click the right mouse button and click the Paste command from the submenu that appears The following conventions are related to keyboard actions When you see this Do the following Press ENTER CTRL SHIFT Press the Enter key on your keyboard Press the Control key and the Shift key at the same time Introduction The following conventions are used in this user guide When you see this This is NM Me A note a x Pp N A tip About Corel Corporation Corel Corporation is an internationally recognized developer of award winning business productivity and graphics applications Development of market leading products such as WordPerfect Office 2002 and the CorelDRAW lin
431. verting merge files Sorting viewing and finding records in data files Editing merge data Merging with address books Changing merge options Using merge commands In the online Help Index type converting merge files sorting editing merge data address books merging merging changing merge options merge commands Merging documents 129 Publishing Web documents WordPerfect 10 lets you publish documents to HTML and to PDE HTML documents can be viewed on the Web PDF documents are viewed using the Adobe Acrobat Reader In this section you ll learn about e publishing to HTML e publishing to PDF building XML documents Publishing ro HTML When you publish a document to HTML WordPerfect saves it as a HTM file You can browse the web from WordPerfect and you can preview your document in a browser from within WordPerfect When you publish graphics to HTML they are automatically converted to a commonly used Web format You can also specify a graphics file format Ifa graphic consists of few colors or sharp edges such as a line drawing you may want to convert the graphic to gif If a graphic consists of broad tonal ranges such as photographs or scanned images you may want to convert the graphic to jpg To publish to HTML 1 Click File Publish to HTML 2 Type a name in the HTML file name box or choose a file by clicking the browse button 3 Click Publish To browse the Web from WordPerfect e C
432. want to insert a file from another application include its filename extension 4 Type the cell location before which you want to place the inserted file in the Before sheet box iz If the file is inserted within the boundaries of a named selection of cells or cells a referenced by a formula references expand to include the new spreadsheets If inserting a file expands a named selection of cells or cell reference beyond the limit of a notebook beyond spreadsheet ZZZ the reference becomes ERR To import a text file 1 Click File Open 2 Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored 3 Choose ASCII Text txt from the File type list box 4 Double click the filename 5 From the Parse settings list box choose one of the following Automatic automatically determines how best to parse the imported text file Delimited auto automatically parses imported delimited text files e Fixed width auto automatically parses imported fixed width text files ica Lines larger than 4 KB are not imported If the total number of lines rows you import exceeds the limit of the number of rows you specified for a spreadsheet the data is truncated to this limit Files must be unformatted and saved as plain ASCII text files without any control codes or other word processor formatting Before you open a text file remove any special formatting characters such as bold underlining or centering To save a text file 1 Select a cell on t
433. where you want to save the file 3 Type a filename in the Filename box 4 Click Save Working with the Slide Ourliner You create an outline for a slide show in the Slide Outliner An outline is a numbered list that includes all the text found in every slide in a slide show You can create an outline by choosing a slide layout and typing the text for each slide You can type the text for slide titles subtitles text slides bulleted list slides and combination slides 262 Corel Presentations 10 The following image shows how the Slide Outliner can be used to view and create 1 a slide outline 2 a slide vel Miura To create a slide show outline Click View Slide Outliner Type a title in the slide show and press ENTER Type a subtitle in the slide show and press ENTER Type any text in the slide show Click Insert New slide In the New slide dialog box click a slide layout on the Layout palette nau FWN Adding and removing slides You can build a slide show by adding one slide or several slides at a time You can also delete any slides you have added To add a slide 1 Click Insert New slide 2 Click a slide layout on the Layout palette 3 Type a value in the Number to add box To delete a slide 1 Click a slide tab at the bottom of the slide show window 2 Click Edit Delete slide s Working with the Slide Sorter The Slide Sorter displays thumbnail sketches of each slide in a slide show You
434. ws and columns 163 manipulating spreadsheets 163 data 233 notebook components 155 margins notebook links changing settings 212 creating 227 Index Quattro Pro 10 243 hyperlinks Internet links pasting supporting files updating using wildcards notebooks changing size closing components creating cycling through open dragging cells editing emailing exiting folders formatting hyperlinks minimized moving cells to new navigating new new views opening resizing saving sending sending electronically setting size statistics summary summary information titles numbers aligning as text entering justifying numeric formats numeric formatting O objects hiding locking protecting Objects sheet navigating Objects View selecting OLAP cae OLAP CrossTab reports 229 gs 229 228 229 227 227 228 182 178 180 155 181 182 163 196 191 221 180 178 191 229 163 197 163 181 173 y n 182 170 182 219 178 179 221 221 172 170 171 178 170 171 163 206 182 184 185 206 208 209 176 192 192 163 173 233 234 importing 235 OLAP data sources selecting 234 OLE container 225 displaying icons 226 embedding 225 linking 225 linking objects 226 object properties Se 227 Quattro Pro objects 226 227 resizing objects 227 server 225 source files 227 viewing objects Ue i ene hen oes Ne oe
435. y following the instructions in the Internet Publisher wizard 6 Click Finish If you want to save the slide show layout for future use in the Save layout dialog box type a filename in the box and click Save You can also Preview an existing layout In the Internet Publisher wizard click Layout Choose a layout option from the list Click View layout Delete an existing layout In the Internet Publisher wizard click Layout Choose a layout option from the list Click Delete layout Internet and electronic publishing 325 Publishing to Portable Document Format PDF Publishing a slide show as an electronic document in Portable Document Format PDF preserves the typography images graphics color and formatting of the original publication PDF also allows you flexibility to specify text formatting color model and compression options PDF files are platform independent and can be edited by PC UNIX and Macintosh users with the Adobe Acrobat Writer and they can be viewed shared and printed using the Adobe Acrobat Reader The Adobe Acrobat Reader is included with Corel Presentations and can be installed from the WordPerfect Office 2002 CD To publish a slide show to PDF 1 Click File Publish to PDF 2 Click the General tab 3 Type a file path and filename in the Filename box 4 Inthe Export range area enable one of the following options Full document Current view e Selection Slides and ty
436. ynchronize window panes 1 Click View Split window 2 Enable the Synchronize check box To resize window panes 1 Move the mouse pointer over the pane splitter E at the lower right of the left or top pane until the double arrow appears 2 Drag to the new position where you would like the first pane to end A When you resize panes the following property changes in one pane do not affect the appearance of the other pane border or gridline properties locked titles row height column width default column width or reveal hide properties Zooming data and hiding and displaying SCREEN COMPONENTS Zoom lets you see an entire printed page or focus in on the detail of a few cells You can set zoom for an entire notebook or for individual sheets The default setting is 100 Percentages less than 100 show more columns and rows percentages greater than 100 show fewer You can also use the Zoom to fit option to automatically fill the screen with the current selection 176 Quarrro Pro 10 You can hide scroll bars tabs and graphics You may want to hide parts of the screen in just one notebook for example when you are creating a special presentation notebook or form Displaying only the outlines of graphics such as charts clipart and shapes allows you to scroll and print faster You can hide parts of the screen in all future notebooks by setting display options You can also hide borders and grid lines on a spreadsheet These options
437. ys around the grouped graphics You can size move or edit the group of graphics For information about sizing graphics see Manipulating graphics on page 94 For information about moving graphics see Moving an image in the online Help To separate Graphics Right click one of the grouped graphics and click Separate Using Graphics 95 Aligning and distributing objects WordPerfect lets you align and distribute objects in relation to themselves and the page You can for example align a series of objects horizontally and vertically To align an object 1 Select an object 2 Click Tools gt Align and distribute 3 Click the Align tab 4 Enable any of the check boxes that correspond to the horizontal and vertical alignment you want If you want to align an object vertically enable the Left Center or Right check box 5 In the Align area enable one of the following check boxes Edge of page aligns objects with the edge of the page e Center of page centers objects on the page Edge of column aligns objects with the edge of the column e Center of column centers objects in the column WordPerfect displays a warning explaining that the object s anchor position may be changed If you wish to skip this warning enable the Do not show this warning again check box PS You can also align a series of objects by selecting the objects To distribute objects Select the objects you want to distribu
438. ystem default sound To ser a Quick alarm 1 Right click the Corel CENTRAL Alarms icon on the DAD and click Set alarm 2 Click Quick 3 In the Quick alarm dialog box type a subject in the Subject box 4 Choose a time from the Alarm after list box To ser an Advanced alarm Right click the CorelCENTRAL Alarms icon on the DAD and click Set alarm Click Advanced In the Set alarm dialog box type a subject in the Subject box In the Alarm date box click the Mini calendar button fH and choose a date uk WN Choose a time from the Alarm time list box If you want to set a snooze time choose a time from the Snooze interval list box To apply a custom sound to an Advanced alarm Right click the CorelCENTRAL Alarms icon on the DAD and click Edit quick alarms In the Set alarm dialog box choose an alarm from the Alarm expires at list box Click Edit In the Alarm sound box click the Browse button E 5 uk WN Choose the drive and folder where the wav mp3 or CD file is located Editing and deleting alarms You can edit and delete alarms You can also change a Quick alarm to an Advanced alarm To edit an alarm 1 Right click the CorelCENTRAL Alarms icon on the DAD and click Edit quick alarm 2 Choose an alarm and click Edit 3 In the Set alarm dialog box edit the alarm s properties Ifyou want to temporarily turn off the alarm click Snooze To delere an alarm 1 Right click the CorelCENTRAL Alarms icon on the DAD
439. z The page break is inserted before the cell you click If you click below or to the right of an existing hard page break the new page break created has the opposite orientation For example if you click next to a horizontal page break a vertical page break is created Editing and formatting a spreadsheet 209 Qs You can create a horizontal page break by selecting a row and clicking Insert Page l SW Y break gt Create You can also insert a hard page break by clicking where you want to insert a page break and pressing CTRL ENTER This only applies if you are not in edit mode To convert soft page breaks to hard page breaks 1 Move the pointer over the displayed page break until it changes to a double arrow 2 Right click the page break and click Set hard page break To convert hard page breaks to soft page breaks 1 Move the pointer over the displayed page break until it changes to a double arrow 2 Right click the page break and click Remove hard page break To delere hard paqe breaks 1 Click below or right of the page break 2 Click Insert Page break gt Delete Os You can also delete all page breaks by clicking Insert Page break gt Delete all SY Creating headers and footers Headers and footers are lines of text that print at the top and bottom of each page Adding headers and footers provides a place to include such information as page numbers title date time and filename on each notebook p
440. ze parse settings for delimited text files O UOA UN Click Tools Data tools QuickColumns Click the Range picker he in the Text source box and select the source cells Click the Range picker in the Destination box and select a location for the imported data Choose Delimited auto from the Parse settings list box Click Settings In the Parse settings dialog box enable any of the following options Apply formatting to spreadsheet automatically applies the existing spreadsheet formatting to the imported text Set spreadsheet column widths automatically applies the existing spreadsheet column width to the imported text Set page length to lets you type the number of lines per page in the Lines box Text qualifier lets you select the character you want Quattro Pro to identify as a label indicator 7 Enable check boxes to establish delimiters data breaks in each of the following End of cell establishes the selected character or characters as the start of a new cell within a row End of row establishes the selected character or characters as the start of a new row End of sheet establishes the selected character or characters as the start of a new spreadsheet If you want to save your parse settings for future use click Save and type a filename with a qpx extension iP If you want to load previously saved parse settings press the Browse button beside W the Parse settings list box and locate

WordPerfect Office 2002 User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents